Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter: User's Guide

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
Notices COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS
DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH
perform, display, or disclose
commercial computer software or
THESE TERMS, THE WARRANTY commercial computer software
© Keysight Technologies TERMS IN THE SEPARATE documentation. No additional
2006-2019 AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL. government requirements beyond
No part of this manual may be those set forth in the EULA shall
Technology Licenses apply, except to the extent that those
reproduced in any form or by any
means (including electronic storage terms, rights, or licenses are
The hardware and/or software
and retrieval or translation into a explicitly required from all providers
described in this document are
foreign language) without prior of commercial computer software
furnished under a license and may be
agreement and written consent from pursuant to the FAR and the DFARS
used or copied only in accordance
Keysight Technologies, Inc. as and are set forth specifically in
with the terms of such license.
governed by United States and writing elsewhere in the EULA.
international copyright laws. Declaration of Conformity Keysight shall be under no obligation
to update, revise or otherwise modify
Trademark Acknowledgments Declarations of Conformity for this the Software. With respect to any
product and for other Keysight technical data as defined by FAR
Manual Part Number products may be downloaded from 2.101, pursuant to FAR 12.211 and
the Web. Go to 27.404.2 and DFARS 227.7102, the
E4980-90230 http://www.keysight.com/go/confor U.S. government acquires no greater
mity. You can then search by product than Limited Rights as defined in FAR
Edition number to find the latest Declaration 27.401 or DFAR 227.7103-5 (c), as
Edition 16, October 2019 of Conformity. applicable in any technical data.
Printed in Malaysia U.S. Government Rights Safety Notices

Published by: The Software is “commercial
computer software,” as defined by
Keysight Technologies International Federal Acquisition Regulation
Japan G.K, (“FAR”) 2.101. Pursuant to FAR
1-3-3 Higashikawasaki-cho 12.212 and 27.405-3 and A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It
Chuo-ku Department of Defense FAR calls attention to an operating
Kobe-shi, Hyogo, Japan Supplement (“DFARS”) 227.7202, the procedure, practice, or the like that,
U.S. government acquires if not correctly performed or adhered
Warranty commercial computer software to, could result in damage to the
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS under the same terms by which the product or loss of important data. Do
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” software is customarily provided to not proceed beyond a CAUTION
AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING the public. Accordingly, Keysight notice until the indicated conditions
CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN provides the Software to U.S. are fully understood and met.
FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO government customers under its
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED standard commercial license, which
BY APPLICABLE LAW, KEYSIGHT is embodied in its End User License
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, Agreement (EULA), a copy of which
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH can be found at
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND http://www.keysight.com/find/sweul A WARNING notice denotes a hazard.
ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED a. The license set forth in the EULA It calls attention to an operating
HEREIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT represents the exclusive authority by procedure, practice, or the like that,
LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED which the U.S. government may use, if not correctly performed or adhered
WARRANTIES OF modify, distribute, or disclose the to, could result in personal injury or
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS Software. The EULA and the license death. Do not proceed beyond a
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. set forth therein, does not require or WARNING notice until the indicated
KEYSIGHT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE permit, among other things, that conditions are fully understood and
FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL Keysight: (1) Furnish technical met.
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN information related to commercial
CONNECTION WITH THE computer software or commercial
FURNISHING, USE, OR computer software documentation
PERFORMANCE OF THIS that is not customarily provided to
DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION the public; or (2) Relinquish to, or
CONTAINED HEREIN. SHOULD otherwise provide, the government
KEYSIGHT AND THE USER HAVE A rights in excess of these rights
SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT customarily provided to the public to
WITH WARRANTY TERMS use, modify, reproduce, release,
Contents
Table of Contents
1. Unpacking and Preparation

Contents of this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Checking the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Preparations before Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Verifying the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting up the Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Verifying and Connecting the Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How to Remove the Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Caution when Using the Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operating Environments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ventilation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Ensuring Adequate Free Space around the LCR meter for Immediate Disconnection of the
Power Cable in Case of Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting the E4980A/AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Turning the Power ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Disconnecting from the Supply Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2. Overview
Product Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Front Panel: Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1. Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2. LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3. Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4. Menu keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5. Cursor keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6. Entry keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7. LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8. Preset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
9. Trigger key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10. DC Bias key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
11. DC Source key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
12. UNKNOWN terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
13. Front USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
14. Ground terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
15. DC Source terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear Panel: Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1. GPIB Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 3

Contents
2. Interface Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

3. USB (USBTMC) Interface Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
4. LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
5. External Trigger Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
6. Serial Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
7. Power Cable Receptacle (to LINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
8. Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Screen Area: Names and Functions of Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
1. Display Page Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
2. Comment Line Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3. Softkey Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
4. Measurement Data/Conditions Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
5. Input Line Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
6. System Message Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
7. Status Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
How to Use Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
How to Use Skip Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
3. Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Measurement Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Impedance range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Test Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Test Signal Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
DC Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Measurement Time Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Display Setting for Measurement Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Displaying Errors instead of Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Monitor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
BIN NO. DISPLAY Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Comparator Function ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Counter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
DISPLAY BLANK Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
4. Configuring Measurement Conditions (Display and Function Related Settings)

Initializing the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
MEAS SETUP page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
4 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

Contents
Comment line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Automatic level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DC Bias Current Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Averaging Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Trigger Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Step Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
DC Bias Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
DC Bias Current Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
DCR Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DCI Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
DC Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Automatic Bias Polarity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Deviation Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CORRECTION page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
To set the correction function to on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
The correction functions of the E4980A/AL are operated as follows:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Open Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Short Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Correction Based on User-Specified Frequency Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Relationships between Correction Based on All Frequency Points and Correction Based on
Specified Frequency Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reading/Writing Correction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Measurement Functions for the Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Selecting Single/Multiple Correction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Selecting the Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Parameter Swap Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Comparator Limit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Tolerance Mode Nominal Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Turning On/Off the Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Turning On/Off the Auxiliary Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Beep Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Lower and Upper Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
LIST SWEEP SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Sweep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
List Sweep Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Sweep Points and Limit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sweep Parameter Auto-completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5. System Configurations
SYSTEM INFO Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Contents
Handler Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Scanner Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Monitor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
SYSTEM CONFIG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Turning On/Off the Beep Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Changing the Beep Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Changing the Beep Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Configuring the System Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Configuring the GPIB Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Configuring the LAN IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
SELF TEST Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Choosing a Test Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
SERVICE Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Monitor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Saving the System Information into External Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
6. Save/Recall
Overview of Save/Recall Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Save Methods and Their Uses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Folder/File Structure on USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
USB Memory Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Saving/Recalling Instrument Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Overview of Instrument Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Medium Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Choosing a Register Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Memory Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Comment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Saving/Recalling Instrument Configuration States into/from the Internal Memory . . . .177
Saving/Recalling Instrument Configuration States into/from USB Memory . . . . . . . . . .179
Using the Auto Recall Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Saving Measurement Results into USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Measurement Result Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
To save measurement results into USB memory: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
How to save the measurement result of List Sweep Measurement to USB memory. . . .186
Saving a Screenshot into USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
To save a screenshot into USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
7. Measurement Procedure and Examples

Basic Measurement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Impedance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Parallel/Series Circuit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Contents
Selecting Circuit Mode of Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Selecting Circuit Mode of Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Test Signal Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Test Signal Level Across the DUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Test Signal Level Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Four-Terminal Pair Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Measurement Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Capacitance to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Contact Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Extending Test Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Guarding for Measurement of Low Capacitance Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Shielding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Correction Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Performing OPEN Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Performing SHORT Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Performing LOAD Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Parasitics Incident to DUT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Characteristics Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Capacitor Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Inductance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Measurements Using DC source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8. Overview of Remote Control

Types of remote control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
GPIB remote control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
What is GPIB?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Device selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
LAN remote control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Control over SICL-LAN server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Control over telnet server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Control via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
USB Remote Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Sending SCPI command messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Types and structure of commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Grammar of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Remote mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Trigger System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Contents
System-wide states and transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Data Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Data Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
When Data Buffer Memory is Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Output Format of Data Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Starting a Measurement Cycle (triggering the instrument) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Configuring the instrument to automatically perform continuous measurement . . . . . .260
Starting Measurement on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Waiting for the End of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Using the status register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Status Byte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Enabling the Status Byte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Operation Status Register Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Standard Event Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Enabling the Event Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
9. Sample Program
Set Up Measurement Conditions and LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Detecting End of Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Read Measurement Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Read measurement data in ASCII format (Comparator). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Read measurement data in ASCII format (Data buffer memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Read measurement data in ASCII format (List sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Read measurement data in BINARY (comparator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Read measurement data in BINARY format (Data buffer memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Read measurement data in BINARY format (List sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Save/Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Read/Write correction data at specified frequency points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
10. SCPI Command Reference

Notational conventions in this command reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Equivalent key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
E4980A/AL commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
*ESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
*ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

Contents
*IDN?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
*LRN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
*OPC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
*OPT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
*STB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
*TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
*TST?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
:ABORt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
:AMPLitude:ALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
:APERture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
:BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
:BIAS:POLarity:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
:BIAS:POLarity:CURRent[:LEVel]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
:BIAS:POLarity:VOLTage[:LEVel]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
:BIAS:RANGe:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
:BIAS:STATe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
:BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
:COMParator:ABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
:COMParator:BEEPer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
:COMParator:BIN:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:COMParator:MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
:COMParator:SEQuence:BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
:COMParator:SLIMit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
:COMParator[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
:COMParator:SWAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
:COMParator:TOLerance:BIN[1-9] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
:COMParator:TOLerance:NOMinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
:CONTrol:CBIas:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
:CONTrol:HANDler:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
:CONTrol:SCANner:STATe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
:CORRection:LENGth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
:CORRection:LOAD:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
:CORRection:LOAD:TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
:CORRection:METHod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
:CORRection:OPEN[:EXECute] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Contents
:CORRection:OPEN:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
:CORRection:SHORt[:EXECute]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
:CORRection:SHORt:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:FREQuency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD[:EXECute]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:STANdard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN[:EXECute] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:SHORt[:EXECute]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
:CORRection:USE[:CHANnel] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
:CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
:CORRection:USE:DATA:SINGle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
:CURRent[:LEVel]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
:DISPlay:CCLear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
:DISPlay:ENABle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
:DISPlay:LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
:DISPlay:PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD:DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
:FETCh[:IMPedance]:CORRected?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
:FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
:FETCh:SMONitor:IAC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
:FETCh:SMONitor:IDC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
:FETCh:SMONitor:VAC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
:FETCh:SMONitor:VDC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
:FORMat:ASCii:LONG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
:FORMat:BORDer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
:FORMat[:DATA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
:FORMat:EXPonent:DIGit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
:FREQuency[:CW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe[:VALue] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence:FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence[:VALue] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
:FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IAC[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IDC[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VAC[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VDC[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

Contents
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
:INITiate:CONTinuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
:INITiate[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
:LIST:BAND[1-201] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
:LIST:BIAS:CURRent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
:LIST:BIAS:VOLTage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
:LIST:CLEar:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
:LIST:CURRent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
:LIST:DCSource:VOLTage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
:LIST:FREQuency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
:LIST:MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
:LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
:LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
:LIST:STIMulus:DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
:LIST:STIMulus:MDATa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
:LIST:STIMulus:TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
:LIST:VOLTage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
:MEMory:CLEar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
:MEMory:DIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
:MEMory:FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
:MEMory:READ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
:MMEMory:DELete[:REGister] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe[:REGister] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe[:REGister] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:VALue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation[:STATe]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
:OUTPut:HPOWer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
:SOURce:DCSource:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
:SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
:SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
:SYSTem:BEEPer:TONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:ADDRess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:AIP[:STATe]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONTrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:ADDRess? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Contents
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:DGATeway? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:SMASk? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DGATeway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DHCP[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:MAC?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:RESTart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SMASk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
:SYSTem:DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
:SYSTem:KLOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
:SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer[:NAME] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
:SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer:DEFault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
:SYSTem:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
:SYSTem:RESTart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
:SYSTem:TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
:TRIGger:DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
:TRIGger[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
:TRIGger:SOURce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
:TRIGger:TDEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
:VOLTage[:LEVel] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Command list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
List by function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Command Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Softkey Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
11. Specifications and Supplemental Information
12. Precautions for Use and Daily Checks

Precautions for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Avoiding improper input from the front panel (key lock function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Daily Checks (Executing the self-test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Self-test at power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Executing the self-test from the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Cleaning this Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Unknown Terminals/DC Source Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Cleaning Parts Other than Unknown Terminals and DC Source Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Cautions Applicable to Requesting Repair, Replacement, Regular Calibration, etc. . . . . . .424
Caution when Sending the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Recommended Calibration Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

Contents
13. Troubleshooting
Primary Trouble Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Check Items When Trouble Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
The system does not start up (Nothing is displayed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
The system starts up, but the normal measurement screen does not appear (Service Mode)
427
An overload message is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Beeping persists when turning on the comparator function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
The front panel keys are unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Clearly abnormal measured value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Saving to USB memory fails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
An error message or warning message is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Check Items When Trouble Occurs During Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
The instrument does not respond to the external controller or malfunctions . . . . . . . . 430
You cannot read out the measured value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
An error message is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
A.Manual Changes
Manual Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Change 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Change 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Change 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Change 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Change 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
B.Error Messages
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Error Messages Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
GPIB devices in IEEE488.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
A.................................................................... 446
C.................................................................... 446
I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
S .................................................................... 447
C.List of Default Values

List of Default Values, Save/Recall Settings, and Backup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
List of Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Contents
List of LAN Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
D.Bias Current Interface

Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
42841A Bias Current Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Operation Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Specifications when Measuring with the 42841A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Measurement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
E.Handler Interface
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Signal Line Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Signal Line Definitions for the Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Signal Line Definitions for the List Sweep Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
DC Isolation Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
DC isolation input signals (photo-coupled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Setting Up the Handler Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Using the Handler Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Setting Up the Handler Interface for Use with the Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Setting Up the Handler Interface Board for Use with the List Sweep Comparator . . . . .491
Signals Activated when Overload Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
F.Scanner Interface
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Supplemental Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Signal Input/Output Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Scanner Interface Input/Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Scanner Interface I/O Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Timing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Electrical Characteristics of the Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Channel Selection Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504

Contents
External Trigger Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Control Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Setting Up the Scanner Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
How to Use the Scanner Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Basic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Activating Scanner Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Correction Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Test Frequency and Reference Value Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Correction Data Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Correction Data Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Activating the Correction Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Correction Data Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
G.Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A and E4980A/AL

Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A, and E4980A/AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Contents

User’s Guide
1 Unpacking and Preparation
This chapter describes how to set up and start the Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter.
Contents of this Chapter
- Checking the Shipment on page?

After you receive the E4980A/AL, check all the items in the packing container.
- Preparation before Use on page?
Shows how to check the power supply as well as check and connect the power
cable. This section also describes how to deal with a blown fuse.
- How to Remove the Handle on page?
Shows how to attach and remove the handle.
- Environmental Requirements on page?
Describes the system requirements needed to install the E4980A/AL and how to
secure space for heat radiation.
- Starting the E4980A/AL on page?
Describes how to turn on/off the power switch and cut off the power supply.
17
1- Unpacking and Preparation
Checking the Shipment

After you receive the E4980A/AL, carry out checks during unpacking according
to the following procedure.
If the external face of the LCR meter (such as the cover, front/rear panel,
LCD screen, power switch, and port connectors) appears to have been
damaged during transport, do not turn on the power switch. Otherwise,
you may get an electrical shock.
Step 1. Check that the packing box or shock-absorbing material used to package the
LCR meter has not been damaged.
If the packing box or shock-absorbing material has been damaged, leave

the packing box and shock-absorbing material as is until other inspection
items are checked as follows:
Step 2. Check the packaged items supplied with the LCR meter for any damage or
defects.
Step 3. Referring to Table 1-1 and Figure 1-1, check that all packaged items supplied
with the LCR meter have been provided as per the specified options.
Step 4. After checking, if one of the following applies, contact your nearest Keysight
Technologies sales and service office.
1. The packing box or shock-absorbing material used to package the LCR
meter has been damaged or the shock-absorbing material displays traces
of where extreme pressure has been applied.
2. A packaged item supplied with the LCR meter has mechanical damage or
defects.
3. A packaged item supplied with the LCR meter is missing.
4. A fault has been detected in the subsequent operation check of the LCR
meter.
If an abnormality is detected in Step 1, contact the company that transported
the LCR meter as well as your nearest Keysight Technologies sales and
service office. For inspection by the transport company, save the packing box,
shock-absorbing material, and packaged items as you received them.
18 Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter

Unpacking and Preparation
Table 1-1 Items Packaged with the E4980A/AL
Name Product/Part Qty

Number
Standard Accessories
- E4980A/AL E4980A/AL 1
-Power Cable 1 8120-4753 1
-USB Cable 82357-61601 1

Options
-Manual (Option ABA)
• User’s Guide See footnote2 1
-Rack mount kit without handles (Option 1CM)2 5063-9241 1
1. This accessory varies from country to country. For the power cable option, see
Table 1-3. A 3p-2p conversion adapter is not supplied.
2. This accessory is not shown in Figure 1-1. For how to install the rack mount kit,
refer to the attached manual.
Figure 1-1 E4980A/AL Accessories

㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㪘㪺㪺㪼㫊㫊㫆㫉㫀㪼㫊㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅
E4980A 20 Hz - 2 MHz
Preset Precision LCR Meter
7 8 9
DC DC
Source Bias USB
Trigger 4 5 6
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
Display Meas Discharge test device before connecting
Format Setup r42V Peak Max Output CAT I
DC
Source L CUR L POT H POT H CUR
DC Source
Return
(Option 001)
r10VDC Max
Save/ Local/
Recall A Recall B System
Recall Lock
㪜㪋㪐㪏㪇㪘
㪬㫊㪼㫉㩾㫊㩷㪞㫌㫀㪻㪼
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪚㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪚㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪉㪉
Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter 19

Preparations before Use
Verifying the Power Supply

Confirm that the power supplied to the E4980A/AL meets the following
requirements:
Table 1-2 Power Supply Requirements
Requirements
Voltage 90 to 132 Vac or 198 to 264 Vac1

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum power 150 VA
consumption
1. Switched automatically by the E4980A/AL in conformity with the voltage used.
Setting up the Fuse
Please use the following fuse type.

UL/CSA type, Slo-Blo, 520-mm miniature fuse, 3 A, 250 V (Keysight part
number 2110-1017)
When you need a fuse, contact your nearest Keysight Technologies sales and
service office. To verify and replace the fuse, remove the power cable and pull
out the fuse holder.
Figure 1-2 Fuse Holder and Power Cable Receptacle
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪚㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪠㫅㫃㪼㫋
㪝㫌㫊㪼㩷㪿㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪇㪏

Verifying and Connecting the Power Cable

The three-wire power cable attached to the E4980A/AL has one wire serving as
a ground. Using this power cable allows the E4980A/AL to be grounded,
thereby protecting you against electrical shock from the power outlet.
Step 1. Confirm that the power cable is not damaged.
Never use a power cable showing any sign of damage. Faulty cables can
cause electric shock.
Step 2. Use the supplied cable to connect the power cable receptacle on the real
panel of the E4980A/AL to a three-wire power outlet with the grounding
prong firmly held in the ground slot.
Use the supplied three-wire power cable with a grounding wire to securely
ground the E4980A/AL.
A 3p-2p conversion adapter is not supplied with the LCR meter. When you
need a 3p-2p conversion adapter, contact your nearest Keysight
Technologies sales and service office listed in the back of this manual.
Figure 1-3 shows the power cable options.

Figure 1-3 Power cable options

How to Remove the Handle
How to Remove the Handle

A handle kit is attached to the E4980A/AL. When using the E4980A/AL with
the rack-mount kit, remove the handle according to the following steps.
Figure 1-4 How to remove the handle
㽴
㽳
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪌㪈
Step 1. Lift the handle perpendicular to the unit while pulling it in the direction of 1.
Step 2. While pulling the handle in the direction of 1, lift towards 2.
Install the handle with 3 facing toward the front. Installing the handle the
other way around may damage it.

Caution when Using the Handle
Caution when Using the Handle

Follow the instructions below when using the E4980A/AL’s handle, otherwise
you may get your fingers caught in the handle or the E4980A/AL may fall and
be damaged
• When the handle is set up as shown in Figure 1-5, do not put any additional
weight onto the E4980A/AL or lift it suddenly.
• Do not touch the handle while the DUT is attached.
Figure 1-5 The handle in the set-up position
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪎㪌

Environmental Requirements
Set up the E4980A/AL where the following environmental requirements are
satisfied.
Operating Environments
Ensure that the operating environment meets the following requirements.
Table 1-3 Operating Environments Requirements
Temperature 0ºC to 55ºC

Temperature range at 23ºC  5ºC (<1ºC deviation from the temperature
calibration when performing calibration)
Humidity 15% to 85% at wet bulb temperature  40ºC
(non-condensation)
Altitude 0 to 2,000 m (0 to 6,561 feet)
Vibration Max. 0.5 G, 5 Hz to 500 Hz
The environmental requirements listed above are NOT for the

specifications and measurement accuracy of the E4980A/AL, but for its
operating environment.

Ventilation Requirements
To ensure that the safety requirements, the specifications, and the
measurement accuracy of the LCR meter are met, you must maintain the
environmental temperature to within the specified range by providing an
appropriate cooling clearance around the LCR meter or, for the rack-mounted
type, by forcefully air-cooling inside the rack housing. For more information on
environmental temperatures that satisfy the specifications and measurement
accuracy of the LCR meter, see Chapter 11, “Specifications and Supplemental
Information”, on page 417.
The LCR meter conforms to the requirements of the safety standard.When the
environmental temperature around the LCR meter is kept within the
temperature range of the operating environment specifications (“Operating
Environments” on page 25).
The LCR meter still conforms to the requirements of the safety standard it is
installed with the following cooling clearance:
Requirements
Back ≥ 180 mm
Sides ≥ 60 mm (both right and left)
Figure 1-6 Ventilation space at installation

Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

Figure 1-7 shows the setup for a static-safe work station to protect the
electronic components from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Figure 1-7 Example of a static-free work station
Ensuring Adequate Free Space around the LCR meter for Immediate
Disconnection of the Power Cable in Case of Emergency
As described in “Disconnecting from the Supply Source” on page 29, the plug
attached to the power cable serves as the disconnecting device (device that
cuts off the power supply) for the E4980A/AL. When installing the E4980A/AL,
ensure that there is sufficient free space around the unit to permit quick
disconnection of the plug (from the AC outlet or the E4980A/AL unit) in case of
emergency.

Starting the E4980A/AL

This section describes how to turn on/off the E4980A/AL power and how to cut
off the power supply in an emergency.
Turning the Power ON and OFF
Turning the Power ON
The ON and OFF status of the power switch is confirmed by the color of the
switch.
Table 1-4
Color of the light Status of the power
Orange Power on
Yellow-green Power off
Light off Power off (The power supply is cut off)
Step 1. Confirm that the power switch light in the lower-left part of the front
panel is lit in orange. If the light is off, the power supply may also be off.
Step 2. Press the power switch. When the light of the power switch turns
yellow-green, the power is turned ON and the E4980A/AL starts the self-test.
The self-test takes approx. 30 seconds.
Step 3. Confirm that the self-test indicates normal operation.
Normal operation is confirmed by the self-test if no error message appears.
Turning the Power OFF

Step 1. Follow the method below to turn the power OFF.
• Press the power switch in the lower-left part of the front panel.
Do not turn the power OFF while saving into or recalling from the internal
memory of the E4980A/AL or the USB memory. Doing so may clear the
contents from the memory.

Disconnecting from the Supply Source

The plug attached to the power cable (on the power outlet side or device side
of the cable) serves as the disconnecting device (device that cuts off the power
supply) of the E4980A/AL. When the power supply must be cut off to avoid
such danger as electric shock, pull out the power cable’s plug (on the power
outlet side or device side of the cable).
To allow this operation to be performed smoothly, be sure to follow the

guidelines in “Ensuring Adequate Free Space around the LCR meter for
Immediate Disconnection of the Power Cable in Case of Emergency” on
page 27.
When turning the power OFF under normal circumstances, always follow
the methods described in “Turning the Power ON and OFF” on page 28.


User’s Guide
2 Overview
This chapter provides the basic procedures for operating the E4980A/AL and
describes names and functions of the front panel, rear panel, and screen
display.
Product Introduction
The Keysight E4980A/AL is a general-purpose LCR meter for incoming
inspection of components, quality control, and laboratory use. The E4980A/AL
is used for evaluating LCR components, materials, and semiconductor devices
over a wide range of frequencies (20 Hz to 300 kHz/500 kHz/1 MHz/2 MHz)
and test signal levels (0.1 mVrms to 2 Vrms, 50 A to 20 mArms). With Option
001, the E4980A’s test signal level range spans 0.1 mV to 20 Vrms, and 50 A
to 200 mArms. Also, the E4980A with Option 001 enables up to 40-Vrms DC
bias measurements (without Option 001, up to  2 Vrms), DCR measurements,
and DC source measurements using the internal voltage source.
The E4980A/AL offers C-D measurement with a basic accuracy of 0.05% (C),
0.0005 (D) at all frequencies with seven-digit resolution (the dissipation factor
resolution is 1 ppm) in every range.
With its built-in comparator, the E4980A/AL can output comparison/decision
results for sorting components into a maximum of ten bins. Furthermore, by
using the handler interface and scanner interface options, the E4980A/AL can
be easily combined with a component handler, a scanner, and a system
controller to fully automate component testing, sorting, and quality-control
data processing.
The E4980A/AL’s list sweep function permits entry of up to 201 frequencies,
test signal levels, or bias level points to be automatically measured.
The GP-IB/LAN/USB interfaces are standard interfaces on the E4980A/AL and
enable automatic testing.
31
2- Overview
Front Panel: Names and Functions of Parts

This section describes the names and functions of the parts on the
E4980A/AL’s front panel. For more details on the functions displayed on the
LCD screen, see “Screen Area: Names and Functions of Parts” on page 40. For
more about the functions of softkeys, see “Softkey Functions” on page 397.
Figure 2-1 Front panel

㪏㪅㪧㫉㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪢㪼㫐
㪐㪅㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㪢㪼㫐㪌㪅㪚㫌㫉㫊㫆㫉㩷㪢㪼㫐
㪈㪇㪅㪛㪚㩷㪙㫀㪸㫊㩷㪢㪼㫐㪎㪅㪣㪜㪛㩷㪠㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㫆㫉
㪈㪈㪅㪛㪚㩷㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼㩷㪢㪼㫐㪍㪅㪜㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪢㪼㫐
㪈㪊㪅㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㪧㫆㫉㫋
㪊㪅㪪㫆㪽㫋㩷㪢㪼㫐
Preset
7 8 9
DC DC
Trigger 4 5 6
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
DC
Source
DC Source
Return (Option 001)
Save/ Local/
Recall A Recall B Recall System Lock
㪈㪅㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪈㪌㪅㪛㪚㩷㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼㩷㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㪈㪉㪅㪬㪥㪢㪥㪦㪮㪥㩷㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃
㪉㪅㪣㪚㪛㩷㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪋㪅㪤㪼㫅㫌㩷㪢㪼㫐㪈㪋㪅㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪈㪉
A maximum of 52 V of hazardous voltage between terminals might be

present when the LED indicator for DC Bias or DC Source lights up. Do
NOT touch UNKNOWN terminals, DC source terminals, or electrodes of
test fixtures.
Turn off the output of DC Bias and DC source and confirm that LED
indicators are off when setting up the E4980A/AL and its accessories.

Overview
1. Power switch
Used for choosing between power-on and -off states of the E4980A/AL. When
turned on, the switch lights up in yellow-green and all operating voltages are
applied to the instrument. When turned off, the switch lights up in orange and
no operating voltages are applied to the instrument.
2. LCD
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) displays measurement results, test conditions,
etc.
Occasionally there are missing pixels or constantly lit pixels, but this is not
a malfunction and does not affect the performance of your product.
3. Softkeys
Five softkeys are used to select measurement conditions and parameter
functions. Each softkey has a softkey label along its left side.
4. Menu keys
Menu selection keys are used to access the corresponding selection of
instrument controls.
Table 2-1 Menu Keys
[Display Format] key Displays measurement results and selections.

[Meas Setup] key Sets measurement conditions, a correction function, and
limit values for BIN sorting.
[Recall A] key Recalls the setting information on internal memory 0.
[Recall B] key Recalls the setting information on internal memory 1.
[Save/Recall] key Saves and recalls the setting information. Saves
measurement results and screen images.
[System] key Sets the system. Sets the GP-IB interface and LAN.
Performs a self-test.
[Local/Lock] key Locks and unlocks hard keys and softkeys on the front
panel. Cancels remote control with GPIB commands.
5. Cursor keys
Keys used to move the field select cursor from field to field on a displayed
page. When the cursor is moved to a certain field, that field changes to an
inverse video image of the original field. The cursor can only be moved from
field to field.
For the skip key, refer to the “How to Use Skip Keys” on page 44.

2- Overview
6. Entry keys
Keys used to enter numeric data into the E4980A/AL. The entry keys comprise
the digits 0 to 9, a period (.), and a plus/minus (+/-) sign. Entered values are
displayed on the input line (second line from the bottom of the LCD screen),
and pressing the softkey terminates numeric input. The plus/minus key deletes
the last character of the input value.
7. LED indicator
The LED indicator lights up when DC Bias or DC Source is on. The USB
indicator lights up while accessing a USB memory.
8. Preset key
A key used to return the LCR meter to the initial setup state. There are three
methods for initialization. For details, refer to “Initializing the Instrument” on
page 87.
9. Trigger key
A key used to manually trigger the E4980A/AL when it is set to the manual
trigger mode.
10. DC Bias key

A key used to toggle on and off of the DC bias output. When the DC bias
output is set to on, the DC bias indicator lights up and DCBIAS is displayed in
the status display area on the screen.
If the DC Bias key is set to off, even though the DC bias is set to on according
to the LCD display, the DC bias is not output.
Regardless of which page is displayed, when the DC BIAS key is pressed,

the value that has been set in the BIAS field of MEAS SETUP (and MEAS
DISPLAY) is output. For example, in case that DC Bias sweep has been set
with the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page displayed, the value set in the BIAS
field is output when the DC BIAS key is pressed. Then, after the E4980A/AL
is triggered, the DC Bias is set according to the list that has been set.
11. DC Source key

A key used to toggle on and off of the DC source output. When the DC source
output is set to on, the DC Source indicator lights up and DCSRC is displayed
in the status display area on the screen.
Option 001 is required for this function.

Overview
Regardless of which page is displayed, when the DC SOURCE key is

pressed, the value that has been set in the DC SRC field of MEAS SETUP is
output. For example, in case that DC SRC sweep has been set with the
LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page displayed, the value set in the DC SRC field is
output when the DC SRC key is pressed. Then, after the E4980A/AL is
triggered, the DC Source is set according to the list that has been set.
12. UNKNOWN terminals

These are the UNKNOWN terminals used to connect a four-terminal pair test
fixture or test leads for measuring the device under test (DUT).
When using a four-terminal pair test fixture or test leads with a stopper,
remove the stopper or the bumper of the E4980A/AL.
Do not apply DC voltage or current to the UNKNOWN terminals. Applying

DC voltage or current may lead to device failure. Connect the
measurement sample (DUT) to the test port (or the test fixture, cables, etc.
connected to the test port) after the LCR meter has been completely
discharged.
The maximum load the UNKNOWN terminals can withstand is 10 kgf

(nominal).
The test ports comply with Installation Category I of IEC 61010-1.
13. Front USB port

This port is used to save data in a USB memory. The USB indicator lights up
while accessing the USB memory.
Connector types: Universal Serial Bus (USB) Jack, Type A (four contact points),
Female.
Compliance Standards: USB 1.1
Do not connect any device other than a USB memory to the USB port. We
do not support connections to the USB port of printers, devices with a
built-in HDD, or USB hubs. To print a screen, refer to “To save a screenshot
into USB memory” on page 188.
Do not unplug the USB memory while the USB indicator is on.

2- Overview
USB memory type

Use USB memory that is USB mass-storage-class compliant and formatted
with FAT16 or FAT32. For points to notice, refer to “USB Memory Notes” on
page 173.
Interface: USB 1.1
14. Ground terminal

Connected to the chassis of the E4980A/AL. This is used for measurements
that require guarding.
15. DC Source terminal

Outputs the DC source in the range from -10 V to 10 V. Option 001 is required
for this function.
The DC source terminal is installed even in the E4980A/AL without Option

001; however, the E4980A/AL without Option 001 cannot use this terminal.

Overview
Rear Panel: Names and Functions of Parts

This section describes the names and functions of the parts on the
E4980A/AL’s rear panel.
Figure 2-2 Rear panel
㪈㪅㩷㪞㪧㪠㪙㩷㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉㪊㪅㩷㪬㪪㪙㩿㪬㪪㪙㪫㪤㪚㪀㩷㪠㫅㫋㪼㫉㪽㪸㪺㪼㩷㪧㫆㫉㫋
㪍㪅㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪸㫃㩷㪥㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉㩷㪧㫃㪸㫋㪼㪋㪅㩷㪣㪘㪥㩷㪧㫆㫉㫋
㪏㪅㩷㪝㪸㫅㪉㪅㩷㪠㫅㫋㪼㫉㪽㪸㪺㪼㩷㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉
㪎㪅㩷㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪚㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪼㪺㪼㫇㫋㪸㪺㫃㪼㪌㪅㩷㪜㫏㫋㪼㫉㫅㪸㫃㩷㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪠㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪇㪎
1. GPIB Interface Connector

General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). The connection of an external controller
and other devices through this connector allows you to configure an automatic
measurement system.
2. Interface Connector
If interface options are installed, the interface connectors will be installed as
shown. If the E4980A/AL is not equipped with an interface option, blank panels
will cover this portion.
Interfaces with which the E4980A/AL can be equipped as options are shown
below.
Handler interface (Option E4980A/AL-201)

This interface is for data exchange with an automatic machine (handler) used
on a production line.
Connector type: 36-pin Centronics

2- Overview
Scanner interface (Option E4980A/AL-301)

The interface to connect a scanner to perform up to 128 sets of multi-channel
corrections and measurements.
Connector type: 14-pin Amphenol
3. USB (USBTMC) Interface Port

Through this port, you can control the E4980A/AL via external controllers.
Connector Types: Universal Serial Bus (USB) jack, type mini-B (five contact
points), Female
Compliance Standards: USBTMC-USB488 and USB2.0
4. LAN Port
The port to connect the E4980A/AL to a LAN (Local Area Network). Connecting
this instrument to a LAN enables you to control this instrument by using
SICL-LAN or telnet, or from an external PC via a Web server.
This is compliant with LXI standard (LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation):
version 1.4 Class C.
Connector type: 8-pin RJ-45 connector
Compliance Standard: 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet (automatic data rate
selection)
Auto-MDIX function is effective on S/N MY4620XXX or later.
5. External Trigger Input Connector

The BNC connector to input the positive TTL pulse to trigger the E4980A/AL
with external trigger signals.(The trigger mode must be set to EXTernal.)
6. Serial Number Plate

The seal showing the product’s serial number.

Overview
7. Power Cable Receptacle (to LINE)

The receptacle (outlet) to which the power cable is connected.
To connect the device to a power source (outlet), use the supplied

three-prong power cable with a ground conductor.
The plug attached to the power cable (on the power outlet side or device
side of the cable) serves as the E4980A/AL’s disconnecting device (device
that cuts off the power supply). When the power supply must be cut off to
avoid such danger as electric shock, pull out the power cable plug (on the
power outlet side or device side of the cable). For the procedure for turning
off the power in normal use, see the description in “1. Power switch” on
page 33.
For more on the power supply, see “Verifying and Connecting the Power
Cable” on page 21.
8. Fan
The cooling fan for controlling the temperature inside the E4980A/AL. This fan
extracts heated air from inside the LCR meter.

2- Overview
Screen Area: Names and Functions of Parts

This section describes the names and functions of parts on the E4980A/AL’s
LCD screen.
Figure 2-3 Screen display
㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㩷㪧㪸㪾㪼㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸㪚㫆㫄㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸
㪪㫆㪽㫋㫂㪼㫐㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪛㪸㫋㪸㪆
㪚㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸
㪠㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㪤㪼㫊㫊㪸㪾㪼㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪊㪌
1. Display Page Area

Shows a display page name of the current display page. On each display page,
three lines are collected together as one area.
2. Comment Line Area

You can input up to 30 characters in ASCII format by using the front panel or
the DISPlay:LINE command of the GPIB command. The first 22 characters are
displayed in this area.
This area is displayed on the following display pages.
• MEAS DISPLAY page
• BIN No. DISPLAY page
• BIN COUNT DISPLAY page
• LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page
• MEAS SETUP page
For the input method in the comment line, refer to “MEAS SETUP page” on
page 88.

Overview
3. Softkey Area
Displays softkey labels corresponding to the field.
A displayed to the right of a softkey indicates that pressing that softkey will
display the softkey label one level lower.
Pressing the Return key when the lower level softkey label is displayed will
display the softkey label one level higher. In this case, a is displayed on the
label to the left of the Return key.
Figure 2-4 Softkey Area
Return Return
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪌㪎
4. Measurement Data/Conditions Area

Displays measurement conditions and measurement results.
Under certain conditions one of the following messages may be displayed
instead of the measurement results. For details, refer to “Displaying Errors
instead of Measurement Results” on page 71.
Message Description
OVERLOAD This message is displayed when an overload occurs.

For details, refer to “Displaying Errors instead of
Measurement Results” on page 71.
--- This means that no measurement has been made or
the data format will not hold the measurement results.
INFINITY This message is displayed when a deviation mode of
the deviation measurement function is % and
measurement results cannot be calculated.

2- Overview
5. Input Line Area

Displays numeric values entered with the entry key.
6. System Message Area

Displays a system message, warning, and error message.
7. Status Display Area

Displays the status when DC bias or DC source is on, or any front panel key is
locked. When sending SCPI commands from the external controller, “RMT” is
displayed and the front panel keys are locked.

Overview
Basic Operation
Basic Operation
The E4980A/AL’s basic operation is described below.
1. Display the desired page using both the MENU keys and softkeys.
2. Move the cursor to the desired field using the cursor keys. When the cursor
is moved to a certain field, the field changes to an inverse video image of
the original. The cursor can be moved from field to field (right and left or up
and down).
3. The softkey labels corresponding to the field indicated by the cursor are
displayed automatically. Press the desired softkey.
Use the entry keys to input numeric data. When one of the entry keys is
pressed, the softkeys will change to the available unit softkeys. Pressing
these unit softkeys terminates numeric input.
The unit changes according to the field selected.
How to Use Cursor Keys

Move the cursor to the desired field using the cursor keys as shown in Figure
2-5.
Figure 2-5 Cursor keys and a field operation example
㽲㽳
㽳
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪌㪍

2- Overview
Basic Operation
How to Use Skip Keys

The following describes how to use a skip key.
On a display page, three lines are collected together as one. By using a skip
key, you can select the desired field quickly as the selected field moves from
area to area.
Figure 2-6 Skip key and a field operation example
Return
㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㫋㫎㫀㪺㪼㩷㫊㫂㫀㫇㩷㫂㪼㫐
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪌㪏

User’s Guide
3 Display Format
This chapter describes each page of the DISPLAY FORMAT MENU of the
E4980A/AL.
MEAS DISPLAY Page

When you press the [DISPLAY FORMAT] key, the MEAS DISPLAY page appears.
The following measurement controls can be set on this page (The field in
parenthesis is used to set measurement controls).
• Measurement Function (FUNC)
• Impedance range (RANGE)
• Test Frequency (FREQ)
• Test Signal Level (LEVEL)
• DC Bias (BIAS)
• Measurement Time Mode (MEAS TIME)
Figure 3-1 shows the available fields and the softkeys that correspond to the
fields on this page.
45
3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Figure 3-1 MEAS DISPLAY Page
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋
㪩㪼㫊㫌㫃㫋㫊
䌻
㪑㩷㩷㪝㫀㪼㫃㪻
㪑㩷㩷㪤㫆㫅㫀㫋㫆㫉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪍㪉
Pressing the [DISPLAY FORMAT] key when Figure 3-1 is displayed enlarges the
measurement result as shown in Figure 3-2. Pressing the [DISPLAY FORMAT]
key again returns to the display in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-2 The enlarged MEAS DISPLAY for measurement results
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪍㪊

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Measurement Function
The E4980A/AL simultaneously measures two components of the complex
impedance (parameters) in a measurement cycle.
Regardless of the types of measurement parameters, the test signal voltage
(VAC) and the test signal current (IAC) are measured at the same time. When
the E4980A is equipped with option 001, the DC bias voltage level (VDC) and
the DC bias current level (IDC) are measured simultaneously.
Regardless of the types of measurement parameters, the measurement

result for the R-X parameter can be obtained using the SCPI command.
DC resistance (Rdc) can be measured when the E4980A/AL is equipped with

either option 001, 030/032, 050/052, 100/102, or 200,
DC voltage (Vdc), and DC current (Idc) can be measured when the E4980A is
equipped with option 001.
Types of measurement parameters

Types of measurement parameters are shown below.
Table 3-1 Measurement parameters
Primary parameter Secondary parameter
Cp D, Q, G, Rp
Cs D, Q, Rs
Lp D, Q, G, Rp, Rdc1
Ls D, Q, Rs, Rdc1
R X
Z d, r
G B
Y d, r
Vdc2 Idc2
1. This parameter can be set only when the E4980A/AL is equipped with either
option 001, 030/032, 050/052, 100 or 200.
2. This parameter can be set only when the E4980A is equipped with option 001.
When the measurement parameter is DC voltage measurement/DC

current measurement (Vdc-Idc), set the setting value of the test signal
level (LEVEL field) to 0 V for accurate measurement.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Measurement parameter descriptions

The primary parameter measurement result is located on the upper line and
the secondary parameter measurement result is on the lower line in Figure 3-1
on page 46.
Each parameter is described below.
Table 3-2 Primary parameter
Parameter Description
Cp Capacitance value measured using the parallel equivalent circuit

model
Cs Capacitance value measured using the series equivalent circuit model
Lp Inductance value measured using the parallel equivalent circuit model
Ls Inductance value measured using the series equivalent circuit model
R Resistance
Z Absolute value of impedance
G Conductance
Y Absolute value of admittance
Vdc1 DC voltage
Table 3-3 Secondary parameter
D Dissipation factor
Q Quality factor (inverse of dissipation factor)
G Conductance
Rs Equivalent series resistance measured using the series equivalent
circuit model
Rp Equivalent parallel resistance measured using the parallel equivalent
circuit model
X Reactance
B Sustenance
 Phase angle
Idc1 DC current

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Table 3-3 Secondary parameter
Rdc2 DC resistance
2. This parameter can be set only when the E4980A/AL is equipped with either
option 001, 030/032, 050/052, 100 or 200.
Equivalent parallel and serial combinations

The combinations of primary and secondary parameters, including the
equivalent parallel and series combinations, are listed below.
Table 3-4 Measurement function
Primary Series mode Parallel mode

parameter
Z Z-r -----
Z-d
Y ----- Y-r
Y-d
C Cs-D Cp-D
Cs-Q Cp-Q
Cs-Rs Cp-G
Cp-Rp
L Ls-D Lp-D
Ls-Q Lp-Q
Ls-Rs Lp-G
Ls-Rdc Lp-Rp
Lp-Rdc
R R-X -----
G ----- G-B
Primary parameter Secondary parameter
Vdc Idc
Measurement function Vdc-Idc does not have the series mode and parallel
mode.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Procedure for setting the measurement function

Step 1. Press the [Display Format] key.
Step 2. Press the MEAS DISPLAY softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the FUNC field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to select the primary parameter.
Step 5. If the secondary parameter exists, select the secondary parameter from
measurement parameters displayed using the softkeys.
For the combinations of measurement parameters, refer to Table 3-1 on

page 47.

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Impedance range
Impedance range mode

Two modes can be used to select the impedance range as shown in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Impedance range mode
Mode Function overview Advantage Disadvantage
Auto range  The E4980A/AL sets You do not need The

(auto selection) the optimum to select the measurement
impedance range for impedance time is longer
the impedance of the range. due to the
DUT. ranging time.
Hold range Measurement is No ranging time You need to
(manual selection) performed with a fixed is required. select a proper
impedance range range
regardless of the depending on
impedance of the the value of the
DUT. DUT.
Available impedance range

The hold range has nine impedance ranges, but when option 001 is installed, it
has ten. The impedance range is selected according to the DUT’s impedance
even if the measurement parameter is capacitance or inductance.
Model Impedance range ()
Standard 1, 10, 100, 300, 1 k, 3 k, 10 k, 30 k, 100k

Option 001 100 m1, 1, 10, 100, 300, 1 k, 3k, 10 k, 30 k, 100k
1. This cannot be used when the test signal level is less than or equal to 2 V.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Effective measurement range for each impedance range for impedance

measurement
Figure 3-3 shows the range that can be displayed and the effective measuring
range for each impedance range while in the impedance mode (| Z |, R, X). For
example, 50-k DUT impedance can be measured using the ranges of 100 k
to 30 k, but the E4980A/AL’s accuracy specification is only met when using
the 30-k range. If this DUT is measured with the 100-k range, “OVERLOAD”
will be displayed.
Figure 3-3 Effective measurement range for each impedance range (Impedance
measurement)
㪈㪇㪇㫂㱅
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼㪦㪭㪣㪛
㪊㪇㫂㱅
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㪇㫂㱅
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪊㫂㱅
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㫂㱅
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪊㪇㪇㱅㪦㪭㪣㪛
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㪇㪇㱅
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㪇㱅
㪈㱅
㪈㪇㪇㫄㱅㪦㪭㪣㪛
㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪇㪅㪈㪈㪈㪇㪈㪇㪇㪊㪇㪇㪈㫂㪊㫂㪈㪇㫂㪊㪇㫂㪈㪇㪇㫂㪈㪤㪈㪇㪤㪈㪇㪇㪤㪈㪞
㪠㫄㫇㪼㪻㪸㫅㪺㪼㩷㪲㱅㪴
㪑㩷㪜㪽㪽㪼㪺㫋㫀㫍㪼㩷㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪑㩷㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪈㪋
Table 3-6 Effective measurement range for the impedance range when it is in the HOLD
state for impedance measurement
Impedance range () Effective measurement range
100 m1 0 < Impedance  108 m
1 108 m2 < Impedance  1.08

10 1.08 < Impedance  10.08
100 10.08 < Impedance < 276
300 276  Impedance < 0.92 k
1k 0.92 k  Impedance < 2.76 k
3k 2.76 k  Impedance < 9.2 k

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Table 3-6 Effective measurement range for the impedance range when it is in the HOLD
state for impedance measurement
Impedance range () Effective measurement range
10 k 9.2 k  Impedance < 27.6 k3

30 k 27.6 k  Impedance < 92 k4
100 k 92 k  Impedance
1. This can be set when the test signal level is more than 2 V.
2. When the test signal level is less than or equal to 2 V or 20 mA, it is 0 (zero).
3. When test frequency is more than 100 kHz and the test signal level is less than
or equal to 0.2 V (2 mA), it is more than 9.2 k.
4. When test frequency is more than 100 kHz and the test signal level is more than
0.2 V and less than or equal to 2 V (more than 2 mA and less than or equal to 20
mA), it is more than 27.6 k.
Effective measurement range for each impedance range

The following shows the effective measurement range of each impedance
range, in which the E4980A/AL’s measurement accuracy meets its
specifications.
When the impedance range is set manually, the optimum impedance range
should be selected by matching the impedance of the DUT to the effective
measurement range shown in Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5, and Figure 3-6. When
the impedance range is set to AUTO, the optimum impedance range is
automatically selected according to the impedance of each DUT.
The impedance range is limited by the test frequency setting when the test
signal level is less than or equal to 2V. When the impedance range and
test frequency are set under the above conditions, the test frequency must
be set first, followed by the impedance range. If you set the impedance
range first and then frequency, the resulting impedance range may not be
the one you wanted to set.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Figure 3-4 Effective measurement range (0.2V or 2 mA < Test signal level  2 V or 20 mA)
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㪟
㫂㪟
㪇㫂
㪈㪇
㪟
㪟
㪈㫇
㪇㪸
㪈㪇
㪇㪽
㪈㪽
㪈㪤
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪈㫂
㪽㪝
㪝
㪝
㫇㪝
㪈㫅㪪㪈㪞㱅
㪟
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫇
㪝
㪈㪇㫅㪪㪈㪇㪇㪤㱅
㪈㪟
㪈㪇㪇㫂㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㫅
㪝
㪈㪇㪇㫅㪪㪈㪇㪤㱅
㪟
㪇㫄
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㫅㪝
㪈㱘㪪㪈㪤㱅
㪟
㫄
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫅
㪝
㪈㪇㱘㪪㪈㪇㪇㫂㱅
㪊㪇㫂㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㪇㫂㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪟
㪈㫄
㪈㱘
㪝
㪈㪇㪇㱘㪪㪈㪇㫂㱅
㪊㫂㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪚㪸㫇㪸㪺㫀㫋㪸㫅㪺㪼
㪘㪻㫄㫀㫋㫋㪸㫅㪺㪼
㪠㫅㪻㫌㪺㫋㪸㫅㪺㪼
㪠㫄㫇㪼㪻㪸㫅㪺㪼
㪟
㪇㱘
㪈㫂㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㱘
㪝
㪈㫄㪪㪈㫂㱅
㪊㪇㪇㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪟
㱘
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㱘㪇
㪝
㪈㪇㫄㪪㪈㪇㪇㱅
㪈㪇㪇㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪟
㪈㱘
㪈㫄
㪝
㪈㪇㪇㫄㪪㪈㪇㱅
㪈㪇㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪟
㪇㫅
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㫄
㪝
㪈㪪㪈㱅㫅㪟
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫄
㪝
㪈㪇㪪㪈㪇㪇㫄㱅
㪟
㪈㫅
㪈㪝
㪈㪇㪇㪪㪈㪇㫄㱅
㪟
㪇㫇
㪈㪇
㪈㪇㪪㪈㫄㱅
㪉㪇㪈㪇㪇㪈㫂㪈㪇㫂㪈㪇㪇㫂㪈㪤㪉㪤
㪝㫉㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㪺㫐
㪈㪞㪇
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪈㪌

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Figure 3-5 Effective measurement range (Test signal level > 2 V or 20 mA)
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㪟
㫂㪟
㪇㫂
㪈㪇
㪟
㪟
㪈㫇
㪇㪸
㪈㪇
㪇㪽
㪈㪽
㪈㪤
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪈㫂
㪽㪝
㪝
㪝
㫇㪝
㪈㫅㪪㪈㪞㱅
㪟
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫇
㪝
㪈㪟
㪈㫅
㪝
㪟
㪇㫄
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㫅㪝
㪈㱘㪪㪈㪤㱅
㪟
㫄
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇
㫅㪝
㪟
㪈㫄
㪈㱘
㪝
㪟
㪇㱘
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㱘
㪝
㪈㫄㪪㪈㫂㱅
㪟
㱘
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㱘㪇
㪝
㪟
㪈㱘
㪈㫄
㪝
㪟
㪇㫅
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㫄
㪝
㪈㪪㪈㱅
㫅㪟
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫄
㪝
㪈㪇㪇㫄㱅㩷㪩㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪟
㪈㫅
㪈㪝
㪟
㪇㫇
㪈㪇
㪈㪇㪪㪈㫄㱅
㪈㪞㪇
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪈㪍

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Figure 3-6 Effective measurement range (Test signal level  0.2 V or 2 mA)
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㪟
㫂㪟
㪇㫂
㪈㪇
㪟
㪟
㪈㫇
㪇㪸
㪈㪇
㪇㪽
㪈㪽
㪈㪤
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪈㫂
㪽㪝
㪝
㪝
㫇㪝
㪈㫅㪪㪈㪞㱅
㪟
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫇
㪝
㪈㪟
㪈㫅
㪝
㪟
㪇㫄
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㫅㪝
㪈㱘㪪㪈㪤㱅
㪟
㫄
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫅
㪝
㪟
㪈㫄
㪈㱘
㪝
㪟
㪇㱘
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㱘
㪝
㪈㫄㪪㪈㫂㱅
㪟
㱘
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㱘㪇
㪝
㪟
㪈㱘
㪈㫄
㪝
㪟
㪇㫅
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㫄
㪝
㪈㪪㪈㱅㫅㪟
㪈㪇
㪈㪇
㪇㫄
㪝
㪟
㪈㫅
㪈㪝
㪟
㪇㫇
㪈㪇
㪈㪇㪪㪈㫄㱅
㪈㪞㪇
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪍㪌

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Procedure for setting the impedance range

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the RANGE field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to select the impedance range mode or impedance range.
Softkey Function
AUTO Sets the impedance range mode to AUTO.

HOLD Sets the impedance range mode to HOLD.
INCR + Increments the impedance range in the HOLD mode.
DECR - Decrements the impedance range in the HOLD mode.
Manually setting the time for the impedance range mode

Changing impedance range requires a few milliseconds to several tens of
milliseconds. For details, refer to Settling Time in data sheet in Chapter 11
“Specifications and Supplemental Information”

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Test Frequency
Test frequency point

The E4980A/AL’s test frequency can be set in the range from 20 Hz to 2 MHz.
The last digit of the four-digit test frequency display (including digits after the
decimal point) can be set as the resolution.
Table 3-7 shows the test frequency point of each frequency range (F).
Table 3-7 Frequency range and test frequency point
Frequency range (F) Test frequency point Resolutio

n
20 Hz  F  99.99 Hz 20.00 Hz, 20.01 Hz•••99.99 Hz 0.01 Hz

100 Hz  F  999.9 Hz 100.0 Hz, 100.1 Hz•••999.9 Hz 0.1 Hz
1 kHz  F  9.999 kHz 1.000 kHz, 1.001 kHz•••9.999 kHz 1 Hz
1 MHz  F  2 MHz 1.000 MHz, 1.001 MHz•••2.000 MHz 1 kHz
When more than five-digit numeric data (including digits after the decimal
point) are entered, the nearest test frequency point is automatically set.
Procedure for setting test frequency

Step 2. Use the cursor keys to select the FREQ field.
Step 3. Use the softkeys or numeric entry keys to enter the test frequency. When
data is entered with the numeric entry keys, the softkeys change to unit
labels (Hz, kHz, MHz).
Softkey Function
INCR ++ Increments the test frequency to the next sequentially higher tenfold
value after 20 Hz. Refer to Table 3-8 for the test frequency points
that can be set using this softkey.
INCR + Increments the current test frequency to the next sequentially
higher frequency point. There are ten frequency points between
successive decade values. Refer to Table 3-9 for the sequential
frequency points that can be set using this softkey.

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Softkey Function
DECR - Decreases the test frequency to the next sequentially lower

frequency point. There are ten frequency points between successive
decade values. Refer to Table 3-9 for the frequency points that can
be set using this softkey.
DECR -- Decreases the test frequency to the next sequentially lower tenth
value after 20 Hz. Refer to Table 3-8 for the frequency points that
can be set using this softkey.
Table 3-8 Test frequency that can be set using INCR ++ / DECR --
INCR ++ / DECR --
20 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
Table 3-9 Test frequency that can be set using INCR + / DECR -
INCR + / DECR -
20 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz

25 Hz 120 Hz 1.2 kHz 12 kHz 120 kHz 1.2 MHz
50 Hz 250 Hz 2.5 kHz 25 kHz 250 kHz
60 Hz 300 Hz 3 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz
80 Hz 400 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz 400 kHz
500 Hz 5 kHz 50 kHz 500 kHz

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Time required for setting the test frequency

Changing the test frequency requires a few milliseconds to several tens of
milliseconds. For details, refer to Settling Time in data sheet in Chapter 11

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Test Signal Level

The E4980A/AL’s test signal level can be set as the effective value (RMS value)
of a sine wave of the test frequency from the unit’s internal oscillator. You can
set either the oscillator voltage level or the oscillator current level. The output
impedance is 100 .
The set value of the oscillator current level is the value set when the
measurement contacts (UNKNOWN terminals) are shorted together.
The set value of the oscillator voltage level is the value set when the
measurement contacts (UNKNOWN terminals) are opened.
The E4980A/AL can measure a device using a constant voltage or current level
by using the automatic level control function. (The automatic level control
function (ALC field) can be set to ON from the MEAS SETUP page.) When a
constant voltage or current level measurement is performed, an asterisk mark
(*) appears at the end of the LEVEL display. For more information about the
automatic level control function, refer to “Automatic level control” on page 93.
Test signal level and resolution (Standard)

When option 001 (power/DC bias enhance) is not installed, the oscillator
voltage level can be set with a resolution listed in Table 3-10, or the oscillator
current level can be set with a resolution listed in Table 3-11.
Table 3-10 Oscillator voltage level and resolution (Std.)
Oscillator voltage level Resolution
0 Vrms to 200 mVrms 100 Vrms

200 mVrms to 500 mVrms 200 Vrms
500 mVrms to 1 Vrms 500 Vrms
1 Vrms to 2 Vrms 1 mVrms
Table 3-11 Oscillator current level and resolution (Std.)
Oscillator current level Resolution
0 Arms to 2 mArms 1 Arms

2 mArms to 5 mArms 2 Arms

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Test signal level and resolution (Option 001)

When option 001 (power/DC bias enhance) is installed, the oscillator voltage
level can be set with a resolution listed in Table 3-12, or the oscillator current
level can be set with a resolution listed in Table 3-13.
Table 3-12 Oscillator voltage level and resolution (Option 001)
Oscillator voltage level Resolution
0 Vrms to 200 mVrms 100 Vrms

200 mVrms to 500 mVrms 200 Vrms
500 mVrms to 1 Vrms 500 Vrms
10 Vrms to 20 Vrms1 10 mVrms
1. When the test frequency is more than 1 MHz, the maximum oscillator voltage
level that can be set is 15 Vrms.
Table 3-13 Oscillator current level and resolution (Option 001)
Oscillator current level Resolution
0 Arms to 2 mArms 1 Arms

Test signal level setting procedure

Step 1. Press the [Display Format] key
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the LEVEL field.

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Step 4. Use the softkeys or numeric entry keys to enter the test signal level. When
data is entered with the numeric entry keys, the softkeys change to units
labels (mV, V, uA, mA, A).
Softkey Function
INCR ++ Increases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in

Table 3-14 or Table 3-15.
INCR + Increases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in
Table 3-10 to Table 3-13.
DECR - Decreases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in
DECR -- Decreases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in
Table 3-14 Oscillator’s voltage level that can be set with INCR ++ / DECR --
INCR ++ / DECR -- (Vrms)
0,
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m
100 m, 200 m, 300 m, •••, 900 m
1, 2, 3, •••, 91
10, 201
1. The voltage level can be set to more than 2 V only when option 001
is installed.
Table 3-15 Oscillator’s current level that can be set with INCR ++ / DECR --
INCR ++ / DECR -- (Arms)
0,
10 , 20 , 30 , •••, 90 
100 , 200 , 300 , •••, 900 
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m1
100 m1
1. The current level can be set to more than 20 m only when option
001 is installed.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
DC Bias
The E4980A/AL has an internal DC bias. A DC bias is output when the DC Bias
key on the front panel is set to ON.
The DC Bias key is a toggle-type switch used to enable DC bias output. When
you press the DC Bias key, DCBIAS appears in the status display area and the
LED indicator for DC bias is ON (orange). When you press the DC Bias key
again, DCBIAS disappears from the status display area and the LED indicator is
OFF. If the DC Bias key is set to OFF, the setting value for the DC bias is not
output even though the DC bias is set to ON in the BIAS field.
The setting value of the DC bias signal voltage is the value set when the
measurement contacts (UNKNOWN terminals) are opened.
The setting value of the DC bias signal current is the value set when the
measurement contacts (UNKNOWN terminals) are shorted.
The range of the DC bias has two types: AUTO and FIX. When the E4980A/AL is
initiated or preset, AUTO is set. The following descriptions are effective when
AUTO is set as a range. Use the SCPI command to fix the range. For details,
refer to “:BIAS:RANGe:AUTO” on page 327.
DC bias (Standard)
When option 001 (power/DC bias enhance) is not installed, the DC bias can be
set with a resolution listed in Table 3-16. The level of the DC bias signal current
cannot be set without option 001 present.
Table 3-16 DC bias and resolution (Std.)
DC bias signal voltage DC bias signal current
0 V, 1.5 V, 2.0 V unavailable
DC bias and resolution (Option 001)

When option 001 (power/DC bias enhance) is installed, the DC bias signal
voltage and signal current can be set with a resolution listed in Table 3-17 or
Table 3-18.
Table 3-17 DC bias and resolution (Option 001)
DC bias signal voltage level Resolution
 (0 V to 5 V) 100 V1
 (5 V to 10 V) 1 mV
 (10 V to 20 V) 2 mV
 (20 V to 40 V) 5 mV
1. Effective resolution is 330 V.

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Table 3-18 DC bias and resolution (Option 001)
DC bias signal current level Resolution
 (0A to 50 mA) 1 A1

 (50 mA to 100 mA) 10 A
1. Effective resolution is 3.3 A.
When a DUT is connected to the measurement contacts, the setting current

value is different from the actual current passing through the DUT. For normal
measurement taken by applying the signal current through a device, refer to
“DC Bias Current Isolation” on page 97.
Figure 3-7 DC bias signal current
㪛㪚㩷㪙㪠㪘㪪
㪚㪬㪩㪩㪜㪥㪫
㪟㪠㪞㪟㪣㪦㪮
㪪㪿㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻
㪈㪇㪇㱅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪈㪎
Setting limits for DC bias and test signal level

When both the DC bias and the test signal level are set under the following
conditions, the amount of DC bias plus the test signal level is limited to the
values listed in Table 3-19
• Option 001 is installed.
• The DC Bias key on the front panel is set to ON.
Table 3-19 DC bias and test signal level-setting limits
Setting value Limit
DC bias Test signal

level
Vdc (V) Vosc (Vrms) Vosc x √2 x 1.15 + Vdc x 1.002 < 42 V

Vdc (V) Iosc (Arms) Iosc x √2 x 115 + Vdc x 1.002 < 42 V

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Table 3-19 DC bias and test signal level-setting limits
Setting value Limit
DC bias Test signal

level
Idc (A) Vosc(Vrms) Vosc x √2 x 1.15 + Idc x 100.2 < 42 V

Idc (A) Iosc (Arms) Iosc x √2 x 115 + Idc x 100.2 < 42 V
Procedure for setting DC bias

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the BIAS field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys or numeric entry keys to enter the test signal level. When
data is entered with the numeric entry keys, the softkey labels are changed to
the appropriate unit labels (mV, V, uA, mA, A).
Softkey Function
INCR ++ Increases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in

INCR + Increases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in
DECR - Decreases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in
DECR -- Decreases the oscillator’s output level with a resolution shown in
Table 3-20 DC bias signal voltage that can be set with INCR ++ / DECR --
INCR ++ / DECR -- (V)1
0,
100 , 200 , 300 , •••, 900 
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m
100 m, 200 m, 300 m, •••, 900 m
1, 2, 3, •••, 9
10, 20, 30, 40

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
1. When option 001 is not installed, only 0 V, 1.5 V, and 2.0 V can be
set.
Table 3-21 DC bias signal current that can be set with INCR ++ / DECR
INCR ++ / DECR -- (A)1
0,
1 , 2 , 3 , •••, 9 
10 , 20 , 30 , •••, 90 
100 , 200 , 300 , •••, 900 
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m
100 m
1. This cannot be set when option 001 is not installed.
Step 5. Press [DC Bias] to set the DC bias output to ON. DCBIAS appears in the status
display area and the LED indicator for DC bias lights up in orange.
Settling time for the DC bias signal voltage

Changing the DC bias requires a few milliseconds to several tens of
milliseconds. For details, refer to DC bias settling time in data sheet in Chapter
11 “Specifications and Supplemental Information”

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Measurement Time Mode

Three measurement time modes (SHORT, MEDIUM, LONG) can be selected for
the E4980A/AL. A longer measurement time will result in more stable and
accurate measurement results. Refer to “Measurement time” on page 442 For
details on the measurement time of each measurement time mode.
Procedure for setting measurement time mode

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the MEAS TIME field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to set the measurement time.
Softkey Function
SHORT Shortens the measurement time

MED Sets the measurement time between SHORT and LONG
LONG Lengthens the measurement time

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Display Setting for Measurement Results

The E4980A/AL can set the display digits and display units for measurement
results (primary parameter/secondary parameter). For measurement
parameters whose “setting available?” column is No in Table 3-22, the display
setting cannot be changed. For measurement parameters whose display digit
can be set to AUTO or FIXED, generally AUTO is selected. Regarding the
display range for measurement values, refer to “Measurement display ranges”
in data sheet in Chapter 11 “Specifications and Supplemental Information”
Table 3-22 shows the digits and units that can be set for each measurement
parameter.
Under certain conditions, a message will be displayed instead of measurement
results. For details, refer to “Displaying Errors instead of Measurement
Results” on page 71
Table 3-22 Display Settings for Measurement Results
Measurement Unit Setting Display Supplementary unit Minimum Maximum

Parameter available digits display display
?
Vdc V Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 999.9999E

Idc A Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 999.9999E
R,X,Z,Rdc  Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 999.9999E
G,B,Y S Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 999.9999E
Cp,Cs F Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 999.9999E
Lp,Ls H Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 999.9999E
-rad rad Yes AUTO/FIX a,f,p,n,u,m,k,M,G,T,P,E 1.000000a 3.141593
D n.a. No FIX n.a. 0.000001 9.999999
Q n.a. No FIX n.a. 0.01 99999.99
-deg deg No FIX n.a. 0.0001 180.0000
% % No FIX n.a. 0.0001 999.9999
Procedure to change display setting

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the field in which a measurement result of
primary parameter or secondary parameter is displayed.
Step 4. Use the following softkeys to set the display.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Softkey Function
D.P. AUTO Automatically displays the appropriate digits and units

D.P FIX Displays measurement data using a fixed-point display format. In
this case, is displayed at the fixed decimal point. (refer to
Figure 3-8).
D.P POS INCR + Moves the decimal point to the left. Supplementary units are also
changed.
D.P POS DECL - Moves the decimal point to the right. Supplementary units are also
changed.
Figure 3-8 Fixed-display sample of a measurement result
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪍㪈

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Displaying Errors instead of Measurement Results

Under certain conditions, the following message will appear instead of the
measurement results. A description of each message is provided below.
Error messages
Message Description
OVERLOAD This message appears when overload occurs. The returned value is
“9.9E37” when using the SCPI command. Conditions in which
overload occurs differ depending on the impedance range
settings. For details, refer to Table 3-26 on page 74.
--- This appears when no measurement was performed, or the
measurement result is beyond the display range.
INFINITY This message appears when the deviation mode of the deviation
measurement function is % and the measurement result cannot be
calculated.
Conditions where overload occurs for impedance measurement

Conditions differ depending on the impedance range setting (RANGE field).
Impedance Conditions
range
AUTO • E4980A/AL’s internal detector detects overload

• When the DUT’s distortion is large
• When the DUT’s response is slow
HOLD Conditions differ depending on the impedance range. Refer to Table
3-23
Table 3-23 Overload range when the impedance range is in the HOLD state for
impedance measurement
Impedance range Measurable range Range in which overload occurs

( ) (RANGE field)
0.1 0 to 0.11 more than 0.11

1 0 to 1.1 more than 1.1
10 0 to 11 more than 11
100 0 or more n.a.
300 270 or more less than 270
1k 900 or more less than 900

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Table 3-23 Overload range when the impedance range is in the HOLD state for
impedance measurement
Impedance range Measurable range Range in which overload occurs

( ) (RANGE field)

10 k 9,000 or more less than 9,000
Conditions where overload occurs for DCR measurement

Conditions differ depending on the DCR impedance-range setting (DCR RNG
field).
range
AUTO When the E4980A/AL’s internal detector detects overload

3-24
Table 3-24 Overload range when the impedance range is in the HOLD state for DCR
measurement
Impedance range ( )  Measurable range Range in which overload

(DCR RNG field) occurs
10 0 to 11 more than 11
100 0 or more n.a.

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Conditions in which overload occurs for Vdc-Idc measurement (DC

source-level monitor)
Conditions differ depending on the Idc impedance range setting (DCI RNG
field).
range
AUTO • When the measurement value exceeds 125 mA

• When the E4980A/AL’s internal detector detects overload
3-25
Overload does not occur for Vdc measurement.
Table 3-25 Overload range when the impedance range is in the HOLD state for Idc
measurement
Impedance range (A) Measurable range Range inn which overload

(DCI RNG field) occurs
20  0 to 22  more than 22 
200  0 to 220  more than 220 
2m 0 to 2.2 m more than 2.2 m
20 m 0 to 22 m more than 22 m
100 m 0 to 110 m more than 110 m
List of measurement results when overload occurs.

This section describes measurement results and each monitor value when
overload occurs.
The bold font in the list indicates the measurement parameter for which
overload occurs.
“*” indicates that measurement results, judgment, and BIN count are normal.

3- Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Table 3-26 List of measurement results when overload occurs
Measurement Meas. Meas. value VAC/IAC VDC IDC IN/ BIN

parameter value (secondary) monitor monitor monitor OUT No.
(primary)
Impedance OVLD OVLD --- --- --- L OUT

measurement (except
for Ls/Lp-Rdc)
Impedance OVLD OVLD --- --- --- L OUT
measurement (except
for Ls/Lp-Rdc)
Impedance OVLD --- --- --- --- L OUT
measurement
(Ls/Lp-Rdc)
DCR measurement * OVLD * * * L OUT
(Ls/Lp-Rdc)
Vdc-Idc measurement * OVLD 0 * OVLD L OUT
Other than Vdc-Idc * * * OVLD --- * *
measurement
Other than Vdc-Idc * * * * OVLD * *
measurement
OVLD is displayed as OVERLOAD on the display.

Display Format
MEAS DISPLAY Page
Monitor Information
The following describes monitor information displayed on the MEAS DISPLAY
page. This information cannot be changed on the MEAS DISPLAY page.
Monitor Description
information
VAC Displays the test signal voltage level (AC voltage). Displays
measurement results regardless of the type of measurement
parameter
IAC Displays the test signal current level (AC current). Displays
measurement results regardless of the type of measurement
parameter
VDC Displays the DC bias voltage level (DC voltage). Set the VDC MON
field of the [Means Setup] page to ON when you want to display it.1
IDC Displays the DC bias current level (DC current). Set the IDC MON field
of the [Means Setup] page to ON when you want to display it
CORR Displays the correction information of enabled correction types
(OPEN/SHORT/LOAD) and cable length
CH Displays the channel number in the multi-correction mode2
1. This can be displayed only when option 001 is installed.
2. SINGLE is displayed when option 301 is not installed.
The VDC/IDC monitor values are the ones measured under the condition
that the setting value of the test signal level (LEVEL field) is output.
Therefore, these values are different from the measurement results
displayed when the measurement parameter is DC voltage
measurement/DC current measurement (Vdc-Idc).

3- Display Format
BIN NO. DISPLAY Page

When you press the [Display Format] key and BIN No. soft key, the BIN No.
DISPLAY page appears. The bin sorting results are displayed in large
characters while the measurement results are shown in normal characters. The
following measurement controls can be set from the BIN No. DISPLAY page
(The field in parenthesis is used when this control is set).
• Comparator function ON/OFF (COMP field)
This page also provides the following information in the monitor areas (each
monitor area looks like a field but is not). These conditions can be set from the
MEAS SETUP page and the CORRECTION page, and most conditions can be
set from the MEAS DISPLAY page.
• Impedance range (RANGE)
• Test Signal Level (LEVEL)
• DC Bias (BIAS)
• Measurement Time Mode (MEAS TIME)
• Correction Information (CORR)
Figure 3-9 shows the available fields and the softkeys that correspond to each
field on this page.

Display Format
Figure 3-9 BIN NO. DISPLAY page
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪪㫆㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪍㪋
Comparator Function ON/OFF

The E4980A/AL’s built-in comparator can sort devices into a maximum of ten
bins (BIN 1 to BIN 9 and the OUT OF BIN) using a maximum of nine pairs of
primary parameter limits and one pair of secondary parameter limits. Also, a
device whose primary parameter is within limits, but whose secondary
parameter measurement result is not, can be sorted into an auxiliary BIN (AUX
BIN). To control a component handler using the comparator function, it is
necessary to install option 201.
These limits settings for bin sorting are set on the LIMIT TABLE page from the
[MEAS SETUP] key (refer to Chapter 4). Therefore, this COMP field allows you
to only set the comparator function to ON or OFF.
Procedure for setting the comparator function

Step 2. Press the BIN No. softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the COMP field.

3- Display Format
Step 4. Use the softkeys to set the comparator function to ON or OFF.
Softkey Function
ON Sets the comparator to ON

OFF Sets the comparator to OFF

Display Format
BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page

When you press the [Display Format] key and BIN COUNT softkey, the BIN
COUNT DISPLAY page is displayed. On this page, the comparator’s count
results are displayed (The field in parentheses is used for setting).
• Counter function ON/OFF (COUNT field)
This page also provides the following information in the monitor areas (each
monitor area looks like a field, but is not). These conditions can be set from the
LIMIT TABLE SETUP page. For more details, refer to “LIMIT TABLE SETUP
Page” on page 134.
• Nominal Value (NOM)
• Bin Sorting Low/High Limits (LOW/HIGH)
• BIN Sorting Results (RESULT)
Figure 3-10 shows the available fields and the softkeys that correspond to
each field on this page.
You can set it so that a beep sounds when the sorting result is output. For
details, refer to “Beep Feature” on page 143.

3- Display Format
Figure 3-10 BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪍㪌

Display Format
Counter Function
The E4980A/AL is capable of counting bins. The number of devices sorted into
each bin is counted while the unit sorts the devices into appropriate bins using
the comparator function.
The maximum count is 999,999. The counting operation stops and the overflow
message “----” appears when this value is reached.
Counter setting procedure

Step 2. Press the BIN COUNT softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the COUNT field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to set the counter to ON/OFF.
Softkey Function
COUNT ON Sets the counter to ON

COUNT OFF Sets the counter to OFF
Counter reset procedure

Step 2. Press the BIN COUNT softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the COUNT field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to press RESET COUNT.
The counter is reset when the instrument setting state is recalled.

3- Display Format
LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page

When you press the [Display Format] key and LIST SWEEP softkey, the LIST
SWEEP DISPLAY page appears. On this page in is possible to enter sweep
points and measurement limits of up to 201 frequencies, test signal levels, DC
bias, or DC source. The sweep points are automatically swept and the
measurement results are compared to the limits.
On the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page, the sweep points are swept and the
measurement results are compared to the limits. During a sweep, an asterisk
mark (*) will appear on the left side of the sweep point currently being
measured. The following measurement controls can be set from this page
(Each field in parentheses is used for setting).
• Sweep Mode of the List Sweep Measurement (MODE)
• Confirmation for Each Page of the List Sweep Measurement (No. of fields)
The sweep point list cannot be set from this page; it can only be set from the
LIST SWEEP SETUP page.
Figure 3-11 shows the available fields and the softkeys that correspond to
each field on this page.
You can set it so that a beep sounds when the sorting result is output. For
details, refer to “Beep Feature” on page 143.

Display Format
Figure 3-11 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪚㫆㫄㫇㪸㫉㫀㫊㫆㫅㩷㪩㪼㫊㫌㫃㫋㫊㩷㫆㪽
㪩㪼㫊㫌㫃㫋㫊㪣㫀㫊㫋㩷㪪㫎㪼㪼㫇㩷㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪍㪎

3- Display Format
Sweep Mode
The E4980A/AL’sf unction for list sweep measurement permits up to 201 test
frequencies, test signal levels, DC bias, or DC source to be automatically
measured. There are two measurement methods for list sweep measurements:
sequential (SEQ) mode and step (STEP) mode. In the case of SEQ mode, when
the E4980A/AL is triggered once, all sweep points are automatically swept. In
the case of STEP mode, each time the E4980A/AL is triggered, the sweep
points are swept one by one.
Procedure for setting sweep modes

Step 2. Press the LIST SWEEP softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the MODE field.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to select the sweep mode.
Softkey Function
SEQ When the E4980A/AL is triggered once, all sweep points are swept
STEP Each time the E4980A/AL is triggered, the sweep points are swept
one by one
Figure 3-12 Sequential mode and step mode
㪪㫎㪼㪼㫇㪪㫎㪼㪼㫇
㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪫㫀㫄㪼㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉
㪪㪜㪨㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㪪㪫㪜㪧㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪍㪍
When two or more sweep points are the same and are adjacent, the
E4980A/AL measures all of the listed points, and then compares the
measurement result to limits set for each sweep point.

Display Format
Procedure to confirm the sweep points

Step 2. Press the LIST SWEEP softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the No. of fields.
Step 4. Use the softkeys to confirm the sweep points on each page.
Softkey Function
PREV PAGE Displays the previous page

NEXT PAGE Displays the next page

3- Display Format
DISPLAY BLANK Page
DISPLAY BLANK Page

When you press the [Display Format] key and then press the DISPLAY BLANK
softkey, the screen switches to the non-display state. In this state,
measurement time decreases because the screen is not updated. For more on
display time, refer to “Display time” in data sheet in Chapter 11
Press the DISPLAY NORMAL softkey to return to the normal screen.
Figure 3-13 shows the DISPLAY BLANK page.
Figure 3-13 DISPLAY BLANK page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪍㪏
The LCD backlight cannot be turned off.

Keys other than the DISPLAY NORMAL softkey are not available.
Even when the screen is in the non-display state and the front panel keys
are unavailable (UNLOCK state), the DISPLAY NORMAL key is available.

User’s Guide
4 Configuring Measurement Conditions (Display and

Function Related Settings)
This chapter provides information on the various settings accessible through

the MEAS SETUP page of the E4980A/AL.
Initializing the Instrument

The E4980A/AL can be initialized into one of the following four default states:
Table 4-1 Three default states of E4980A/AL and how it is initialized
Default state How the instrument is initialized
CLEAR SETTING When you initialize the instrument into this state, all basic
parameters configurable through the front panel and SCPI
commands are cleared. (You get the same result by issuing the
*RST command).
CLEAR SET&CORR When you initialize the instrument into this state, calibration
data and backup items listed in the initial setting list are all
cleared. 1(You can gain the same result by issuing the
:SYST:PRES command).
FACTORY DEFAULT When you initialize the instrument into this state, it reverts to
factory default settings with all user-configurable data
cleared.
LAN RESET When you initialize the instrument into this state, the LAN
setting is returned to the factory default state.
1. It takes a few seconds for the initialization to complete.
For more information on each default state and affected settings, see
Appendix C , “List of Default Values,” on page 449.
87
4- Configuring Measurement Conditions (Display and Function Related Settings)
MEAS SETUP page
MEAS SETUP page

You can press the [Meas Setup] key to open the MEAS SETUP page. In the
MEAS SETUP page, you can configure each of the following measurement
controls with the cursor placed in the corresponding field (denoted in
parentheses).
• Comment line (USER COMMENT field)
• Measurement function (FUNC field)
• Measurement range (RANGE field)
• Measurement frequency (FREQ field)
• DC bias (BIAS field)
• Measurement signal level (LEVEL field)
• Measurement time mode (MEAS TIME field)
• Trigger mode (TRIG field)
• averaging factor (AVG field)
• Automatic level control (ALC field)
• Signal voltage level monitor ON/OFF (VDC MON field)
• DC resistance range (DCR RNG field)
• Signal current level monitor ON/OFF (IDC MON field)
• Bias current isolation (DCI ISO field)
• Trigger delay time (TRIG DLY field)
• DC current (DCI) range (DCI RNG field)
• Step delay time (STEP DLY field)
• DC source (DC SRC field)
• Automatic bias polarity control (BIAS POL)
• Deviation measurement mode A (DEV A field)
• Reference value for deviation measurement mode A (REF A field)
• Deviation measurement mode B (DEV B field)
• Reference value for deviation measurement mode B (REF B field)
The following fields are accessible through both the MEAS SETUP and MEAS
DISPLAY pages:
• Measurement range (RANGE field)
• Measurement frequency (FREQ field)

Configuring Measurement Conditions (Display and Function Related Settings)
MEAS SETUP page
• DC bias (BIAS field)

• Measurement signal level (LEVEL field)
• Measurement time mode (MEAS TIME field)
For more information on the fields listed above, refer to the description in
Chapter 3 “Display Format” The following sections gives descriptions on the
fields that are only accessible through the MEAS SETUP.
Figure 4-1 shows the fields available on this page along with the softkeys
corresponding to them.
Figure 4-1 MEAS SETUP page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪍㪐

MEAS SETUP page
Comment line
You can enter a comment in the comment line by using the softkeys to enter
letters and the entry keys to enter numbers from 0 through 9, +, -, and period
(.). Your entered comment is saved in the internal memory or external USB
memory along with the control settings of the E4980A/AL. When you load the
control settings, your saved comment is loaded as well.
The comment can be up to 30 characters in length. However, only the first 22
characters are displayed in the area.
Until you enter a comment into the comment line, the default text “USER
COMMENT” appears in the comment line.
You can also use the DISPlay:LINE command to enter ASCII characters into
the comment line.
To enter a comment into the comment line:

Step 1. Press [Meas Setup].
Step 2. Press the MEAS SETUP softkey.
Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the USER COMMENT field.
If there is already a comment, select that comment (field).
Step 4. To input a letter, use the following softkeys to cycle through letters in
alphabetical order and then select your desired letter:
Softkey Description
NEXT Displays the next letter to the letter currently displayed in the ADD
CHAR softkey.
PREV Displays the previous letter to the letter currently displayed in the
ADD CHAR softkey.
To input a number, use the entry keys.
Step 5. Press the ADD CHAR softkey.Your selected single character appears in the
input line area.
Step 6. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 to input subsequent characters.
Step 7. Press the ENTER softkey to enter your text in the USER COMMENT field.

MEAS SETUP page
Trigger mode
Functional Description
The E4980A/AL supports four trigger modes: INT (internal), EXT (external),
MAN (manual), and BUS (GPIB bus).
For more on the E4980A/AL’s trigger system, see “Trigger System” on
page 249 in Chapter 8 “Overview of Remote Control”
Trigger mode Description
INT After you bring up the display page using the [Display Format] key,
the instrument continuously repeats the measurement cycle.
MAN After you bring up the display page using the [Display Format] key,
the instrument performs one cycle of measurement each time you
press the [Trigger] key.
EXT After you bring up the display page using the [Display Format] key,
the instrument performs one cycle of measurement each time a
rising TTL pulse is input to the external trigger input terminal on
the rear panel. In the EXT (external trigger) mode, you can also
trigger the instrument by short-circuiting the core wire of the
external trigger input terminal and the instrument’s ground line
(the core wire is connected to a circuit that contains a pull-up
resistor). Figure 4-2 shows the TTL pulse specifications.
Also, you can trigger the instrument from the handler interface or
scanner interface.
BUS The E4980A/AL performs one cycle of measurement each time it
receives a trigger command sent via GPIB/USB/LAN.
E4980A/AL ignores any trigger that is input during a measurement cycle.

Be sure to trigger the instrument when it is not in a measurement cycle.

MEAS SETUP page
Figure 4-2 External trigger pulse
㪭㪠㪟
㪫㫇
㪭㪠㪣
㪠㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼䋺㩷㪉㪅㪇㩷㪭㩷㪓㩷㪭㪠㪟㩷㻡㩷㪌㪅㪇㩷㪭
㩷㩷㪇㩷㪭㩷㻡㩷㪭㪠㪣㩷㪓㩷㪇㪅㪌㩷㪭
㪠㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㪚㫌㫉㫉㪼㫅㫋䋺㩷㪤㪸㫏㪅䇭㪇㪅㪈㩷㫄㪘㩷㩿㪗㪭㪠㪟㩷㪔㩷㪌㪅㪇㩷㪭㪀
㩷㩷㪤㪸㫏㪅䇭㪄㪇㪅㪌㩷㫄㪘㩷㩿㪗㪭㪠㪣㩷㪔㩷㪇㪅㪋㩷㪭㪀
㪧㫌㫃㫊㪼㩷㪮㫀㪻㫋㪿䋺㩷㪫㫇㩷㻢㩷㪈㩷㱘㫊
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪍
To choose a trigger mode:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the TRIG field.
Step 3. Select your desired trigger mode by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
INT Puts the instrument into internal trigger (INT) mode.

MAN Puts the instrument into manual trigger (MAN) mode.
EXT Puts the instrument into external trigger (EXT) mode.
BUS Puts the instrument into bus mode.

MEAS SETUP page
Automatic level control
The automatic level control (ALC) feature adjusts the voltage across the DUT to
the same level as the signal voltage level setting or the current across the DUT
to the same level as the signal current level setting. Using this feature, you can
maintain a constant level (voltage or current) of measurement signals applied
to the DUT.
The automatic level control feature uses a monitorable feedback circuit, as
shown in Figure 4-3, to iterate a feedback loop that consists of level
measurement and level change, two to nine times every measurement cycle.
(The time required for level adjustment depends on how many times the
feedback loop is iterated (the value “n”) and, in turn, the value “n” depends on
the characteristics of the DUT. Generally, the higher the DUT’s non-linearity,
the longer the level adjustment time.)
If the automatic level control feature fails to complete the level adjustment
after it has iterated the feedback loop (level measurement and level change)
nine times, it becomes inactive1 and the warning message “ALC unable to
regulate” appears. In this case, the signal input level is made equal to the
specified level, and the signal output level is made equal to the output level
with the automatic level control feature turned off.
The time required for the automatic level control feature to complete the
adjustment can be determined based on the following formula:
When the measurement range is set to HOLD, (measurement time + test signal
voltage setting time)  n,
where n = 2 (min)
n = 9 (max)
For more on the test signal voltage setting time, refer to data sheet in
Chapter 11 “Specifications and Supplemental Information” .
1. If the DUT has a very high linearity, the automatic level control feature may turn
inactive before it enters the 9th iteration of the feedback loop of the level measure-
ment cycle and the level may change.

MEAS SETUP page
Figure 4-3 Feedback Circuit
㪝㪼㪼㪻㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㪣㫆㫆㫇
㪛㪬㪫㪘
㪈㪇㪇㱅㪟㪠㪞㪟㪣㪦㪮
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪎
Figure 4-4 shows the working ranges of the automatic level control feature. In
the charts, solid lines denote the ranges that apply when the DUT is a resistor,
while broken lines denote the ranges for a capacitor or inductor.
When test signal level is set close to 2 Vrms/20 mArms or 20 Vrms/100

mArms or less then 5 mVrms, the warning message “ALC unable to
regulate” may appear.

MEAS SETUP page
Figure 4-4 Working ranges of the automatic level control feature
㪲㩷㪭㩷㪴
㪮㫀㫋㪿㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈
㪈㪇
㪈㪮㫀㫋㪿㫆㫌㫋㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈
㪪㪠㪞㪥㪘㪣㩷㪭㪦㪣㪫㪘㪞㪜
㪈㪇㪇㫄
㪈㪇㫄
㪈㫄
㪇㪅㪈㪈㪈㪇㪈㪇㪇㪈㫂㪈㪇㫂㪈㪇㪇㫂㪈㪤㪲㱅㪴
㪠㪤㪧㪜㪛㪘㪥㪚㪜㩷㪦㪝㩷㪛㪬㪫
㪪㫀㪾㫅㪸㫃㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸
㪲㩷㪘㩷㪴
㪮㫀㫋㪿㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈
㪈㪇㪇㫄
㪈㪇㫄㪮㫀㫋㪿㫆㫌㫋㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈
㪪㪠㪞㪥㪘㪣㩷㪚㪬㪩㪩㪜㪥㪫
㪈㫄
㪈㪇㪇㱘
㪈㪇㱘
㪈㱘
㪇㪅㪈㪈㪈㪇㪈㪇㪇㪈㫂㪈㪇㫂㪈㪇㪇㫂㪈㪤㪲㱅㪴
㪠㪤㪧㪜㪛㪘㪥㪚㪜㩷㪦㪝㩷㪛㪬㪫
㪪㫀㪾㫅㪸㫃㩷㪚㫌㫉㫉㪼㫅㫋㩷㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸
㪩㪼㫊㫀㫊㫋㫀㫍㪼㩷㩿㱔㪔㩷㪇㫦㪀
㪩㪼㪸㪺㫋㫀㫍㪼㩷㩿㱔㪔㩷㪂㪐㪇㫦㫆㫉㩷㪄㪐㪇㫦㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪏

MEAS SETUP page
To set up the automatic level control feature:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the ALC field.
Step 3. Use the following softkeys:
Softkey Description
ON Turns ON the automatic level control feature.

OFF Turns OFF the automatic level control feature.

MEAS SETUP page
DC Bias Current Isolation
When the instrument is equipped with Option 001 (Power/DC Bias Enhance), it
supports DC bias settings up to  40V. The DC bias current actually applied to
the DUT can be checked using the IDC monitor.
The DC bias current isolation feature is intended to prevent DC current from
affecting the measurement circuit. To turn on/off this feature, use the DCI ISO
field.
For information on the maximum DC bias current with the DC bias current
isolation feature ON or OFF, see “Maximum DC bias current” in data sheet in
Chapter 11 “Specifications and Supplemental Information” .
When the DC bias current isolation feature is OFF and the DC bias current
applied to the DUT exceeds the maximum level, turn this feature ON. If a DC
bias current exceeding the maximum level is applied to the DUT, the
instrument will fail to return correct measurements.
The DC bias current isolation feature affects measurement accuracy. For

more information, see “Relative measurement accuracy with bias current
isolation” in data sheet in Chapter 11 “Specifications and Supplemental
Information” .
To set up the DC bias current isolation feature:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the DCI ISO field.
Softkey Description
ON Turn ON the DC bias current isolation feature.

OFF Turn OFF the DC bias current isolation feature.
Step 4. Set the DCI measurement range. For more information, see “To set the DCI
range:” on page 106.

MEAS SETUP page
Averaging Factor
The averaging feature of the E4980A/AL allows you to obtain moving average
values of successive measurement results.
You can specify the averaging factor within the range of 1 to 256 in steps of 1.
The averaging feature does not affect the measurement results of the DC
bias voltage monitor and DC bias current monitor even when a particular
averaging factor is specified.
To set up the averaging factor:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the AVG field.
Step 3. Enter the averaging factor using the softkeys or entry keys. If you have used
the entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (x1).
Softkey Description
INCR ++ Increments the averaging factor in steps of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,

128, and 256.
INCR + Increments the averaging factor in steps of 1.
DECR - Decrements the averaging factor in steps of 1.
DECR -- Decrements the averaging factor in steps of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, and 256.

MEAS SETUP page
Trigger Delay Time
The trigger delay time feature of the E4980A/AL allows you to adjust the time
between triggering and start of measurement. When you carry out list sweep
measurement, this trigger delay time is inserted into the first place of the list.
You can set the trigger delay time within the range of 0 through 999 s
(seconds) in minimum units of 100 s.
This feature is useful when you use the E4980A/AL in conjunction with the
handler and want to trigger the E4980A/AL after stabilizing the connection of
the DUT.
To set the trigger delay time:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the TRIG DLY field.
Step 3. Enter the trigger delay time using the softkeys or entry keys. If you have used
the entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (ms,
s).
Softkey Description
INCR ++ Increments the trigger delay time in the resolution steps shown in
Table 4-3.
INCR + Increments the trigger delay time in the resolution steps shown in
Table 4-3.
DECR - Decrements the trigger delay time in the resolution steps shown in
Table 4-3.
DECR -- Decrements the trigger delay time in the resolution steps shown in
Table 4-3.
Table 4-2 Resolution steps that apply when setting the trigger delay time with INCR ++
/ DECR --
INCR ++ / DECR -- (s)
0
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m
100 m, 200 m, 300 m, •••, 900 m
1, 2, 3, •••, 9

MEAS SETUP page
Table 4-2 Resolution steps that apply when setting the trigger delay time with INCR ++
/ DECR --
10, 20, 30, •••, 90

100, 200, 300, •••, 900, 999
Table 4-3 Resolution steps that apply when setting the trigger delay time with INCR + /
DECR -
Trigger delay time Resolution
0 s through 100 ms 100 s

100 ms through 1 s 1 ms
1 s through 10 s 10 ms
100 s through 999 s 1s
For the relationship between the trigger delay time and step delay time,
refer to Figure 4-5 on page 102.

MEAS SETUP page
Step Delay Time
The step delay time feature of the E4980A/AL allows you to the delay the start
of measurement at each step and before starting measurement by the
automatic bias polarity control feature.
You can set the step delay time within the range of 0 through 999 s (seconds)
in minimum units of 100 s.
To set the step delay time:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the STEP DLY field.
Step 3. Enter the step delay time using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the entry
keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (ms, s).
Softkey Description
INCR ++ Increments step delay time in resolution steps shown in Table 4-4.
INCR + Increments step delay time in resolution steps shown in Table 4-5.
DECR - Decrements step delay time in resolution steps shown in Table 4-5.
DECR -- Decrements step delay time in resolution steps shown in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Resolution steps when setting the step delay time with INCR ++ / DECR --
0
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m
100 m, 200 m, 300 m, •••, 900 m
1, 2, 3, •••, 9
10, 20, 30, •••, 90
100, 200, 300, •••, 900, 999

MEAS SETUP page
Table 4-5 Resolution steps when setting the trigger delay time with INCR + / DECR -
Trigger delay time Resolution
0 s through 100 ms 100 s

100 ms through 1 s 1 ms
100 s through 999 s 1s
Figure 4-5 Trigger delay time and step delay time
㪜㫅㪻㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫄㪼㫅㫋
㪸㫅㪻㩷㪪㫋㫀㫄㫌㫃㫌㫊㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㫆㪽㩷㪧㫆㫀㫅㫋㪉
㪪㫋㫀㫄㫌㫃㫌㫊㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪪㫋㪸㫉㫋㩷㫆㪽㪜㫅㪻㩷㫆㪽
㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㫆㪽㩷㪧㫆㫀㫅㫋㪈㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫄㪼㫅㫋㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫄㪼㫅㫋
㫒
㫒
㫒
㫒
㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㪪㪼㫋㫋㫃㫀㫅㪾㪪㫋㪼㫇㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫄㪼㫅㫋
㪛㪼㫃㪸㫐㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㪫㫀㫄㪼㪛㪼㫃㪸㫐㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪎㪎
In DCR measurement, there are two step delay times because two cycles
of measurement are performed by applying +0.1 V and -0.1 V. Accordingly,
when measuring the Rdc parameter such as Ls-Rdc, since the stimulus
setting and measurement procedure is executed three times in one
measurement, the step delay time takes three times as long as the setting
value.

MEAS SETUP page
DC Bias Voltage Monitor
The DC bias voltage monitor feature allows you to monitor the actual level of
the signal voltage across the DUT. The DC bias voltage monitor value is only
displayed in the VDC monitor area of the MEAS DISPLAY page.
To set up the signal voltage level monitor feature:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the VDC MON field.
Softkey Description
ON Turn ON the DC bias voltage monitor feature.

OFF Turn OFF the DC bias voltage monitor feature.

MEAS SETUP page
DC Bias Current Monitor
The DC bias current monitor feature allows you to monitor the actual level of
the signal current across the DUT. The DC bias current monitor value is only
displayed in the IDC monitor area of the MEAS DISPLAY page.
To set up the signal voltage level monitor feature:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the IDC MON field.
Softkey Description
ON Turn ON the DC bias current monitor feature.

OFF Turn OFF the DC bias current monitor feature.

MEAS SETUP page
DCR Range
In DCR measurement, the E4980A/AL’s internal signal level is set to 0 V, and
then two cycles of measurement are performed by applying +0.1 V and -0.1 V.
You can set the range for DCR measurement. DCR range can be set to one of
five hold ranges, which are available when the measurement parameters are
Lp-Rdc and Ls-Rdc.
Model Measurement range ()
Standard 10, 100, 1 k, 10 k, 100 k
When you set the DCR range to HOLD, DCI range and measurement range
are also automatically set to HOLD; when you set the DCR range to AUTO,
DCI range and measurement range are also automatically set to AUTO.
If you start DCR measurement with DC bias ON, DC bias is automatically

turned OFF. When the measurement parameters are Lp-Rdc and Ls-Rdc,
DC bias cannot be set to ON. An error message appears if you try to do
this.
To set the DCR range:

Step 2. Press the MEAS SETUP softkey.
Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the DCR RNG field.
Step 4. Enter the DCR range using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the entry
keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (, k).
Softkey Description
AUTO Sets the DCR range to AUTO.

HOLD Sets the DCR range to HOLD (manual).
INCR + Use this softkey to increment the measurement range. The DCR
range changes to HOLD.
DECR - Use this softkey to decrement the measurement range. The DCR

MEAS SETUP page
DCI Range
You can set the range for DCI measurement. DCI range can be set to one of five
hold ranges, which are available for DCI measurement.
Before setting the range for DCI measurement, it is necessary to set the DC
bias current isolation feature to ON. For details, refer to “DC Bias Current
Isolation” on page 97
Model Measurement range (A)
Standard 20 , 200 , 2 m, 20 m, 100 m
When you set the DCI range to HOLD, DCR range and measurement range
are also automatically set to HOLD; when you set the DCI range to AUTO,
DCR range and measurement range are also automatically set to AUTO.
The initial value of DCI measurement range is set to 20 m at HOLD, so

OVERLOAD is displayed when measure the current more than 20 m. In that
case, set the DCI measurement range automatic or 100 m with following
steps.
To set the DCI range:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the DCI ISO field to set it to ON.
Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the DCI RNG field.
Step 4. Enter the DCI range using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the entry keys
to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (A, mA, A).
Softkey Description
AUTO Sets the DCI range to AUTO.

HOLD Sets the DCI range to HOLD (manual).
INCR + Use this softkey to increment the measurement range. The DCI
DECR - Use this softkey to decrement the measurement range. The DCI

MEAS SETUP page
DC Source
You can set the DC voltage that is output from the DC source output terminal
within the range of -10 V through 10 V.
To set the DC source:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the DC SRC field.
Step 3. Enter the DC source voltage using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the
entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (mV, V).
Softkey Description
INCR ++ Increments the DC source voltage in the resolution steps shown in

Table 4-3.
INCR + Increments the DC source voltage in steps of 1 mV when lower than
1V or in steps of 10 mV when equal to or higher than 1V.
DECR - Decrements Increments the DC source voltage in steps of 1 mV
when lower than 1V or in steps of 10 mV when equal to or higher
than 1V.
DECR -- Decrements the DC source voltage in the resolution steps shown in
Table 4-3.
Table 4-6 Resolution steps when setting the DC source voltage with INCR ++ / INCR --
INCR ++ / INCR -- (V)
0V
1 m, 2 m, 3 m, •••, 9 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m, •••, 90 m
100 m, 200 m, 300 m, •••, 900 m
1, 2, 3, •••, 9
10

MEAS SETUP page
Automatic Bias Polarity Control
The automatic bias polarity control feature is useful when testing a varactor
diode. The E4980A/AL identifies the connection state of the diode using an
internal bias (approx. 1 V) and internally controls the DC bias polarity so that a
reverse bias is applied to the diode.
For example, when a varactor diode is connected as shown in Figure 4-6, the
E4980A/AL recognizes that the diode is correctly connected and applies a DC
bias in accordance with the specified setting. On the other hand, when a
varactor diode is connected as shown in Figure 4-7, the E4980A/AL recognizes
that the diode is reverse-connected and applies a DC bias by inverting the
polarity of the specified setting. This feature eliminates the need to check the
polarity of a varactor diode before connecting it to the UNKNOWN terminal.
When the DC bias feature is OFF and you set the automatic bias polarity
control feature to AUTO, the automatic bias polarity control feature does
not function.
Figure 4-6 Varactor diode (normal polarity)
㪫㪿㪼㩷㪹㫀㪸㫊㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫃㫀㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫍㪸㫉㪸㪺㫋㫆㫉㩷㪻㫀㫆㪻㪼㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪸㫄㪼㩷㫇㫆㫃㪸㫉㫀㫋㫐㩷㪸㫊
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪹㫀㪸㫊㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㩷㪟㫀㪾㪿㩷㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫀㫊㩷㪂㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪣㫆㫎㩷㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫀㫊㩷㪄㩷㪀㪅
㪝㫆㫉㩷㪼㫏㪸㫄㫇㫃㪼㪃
㪙㫀㪸㫊㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪘㫇㫇㫃㫀㪼㪻㩷㪙㫀㪸㫊㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼
㪈㪭㪈㪭
㪊㪭㪊㪭
㪈㪇㪭㪈㪇㪭
㪄㪈㪇㪭㪁㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈㩷㪦㫅㫃㫐㪈㪇㪭㪁㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈㩷㪦㫅㫃㫐
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪎

MEAS SETUP page
Figure 4-7 Varactor diode (reverse polarity)
㪫㪿㪼㩷㪹㫀㪸㫊㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫃㫀㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫍㪸㫉㪸㪺㫋㫆㫉㩷㪻㫀㫆㪻㪼㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫀㫅㫍㪼㫉㫊㪼㩷㫆㪽
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪹㫀㪸㫊㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㩷㪟㫀㪾㪿㩷㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫀㫊㩷㪄㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪣㫆㫎㩷㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫀㫊㩷㪂㩷㪀㪅
㪝㫆㫉㩷㪼㫏㪸㫄㫇㫃㪼㪃
㪙㫀㪸㫊㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪘㫇㫇㫃㫀㪼㪻㩷㪙㫀㪸㫊㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼
㪈㪭㪄㪈㪭
㪊㪭㪄㪊㪭
㪈㪇㪭㪄㪈㪇㪭
㪄㪈㪇㪭㪁㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈㩷㪦㫅㫃㫐㪄㪈㪇㪭㪁㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪇㪇㪈㩷㪦㫅㫃㫐
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪏
To set up the automatic bias polarity control feature:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the BIAS POL field.
Softkey Description
AUTO Sets the automatic bias polarity control feature to AUTO mode.
FIX Sets the automatic bias polarity control feature to FIX mode.

MEAS SETUP page
Deviation Measurement
The deviation measurement feature allows you to display deviation values
instead of actual measurements. A deviation is expressed as the difference
between the actual measurement and the stored reference value. The deviation
measurement feature is useful when you observe how a particular value of a
device/component changes under varying conditions of temperature,
frequency, bias, and other influences.
You can apply the deviation measurement feature to the primary or secondary
parameter or both. The deviation measurement feature supports the following
two modes:
• ABS (absolute value) deviation measurement
Identifies and displays the difference between the actual measurement of
the DUT and the stored reference value. This value is calculated based on
the following formula:
ABS = X-Y
X actual measurement of the DUT

Y stored reference value
• % (percentage) deviation measurement

Identifies the difference between the actual measurement of the DUT and
the stored reference value and displays it as a percentage of the reference
value. This percentage deviation value is calculated based on the following
formula:
% = (X-Y)/Y100 (%)
X actual measurement of the DUT

Y stored reference value
To set up the deviation measurement feature:

Step 2. Using the cursor keys, select the REF A field.

MEAS SETUP page
Step 3. Enter the reference value using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the entry
keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (n, u, m, x1,
k). 1
Softkey Description
MEASURE If you want to use a particular device/component as the reference,

connect the DUT and press this key. Then the instrument measures
the DUT once and automatically fills the REF A and (REF) B fields
with the measured values, which now serve as the reference values.
Step 4. Using the cursor keys, select the DEV A field.

Step 5. Select the deviation mode for the primary parameter by pressing the
appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
ABS Displays the deviation as the difference from the reference value.
% Displays the deviation as a percentage of the reference value.
OFF Turns OFF deviation measurement.
Step 6. Using the cursor keys, select the (DEV) B field.

Step 7. Select the deviation mode for the primary parameter using the softkeys
described in Step 5.
1. If the primary parameter of the measurement function is C, the softkey labels show these units: p, n, u, m, x1.

CORRECTION page
CORRECTION page
Pressing the [Meas Setup] key followed by the CORRECTION opens the
CORRECTION page. The CORRECTION page allows you to perform
Open/Short/Load correction to compensate for any error caused by
disturbances such as stray admittances and residual impedances. It also
allows you to select the cable length.
The correction feature supports the following two correction methods:
• Correction based on all frequency points
• Correction based on user-specified frequency points
Correction based on all frequency points involves performing open/short
correction at all measurement points throughout the entire frequency range.
Correction based on user-specified frequency points involves performing
open/short/load correction at the user-specified frequency points.
Each correction dataset can be deleted by using the [Preset] key. For more
information, see “Initializing the Instrument” on page 87.
Correction when measuring DC resistance is performed only when the

measurement parameter is Lp-Rdc and Ls-Rdc.
In this page, you can configure each of the following controls with the cursor
placed in the corresponding field (denoted in parentheses).
• Open correction (OPEN field)
• Short correction (SHORT field)
• Load correction (LOAD field)
• Cable length selection (CABLE field)
• Multiple/single correction mode selection (MODE field)
• Measurement function for load correction (FUNC field)
• Channel selection for multiple correction mode (CH field)
• User-specified frequencies 1 to 201 for open/load/short correction (SPOT
and FREQ fields)
• Measurement value and reference value at specified frequency points for
open/short/load correction (REF A, REF B, OPEN A, OPEN B, SHORT A,
SHORT B, LOAD A, and LOAD B fields)

CORRECTION page
Figure 4-8 CORRECTION page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪎㪇
To set the correction function to on or off

Open/short correction at all frequency points and open/short/load correction
at user-specified spot frequency points can be enabled or disabled by entering
ON or OFF (with softkeys) in the OPEN, SHORT and LOAD fields on the
CORRECTION display page. The on/off settings in the OPEN, SHORT and
LOAD fields determine the on/off state of both open/short correction at all
frequency points and open/short/load correction at user-specified spot
frequency points. Accordingly, open/short/load correction at user-specified
spot frequency points can be performed only when open/short correction at all
frequency points is activated.
When the settings of the OPEN, SHORT and LOAD fields are ON, both
open/short correction at all frequency points and open/short/load correction
at user-specified spot frequency points are enabled. Open/short/load
correction at user-specified spot frequency points are not carried out by setting
FREQ field (below SPOT NO. field) to default OFF state. By entering a desired
frequency in the FREQ field allocated to SPOT NO. from 1 to 201,
open/short/load correction at the user-specified spot frequency is carried out.
Open/short /load correction at user-specified spot frequency points takes
priority over open/short correction at all frequency points when test frequency
is identical with one of the user-specified spot frequency points.

CORRECTION page
The correction functions of the E4980A/AL are operated as follows:
On/off setting in OPEN, OFF ON

SHORT and LOAD fields
Open/short correction at all Not Open/short correction at 51 preset
frequency points Performed frequency points is performed.
Correction at other frequency points is
performed by using interpolation based
on the correction data at the preset
frequencies adjacent to the test
frequency.
Open/short/load correction Not Open/short/load correction at
at user-specified spot Performed user-specified spot frequency points is
frequency points performed in place of open/short
correction at all frequency points when
test frequency is identical with one of
the user-specified spot frequency
points.

CORRECTION page
Open Correction
The open correction feature of the E4980A/AL compensates for any stray
admittances (G, B) that may exist within the interval from the calibration plane,
which is determined by the selected cable length, to the DUT connecting
points (see Figure 4-9).
Figure 4-9 Stray admittances
㫁㪙
㪛㪬㪫
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪌
Description of Correction Based on All Frequency Points

In this correction method, open correction data are collected from all 51
predetermined frequency points, regardless of the test frequency settings. At
the other frequency points, correction is done using data calculated by
interpolating the data collected at the 51 points (see Figure 4-10). The
following tables list the 51 predetermined frequency points:
Table 4-7 Predetermined frequency points in correction based on all frequency points
Test frequency points

50 Hz 250 Hz 2.5 kHz 25 kHz 250 kHz
60 Hz 300 Hz 3 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz
80 Hz 400 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz 400 kHz

CORRECTION page
Figure 4-10 Open/short correction using the interpolation method
㪉㪇㪟㫑㪉㪤㪟㫑
㪫㪼㫊㫋㩷㪝㫉㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㪺㫐㩷㪧㫆㫀㫅㫋㫊
㪧㫉㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪝㫉㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㪺㫐㩷㪧㫆㫀㫅㫋㫊
㩿㪌㪈㩷㫇㫆㫀㫅㫋㫊㪀㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫
㪛㪸㫋㪸㪛㪸㫋㪸
㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪺㪸㫃㪺㫌㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻
㫌㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㫇㫆㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷
㫄㪼㫋㪿㫆㪻
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪐
To carry out open correction based on all frequency points:

Step 2. Press the CORRECTION softkey.
Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the OPEN field.
Step 4. Connect the UNKNOWN terminal and the text fixture with no DUT connected.
Step 5. Press the MEAS OPEN softkey. The E4980A/AL measures open admittances
(capacitances and conductances) at the 51 test frequency points.
• During the measurement, an “OPEN measurement in progress” message is
shown on the display.
• When the measurement has finished, the “OPEN measurement in progress”
message disappears.
• During the measurement, the ABORT softkey is shown. Use this key when
you want to abort open correction.

CORRECTION page
The E4980A/AL do not have a functionality to check whether the OPEN

correction data is valid or not. Any OPEN correction data can be set, even
if work-related mistakes are made in measuring for the OPEN correction.
For example,
- improper OPEN is used.
- setting up the OPEN state and SHORT state inversely.
- the OPEN is connected incompletely.
- fixture or cable is connected incompletely.
- previous correction data is used.
- after correction, different length cable/different fixture is connected or
settings of frequency/level is changed.
If OPEN correction data is invalid, it may cause inappropriate
measurements without showing warning message. Be careful about the
connection of appropriate OPEN state. You cannot check the measured
values for the OPEN correction.
If "E43 Measurement failed" error is displayed during the OPEN correction,
measure the OPEN state (disable OPEN correction[OPEN OFF]) at some
frequencies (100, 1k, 1MHz etc.) and check if the following conditions
happen. If one of them happens, try its suggestion.
"ALC unable to regulate" warning message is displayed (suggestion: turn
off ALC)
"Signal source overload" warning message is displayed (suggestion:
reduce test signal)
"Overload" is displayed (Measurement result becomes overload)
(suggestion: check cabling/fixturing)

CORRECTION page
Step 6. Press the ON key to enable open correction in successive measurements.
Description of Softkeys
To enable/disable or otherwise control the behavior of open correction, use the
following softkeys:
Softkey Description
ON Enables open correction.

OFF Disables open correction.
MEAS OPEN Starts open correction.

CORRECTION page
Short Correction
The short correction feature of the E4980A/AL compensates for any residual
impedances (R, X) that may exist within the interval from the calibration plane,
which is determined by the selected cable length, to the DUT connecting
points (see Figure 4-11).
Figure 4-11 Residual impedances
㪩㫁㪯㪛㪬㪫
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪇
To carry out short correction:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the SHORT field.
Step 4. Connect the UNKNOWN terminal and the test fixture and short-circuit the
high and low test terminals.
Step 5. Press the MEAS SHORT softkey. The E4980A/AL measures short circuit
impedances (inductances and resistances) at the 51 test frequency points.
• During the measurement, a “SHORT measurement in progress” message is
• When the measurement has finished, the “SHORT measurement in
progress” message disappears.

CORRECTION page
you want to abort short correction.
The E4980A/AL do not have a functionality to check whether the SHORT

correction data is valid or not. Any SHORT correction data can be set, even
if work-related mistakes are made in measuring for the SHORT correction.
For example,
- improper SHORT is used.
- the SHORT is connected incompletely.
If SHORT correction data is invalid, it may cause inappropriate
connection of appropriate SHORT state. You cannot check the measured
values for the SHORT correction.
If "E43 Measurement failed" error is displayed during the SHORT
correction, measure the SHORT state (disable SHORT correction[SHORT
OFF]) at some frequencies (100, 1k, 1MHz etc.) and check if the following
conditions happen. If one of them happens, try its suggestion.
off ALC)
reduce test signal)
Step 6. Press the ON key to enable short correction in successive measurements.
Description of the Softkeys

To enable/disable or otherwise control the behavior of short correction, use the
following softkeys:
Softkey Description
ON Enables short correction.

OFF Disables short correction.
MEAS Starts short correction.
SHORT

CORRECTION page
Correction Based on User-Specified Frequency Points
Description of Correction Based on User-Specified Frequency Points

Correction based on user-specified frequency points involves performing
open/short/load correction at frequency points specified by user. You can
specify up to 201 frequency points as needed.
For examples and instructions on using the correction features, see “Correction
Functions” on page 208.
In addition to the open/short correction features, the E4980A/AL provides a
load correction feature that allows you to carry out, at your specified frequency
points, load correction using a transfer function determined based on the
relationships between a particular standard’s reference values (pre-measured,
known values) and the standard’s actual measurements. With load correction,
you can compensate for errors that cannot be compensated using open/short
correction.
Open/short/load correction can be performed at up to 201 specified frequency
points, as shown in Figure 4-12. You can define these frequency points using
the SPOT No. fields. To specify the standard’s reference values, use the A and B
fields. Before entering the standard’s reference values, you need to set the
measurement function using the FUNC field. To obtain the standard’s actual
measurements, use the softkey, which appears when you move the cursor into
the FREQ field.
Figure 4-12 Open/short/load correction
㪝㪩㪜㪨㪈㪝㪩㪜㪨㪉㪝㪩㪜㪨㪊㪝㪩㪜㪨㪉㪇㪈
㪉㪇㪟㫑㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪆㪣㪦㪘㪛㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪆㪣㪦㪘㪛㪉㪤㪟㫑

㪻㪸㫋㪸㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪆㪣㪦㪘㪛㪻㪸㫋㪸㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪆㪣㪦㪘㪛
㪻㪸㫋㪸㪻㪸㫋㪸
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪈
To specify frequency points and carry out open correction:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the SPOT No. field.
Step 4. Enter the measurement point number using the softkeys or entry keys. If you
have used the entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit
labels (x1).

CORRECTION page
You can specify up to 201 measurement points.
Softkey Description
INCR ++ Increments the measurement point number in steps of 10.

INCR + Increments the measurement point number in steps of 1.
DECR - Decrements the measurement point number in steps of 1.
DECR -- Decrements the measurement point number in steps of 10.
Step 5. Using the cursor keys, select the FREQ field.

Step 6. Enter the frequency using the entry keys. When you have entered the
frequency, the softkey labels change to unit labels (Hz, kHz, MHz).
Step 7. Press the ON softkey.
Step 8. Connect the UNKNOWN terminal and the text fixture with no DUT connected.
Step 9. Press the MEAS OPEN softkey.
• During the measurement, an “OPEN measurement in progress” message is
• When the measurement has finished, the “OPEN measurement in progress”
message disappears.

CORRECTION page
you want to abort open correction
The E4980A/AL do not have a functionality to check whether the OPEN

correction data is valid or not. Any OPEN correction data can be set, even
if work-related mistakes are made in measuring for the OPEN correction.
For example,
- improper OPEN is used.
- the OPEN is connected incompletely.
If OPEN correction data is invalid, it may cause inappropriate
connection of appropriate OPEN state. OPEN A and OPEN B are measured
values when the OPEN correction is performed. You can check the
measured values.
If "E43 Measurement failed" error is displayed during the OPEN correction,
measure the OPEN state (disable OPEN correction[OPEN OFF]) at
frequency you select and check if the following conditions happen. If one
of them happens, try its suggestion.
off ALC)
reduce test signal)
Step 10. Repeat Step 3 to Step 9 until you have specified all of your desired
measurement points.
Step 11. Move the cursor into the OPEN field.
Step 12. Press the ON key to enable the open correction feature.

CORRECTION page
To specify frequency points and carry out short correction:

have used the entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit
labels (x1).
Softkey Description


Step 6. Enter the frequency using the entry keys. When you enter the frequency, the
softkey labels change to unit labels (Hz, kHz, MHz).
Step 8. Connect the UNKNOWN terminal and the test fixture and short-circuit the
HIGH and LOW test terminals.
Step 9. Press the MEAS SHORT softkey.
• During the measurement, a “SHORT measurement in progress” message is
• When the measurement has finished, the “SHORT measurement in
progress” message disappears.

CORRECTION page
you want to abort short correction
The E4980A/AL do not have a functionality to check whether the SHORT

correction data is valid or not. Any SHORT correction data can be set, even
if work-related mistakes are made in measuring for the SHORT correction.
For example,
- improper SHORT is used.
- the SHORT is connected incompletely.
If SHORT correction data is invalid, it may cause inappropriate
connection of appropriate SHORT state. SHORT A and SHORT B are
measured values when the SHORT correction is performed. You can check
the measured values.
If "E43 Measurement failed" error is displayed during the SHORT
correction, measure the SHORT state (disable SHORT correction[SHORT
OFF]) at frequency you select and check if the following conditions
happen. If one of them happens, try its suggestion.
off ALC)
reduce test signal)
measurement points.
Step 11. Move the cursor into the SHORT field.
Step 12. Press the ON key to enable the short correction feature.

CORRECTION page
To specify frequency points and carry out load correction:

use the entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels
(x1).
Softkey Description


Step 6. Enter the frequency using the entry keys. When you enter the frequency, the
softkey labels change to unit labels (Hz, kHz, MHz).
Step 8. Move the cursor into the REF A field.
Step 9. Enter the known value of the standard’s primary parameter using the softkeys
or entry keys.
Step 10. Move the cursor into the REF B field.
Step 11. Enter the known value of the standard’s secondary parameter using the
softkeys or entry keys.
Step 12. Move the cursor into the FREQ field.
Step 13. Connect the standard to the UNKNOWN terminal.
Step 14. Press the MEAS LOAD softkey.
• During the measurement, a “LOAD measurement in progress” message is
• When the measurement has finished, the “LOAD measurement in progress”
message disappears.

CORRECTION page
you want to abort load correction
The E4980A/AL do not have a functionality to check whether the LOAD

correction data is valid or not. Any LOAD correction data can be set, even if
work-related mistakes are made in measuring for the LOAD correction.
For example,
- improper LOAD is used.
- setting up the OPEN/SHORT state and LOAD state inversely.
- the LOAD is connected incompletely.
If LOAD correction data is invalid, it may cause inappropriate
connection of appropriate LOAD state. LOAD A and LOAD B are measured
values when the LOAD correction is performed. You can check the
measured values.
If "E43 Measurement failed" error is displayed during the LOAD correction,
measure the LOAD state (disable LOAD correction[LOAD OFF]) at
frequency you select and check if the following conditions happen. If one
of them happens, try its suggestion.
off ALC)
reduce test signal)
measurement points.
Step 16. Move the cursor into the LOAD field.
Step 17. Press the ON key to enable the load correction feature.

CORRECTION page
Description of Softkeys
To enable/disable or otherwise control the behavior of correction based on
specified frequency points, use the following softkeys:
Softkey Description
ON Enables the current measurement point number.

OFF Disables the current measurement point number.
MEAS OPEN Starts open correction.
MEAS SHORT Starts short correction.
MEAS LOAD Starts load correction.
Relationships between Correction Based on All Frequency Points and Correction

Based on Specified Frequency Points
Figure 4-13 shows the CORRECTION page and how the open/short/load
correction features are related to each other.
Figure 4-13 How correction features are related to each other
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪊㪈
1. This area is used to:

• Carry out correction calculation using either the open/short correction
data generated by the interpolation method or the open/short/load
correction data at specified frequency points.
Which data is used depends on the test frequencies.
• Obtain the open/short correction data.
2. This area is used to:
• Obtain the open/short/load correction data at each frequency point
specified in the FREQ field.

CORRECTION page
• Enable or disable the open/short/load correction data at each frequency

point specified in the FREQ field.
The following tables show how correction data elements are related to each
other when the correction features are enabled in the OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD
fields. Correction data elements are selected based on the number of
measurement points.
• When test frequency point is equal to the frequency point specified in FREQ
field:
Correction Frequency point specified in FREQ field

ON OFF
OPEN: ON User-specified Interpolated
SHORT: ON User-specified Interpolated
LOAD: ON User-specified X
• When test frequency point is NOT equal to the frequency point specified in
FREQ field:
Correction Frequency point specified in FREQ field

ON OFF
OPEN: ON Interpolated Interpolated
SHORT: ON Interpolated Interpolated
LOAD: ON X X
User-specifie Correction data at your specified frequency point are used.

d
Interpolated Correction data generated by interpolation are used.
X Correction is not performed even when correction features are
enabled in OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD fields.
When you specify a frequency point whose frequency value is identical to

that of an existing frequency point and turn on the correction feature for
both points, the frequency point with the smaller measurement point
number (SPOT No. field) is selected as the correction data.

CORRECTION page
Reading/Writing Correction Data

The E4980A/AL allows you to read and write the correction data.
To write the correction data:

Step 1. Press the [Meas Setup] key.
Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the SPOT No. field and enter the measurement
point number.
Step 4. Using the cursor keys, select the FREQ field and enter the frequency.
Step 5. Using the cursor keys, select these fields: OPEN A, SHORT A, LOAD A, OPEN
B, SHORT B, and LOAD B.
Step 6. Enter the correction data using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the entry
keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (p, n, u, m,
x1).

CORRECTION page
Measurement Functions for the Standard
When you perform load correction, you have to use the reference value of the
standard (either known or pre-measured value). You can select only one of the
available measurement functions as the reference value. For more information
on the available measurement functions, see “Measurement Function” on
page 47.
The load correction feature compensates for error by using a transmission
coefficient derived from the relationship between the standard’s reference
value and the actual measurement. Your selected measurement function is
used solely for the calculation of the transmission function.
To set up the measurement function:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the FUNC field.
Step 4. Using the cursor keys, select the primary parameter.
Step 5. If there is a secondary parameter and you are presented with another list of
measurement parameters, select one of them by using the softkeys.
For more information on measurement parameters, see “Measurement

Function” on page 47.

CORRECTION page
Selecting Single/Multiple Correction Mode
When equipped with Option 301 (Scanner Interface), E4980A/AL can store up
to 128 sets of open/short/load correction data. In addition, it can store one set
of the standard’s reference value data at a specified frequency point. In
multiple correction mode, you can switch among up to 128 data sets to carry
out correction. Note that the correction features default to single correction
mode.
When you use multiple correction mode, you cannot perform open/short
correction by the interpolation method (open/short correction at particular
frequency points) but must perform correction at specified frequency
points.
User-specified frequency points can be configured separately between
single and multiple correction modes.
In multiple correction mode, the channel number for which correction data are
selected is displayed on the right-hand side of the CH indicator.
To set up single/multiple correction mode:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the MODE field.
Softkey Description
SINGLE Turns ON single correction mode.

MULTI Turns ON multiple correction mode.
For more information on measurement parameters, see “Measurement

Function” on page 47.
When Option 301 (Scanner Interface) is not installed and you attempt to
switch to multiple correction mode, a Scanner I/F not installed error
message appears in the system message area.

CORRECTION page
Selecting the Cable Length
The E4980A/AL has four reference planes (points): the UNKNOWN terminal (0
m), the tip of the 16048A/B test lead (1 m), the tip of the 16048D test lead (2
m), and the tip of the 16048E test lead (4 m). These points serve as the basis
for the measurement accuracy.
When you select a cable length of 0 m, you have to use the UNKNOWN
terminal to interconnect the outer contacts of lead wires Hcur, Hpot, Lpot, and
Lcur.
When you select a cable length of 1 m, you have to use the tip of the 16048A/B
1m test lead to interconnect the outer contacts of lead wires Hcur, Hpot, Lpot,
and Lcur.
When you select a cable length of 2 m, you have to use the tip of the 16048D
and Lcur.
When you select a cable length of 4 m, you have to use the tip of the 16048E
and Lcur.
The four-terminal pair structure is terminated at the tip of your selected cable
length. When you use the 16048A/B/D/E test lead, connect the supplied
terminal plate to the tip of the cable to terminate the four-terminal pair
structure.
To select the cable length:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the CABLE field.
Softkey Description
0m Sets the cable length to 0 m (none).

1m Sets the cable length to 1 m.

LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page

Pressing the [Meas Setup] key followed by the LIMIT TABLE softkey opens the
LIMIT TABLE SETUP page. The LIMIT TABLE SETUP page allows you to
configure the E4980A/AL’s built-in comparator.
The built-in comparator can sort DUTs into a maximum 10 levels (BIN1 through
BIN9 and OUT OF BINS) using up to nine sets of primary parameter limits
along with one set of secondary parameter limits. In addition, DUTs that fall
within the primary parameter limits but are out of the secondary parameter
limits can be sorted into an auxiliary bin.
The comparator counts DUTs up to 999999. When this number is reached, the
screen shows “-----” and the counting stops.
To take full advantage of the comparator, we recommend that you equip the
E4980A/AL with the handler interface option for use in conjunction with the
comparator. The limits for bin sorting can only be configured on the LIMIT
TABLE SETUP.
• Comparator limit mode (MODE field)
• Tolerance mode nominal value (NOM field)
• Auxiliary bin ON/OFF (AUX field)
• Comparator ON/OFF (COMP field)
• Beep feature (BEEP field)
• Low limit for each bin (LOW field)
• High limit for each bin (HIGH field)

Figure 4-14 LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪎㪈
Parameter Swap Feature
The parameter swap feature exchanges the primary and secondary parameters
in the FUNC field with each other. For example, when the measurement
function is Cp-D and you use the parameter swap feature, the measurement
function is changed to D-Cp (see Figure 4-15); after the swap, the comparator
uses up to nine sets of limits for parameter D and one set of limits for
parameter Cp.

Figure 4-15 Parameter Swap Feature
㪧㫉㫀㫄㪸㫉㫐㪪㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㪸㫉㫐㪧㫉㫀㫄㪸㫉㫐㪪㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㪸㫉㫐

㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪛㪛
㪨㪨
㪚㫇㪚㫇
㪞㪪㫎㪸㫇㩷㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㪞
㪩㫇㪩㫇
㪛㪛
㪨㪨
㪣㫊㪣㫊
㪩㫊㪩㫊
㪩㪻㪺㪩㪻㪺
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪉
To swap the primary and secondary parameters:

Step 2. Press the LIMIT TABLE softkey.
Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the FUNC field.
Step 4. Press the SWAP PARAM softkey to swap the primary and secondary
parameters.
You can revert to the previous setting of primary and secondary parameters
by pressing the SWAP PARAM softkey again.
Using the parameter swap feature does not change the primary and
secondary parameters for the measurement function (on the MEAS
DISPLAY and MEAS SETUP pages).

Comparator Limit Mode
You can specify the primary parameter limit values in one of the following two
ways (see Figure 4-16):
• Tolerance mode
In tolerance mode, the comparison limit values are based on the deviations
from the specified nominal value, which can be specified in the NOM field.
You configure the tolerance mode limit values as a deviation percentage (%)
or absolute parameter value.
• Sequential mode
In sequential mode, the comparison limit values are based on the absolute
value of the measurement. When you configure these limit values, you have
to first define the minimum value and then the maximum value.
Figure 4-16 Tolerance mode and sequential mode
㪪㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㫋㫀㪸㫃㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼㪫㫆㫃㪼㫉㪸㫅㪺㪼㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼
㪥㫆㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃
㪭㪸㫃㫌㪼
㪇㪣㪈㪟㪈㪟㪉㪟㪊㪇㪣㪊㪣㪉㪣㪈㪟㪈㪟㪉㪟㪊
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪈㪙㪠㪥㩷㪈
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪊㪙㪠㪥㩷㪊
㪣㫅㩷㪑㩷㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㫃㫀㫄㫀㫋㩷㫆㪽㩷㪙㪠㪥㫅
㪟㫅㩷㪑㩷㪟㫀㪾㪿㪼㫉㩷㫃㫀㫄㫀㫋㩷㫆㪽㩷㪙㪠㪥㫅
㪑㩷㪠㫅㪺㫃㫌㪻㪼㫊㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫀㫅㫋
㪑㩷㪜㫏㪺㫃㫌㪻㪼㫊㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫀㫅㫋
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪊
When you use tolerance mode, you have to assign the narrowest limit
value (range) to bin 1, the second narrowest range to bin2, and so on,
finally assigning the widest range to the last bin. Should the range
assigned to bin 1 be wider than those assigned to subsequent bins, all
DUTs would be sorted into bin 1.
In tolerance mode, the lower limit need not be smaller than the nominal
value, and the upper limit value need not be larger than the nominal value.
As you can see in Figure 4-17, as sorting occurs, there may be blanks or
overlaps.

Figure 4-17 Example of sorting in tolerance mode
㪥㫆㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㪭㪸㫃㫌㪼
㪇㪣㪈㪟㪈㪣㪉㪣㪊㪟㪉㪟㪊㪣㪌㪟㪌㪣㪍㪣㪋㪟㪍㪟㪋
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪈
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪊
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪋
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪌
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪍
㪦㪬㪫㩷㪦㪝㩷㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪋
When the limit table contains any value and you attempt to change the
comparator limit mode, you are prompted with a “Clear the table first”
warning message. If this is the case, clear the table and then change the
limit mode. For information on how to clear the table, see “To clear the
entire table:” on page 146.
To set up the comparator limit mode:

Step 4. Select your desired limit mode by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
ABS Switches the comparator into tolerance mode based on the absolute
parameter values.
% Switches the comparator into tolerance mode based on the
deviation percentages.
SEQ Switches the comparator into sequential mode.

Tolerance Mode Nominal Value
When you use tolerance mode as the limit mode for the primary parameter,
you have to configure the nominal value.
The nominal value can be configured even when the primary parameter limit
mode is sequential, but this does not affect sorting.
When you use a negative nominal value in deviation tolerance mode, be

sure to set the lower limit to a value higher than the upper limit because
the lower limit value becomes larger than the upper limit value when they
are converted into absolute values.
To configure the nominal value:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the NOM field.
Step 4. Enter the nominal value using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the entry
keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (n, u, m, x1,
k).
Softkey Description
INCR ++ Increments the nominal value in steps of your selected number 

(1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500).
INCR + Increments the nominal value in steps of 1.
DECR - Decrements the nominal value in steps of 1.
DECR -- Decrements the nominal value in steps of your selected number
(1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500).

Turning On/Off the Comparator
The E4980A/AL’s built-in comparator can sort DUTs into a maximum 10 levels
(bin 1 through bin 9 and OUT OF BINS) using up to nine sets of primary
parameter limits along with one set of secondary parameter limits.
In addition, DUTs that fall within the primary parameter limits but are out of the
secondary parameter limits can be sorted into an auxiliary bin.
To turn on or off the comparator:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the COMP field.
Step 4. Turn on or off the comparator by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
ON Turns ON the comparator.

OFF Turns OFF the comparator.

Turning On/Off the Auxiliary Bin
If the sorting result depends on the secondary parameter, you can specify the
secondary parameter limit values in the 2nd LOW/HIGH field. For sorting
based on the secondary parameter, there are two scenarios:
• Sorting with the secondary parameter limit values specified and the
auxiliary bin turned off:
Only those DUTs that fall within the secondary parameter values are sorted
based on the result of comparing the primary parameter values. On the
other hand, DUTs that do not fall within the secondary parameter limit
values are sorted as OUT OF BINS, regardless of whether they fall within the
primary parameter limit values.
Figure 4-18 Auxiliary bin turned off
㪪㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㪸㫉㫐
㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪦㪬㪫㩷㪦㪝
㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪟㫀㪾㪿㪼㫉
㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋
㪦㪬㪫㪙㪠㪥㪦㪬㪫
㪦㪝㪪㫆㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㪦㪝
㪙㪠㪥㪪㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉
㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋
㪦㪬㪫㩷㪦㪝
㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉㪟㫀㪾㪿㪼㫉㪧㫉㫀㫄㪸㫉㫐

㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪍
• Sorting with the secondary parameter limit values specified and the
auxiliary bin turned on:
DUTs that do not fall within the primary parameter limit values are sorted as
OUT OF BINS. In addition, DUTs that fall within the primary parameter limits
but are out of the secondary parameter limits are sorted into the auxiliary
(AUX) bin.

Figure 4-19 Auxiliary bin turned on
㪪㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㪸㫉㫐
㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪦㪬㪫㩷㪦㪝
㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪟㫀㪾㪿㪼㫉
㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋
㪦㪬㪫㪙㪠㪥㪦㪬㪫
㪦㪝㪪㫆㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㪦㪝
㪙㪠㪥㪪㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉
㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋
㪦㪬㪫㩷㪦㪝
㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉㪟㫀㪾㪿㪼㫉㪧㫉㫀㫄㪸㫉㫐

㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪌㪍
The upper limit and lower limit of the secondary parameter after preset are
set to 9.9E37 and -9.9E37, respectively.
To turn on or off the auxiliary bin:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the AUX field.
Step 4. Turn on or off the auxiliary (AUX) bin by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
ON Turns ON the auxiliary (AUX) bin.

OFF Turns OFF the auxiliary (AUX) bin.

Beep Feature
The beep feature of the E4980A/AL behaves differently depending on which
beep mode is in effect, as shown in Table 4-8. For more information on system
beep modes, see “Turning On/Off the Beep Feature” on page 159.
The beep feature is available in the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page and LIST
SWEEP DISPLAY page.
Table 4-8 Beep output conditions
System beep mode BEEP field of limit Description

table
OFF FAIL Beep is never output.

PASS
ON FAIL Beep is output when the comparator
sorting result is OUT OF BIN.
PASS Beep is output when the comparator
sorting result is one of BIN1 through
BIN9 or AUX BIN.
To set up the beep output conditions:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the BEEP field.
Step 4. Set the beep output conditions by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
FAIL Beep is output when the comparator sorting result is OUT OF BIN.
PASS Beep is output when the comparator sorting result is one of BIN1
through BIN9 or AUX BIN.

Lower and Upper Limits
The E4980A/AL’s built-in comparator can sort DUTs into a maximum 10 levels
(bin 1 through bin 9 and OUT OF BINS) using up to nine sets of primary
parameter limits along with one set of secondary parameter limits. Use the
LOW/HIGH field for each of bins 1 through 9 to define the primary parameter
lower and upper limits and the 2nd LOW/HIGH field to define the secondary
parameter lower and upper limits.
When the comparator limit is set to tolerance mode, you have to set the lower
limit to a value lower than the upper limit. If the lower limit is higher than the
upper limit, a “Warning, Improper high/low limits” warning message appears. If
you proceed without correcting the lower and upper limits, that bin’s result is
null and the comparator continues to the next bin to perform bin sorting.
When the comparator limit is set to sequential mode, the comparison limit
values are based on the absolute value of the measurement. When you
configure these limit values, you have to first define the minimum value and
then the maximum value. If this rule is not followed, a “Warning, Improper
high/low limits” warning message appears. If you proceed without correcting
the lower and upper limits, that bin’s result is null and the comparator
continues to the next bin to perform bin sorting.
In sequential mode, you can omit the lower or upper limit or both for bin 1, as
shown in the following examples:
• Bin 1: lower limit (L1) only
Bin 2: upper limit (H2)
㪣㪈㪟㪉㪟㪊
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪈
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪊
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪌㪐
• Bin 1: upper limit (H1) only


㪟㪈㪟㪉㪟㪊
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪈
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪊
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪍㪇
• Bin 2: upper limit (H2)

㪟㪉㪟㪊
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㪊
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪍㪈
To configure the limit values for tolerance mode:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the BIN 1 LOW field.
Step 4. Enter the limit value using the entry keys. When you have entered the value,
the softkey labels change to unit labels (n, u, m, x1, k). 1
If you want to clear your selected limit value, press the CLEAR softkey; also,
you can clear all of the limit values for your selected bin by pressing the
CLEAR LINE softkey.
You can enter the lower and upper limit values using the HIGHx(-1) or
LOWx(-1) softkey.
Step 5. Repeat Step 4 using the cursor keys until you have entered the limit values
for bin 9.
1. If the primary parameter of the measurement function is C, the softkey labels show these units: p, n, u, m, x1.

Step 6. Move the cursor into the 2nd LOW field and enter the lower limit value for the
secondary parameter.
Step 7. Move the cursor into the 2nd HIGH field and enter the upper limit value for
the secondary parameter.
To configure the limit values for sequential mode:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the BIN 1 LOW field.
Step 4. Enter the limit value using the entry keys. When you enter the value, the
softkey labels change to unit labels (p, n, u, m, x1).
If you want to clear your selected limit value, press the CLEAR softkey; also,
you can clear all the limit values for your selected bin by pressing the CLEAR
LINE softkey.
The LOW field accepts an entry for bin1 only and does not accept an entry
for bins 2 through 9. The value entered into the HIGH field for bin 1 is used
as the lower limit for bin 2, but the LOW field for bin 2 displays no value.
You can enter the lower or upper limit values using the HIGHx(-1) or
LOWx(-1) softkey.
Step 5. Repeat Step 4 using the cursor keys until you have entered the upper limit for
bin 9 (BIN 9 HIGH).
Step 6. Move the cursor into the 2nd LOW field and enter the Lower limit value for
Step 7. Move the cursor into the 2nd HIGH field and enter the upper limit value for
To clear the entire table:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the BIN field.
Step 4. Press the CLEAR TABLE softkey.

LIST SWEEP SETUP Page

Pressing the [Meas Setup] key followed by the LIST SETUP softkey opens the
LIST SWEEP SETUP page. The list sweep feature of the E4980A/AL can
perform automatic sweep measurement by sweeping the frequency, signal
level, DC bias, or DC source through a maximum 201 sweep points. The LIST
SWEEP SETUP page allows you to configure each of the following list sweep
measurement controls with the cursor placed in the corresponding field
(denoted in parentheses).
• Sweep mode (MODE field)
• Sweep parameter selection (FREQ[Hz], VOLT[V], CURR[A], BIAS[V], BIAS[A],
or DC SRC[V] field)
• Sweep point configuration (sweep parameter field)
• Limit parameter selection (LMT field)
• Lower and upper limits (LOW and HIGH fields)
Figure 4-20 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪎㪉

Sweep Mode
The list sweep feature of the E4980A/AL can perform automatic sweep
measurement by sweeping the frequency, signal level, or DC bias through a
maximum 201 sweep points. The list sweep feature supports two sweep
modes: sequential (SEQ) and step (STEP). In sequential mode, once the
E4980A/AL has been triggered, it performs sweep measurement throughout all
the defined sweep points. In step mode, the E4980A/AL steps to the next
sweep point each time it is triggered.
Figure 4-21 Sequential and step modes
To set up the list sweep measurement mode:

Step 2. Press the LIST SETUP softkey.
Step 4. Select your desired list sweep measurement mode by pressing the
Softkey Description
SEQ Set the list sweep measurement mode to sequential mode.

STEP Set the list sweep measurement mode to step mode.

List Sweep Parameters
The sweep parameter used in list sweep measurement can be measurement
frequency, signal level, DC bias, or DC source. Use the sweep point field to
specify the list sweep measurement parameter.
To specify the list sweep measurement parameter:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the sweep parameter field.
Step 4. Select your desired list sweep measurement parameter by pressing the
Softkey Description
FREQ [Hz] Uses frequency as the list sweep parameter.

LEVEL [V] Uses voltage as the list sweep parameter.
LEVEL [A] Uses current as the list sweep parameter.
BIAS [V] Uses DC bias voltage as the list sweep parameter.
BIAS [A] Uses DC bias current as the list sweep parameter.
DC SRC [V] Uses DC source as the list sweep parameter.
When the sweep parameter is set using the SCPI commands, the
secondary sweep parameter can be set. In addition, the measurement
range can be set for the secondary parameter. For details, refer to
“:LIST:STIMulus:TYPE” on page 362.

Sweep Points and Limit Modes
The list sweep measurement feature supports up to 201 sweep points as well
as measurement limit values. Figure 4-22 shows the fields you can use to
configure the sweep points, limit parameters, and upper and lower limit values.
Figure 4-22 Sweep point fields
㪈㪉㪊㪋
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪊㪊
1 sweep points
2 limit parameters
3 lower limit values
4 upper limit values
If you configure only the lower limit value for a sweep point, DUTs that are
below the lower limit value for the selected primary or secondary
parameter are evaluated as LOW. If you configure only the upper limit
value for a sweep point, DUTs that are above the upper limit value for the
selected primary or secondary parameter are evaluated as HIGH.
If you specify the limit parameter for a sweep point but omit both lower
and upper limit values, DUTs always pass the sweep point evaluated as IN.

Under the following conditions (unless the measurement data status is 0),
DUTs are always evaluated as LOW.
• An overload is detected.
• A signal is detected exceeding the allowable limit of the signal source.
• The automatic level control (ALC) feature does not work.
The upper limit value must be larger than the lower limit value. If this rule
is not followed, a “Warning, Improper high/low limits” warning message
appears, and the DUTs are evaluated as follows:
• If the result is below the lower limit, they are evaluated as LOW.
• If the result is equal to or above the lower limit, they are evaluated as
HIGH.
To configure the sweep points:

Step 4. Using the cursor keys, select one of the sweep point fields (1 through 201).
Also, you can use the following softkeys as needed:
Softkey Description
CLEAR LINE Clears the limit value.

FILL LINEAR See “Sweep Parameter Auto-completion” on page 153.
FILL LOG See “Sweep Parameter Auto-completion” on page 153.
NEXT PAGE Proceeds to the next page.
PREV PAGE Returns to the previous page.
Step 5. Enter the sweep point value using the entry keys. When you enter the value,
the softkey labels change to unit labels (u, m, x1, k, M).
Step 6. Using the cursor keys, select the LMT field.
Step 7. Configure the limit parameter by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
A Uses the measurement function’s primary parameter as the limit

parameter.

Softkey Description
B Uses the measurement function’s secondary parameter as the limit

parameter.
- Turns OFF the sweep point limit feature.
Step 8. Using the cursor keys, select the LOW field.

Step 9. Enter the lower limit value.
Step 10. Using the cursor keys, select the HIGH field.
Step 11. Enter the upper limit value.
Step 12. Repeat Step 4 to Step 11.
To clear the entire table:

Step 3. Using the cursor keys, select the No. field.
Step 4. Press the CLEAR TABLE softkey.
Settings of upper and lower limit value vary depending on the option
The lower limit value/upper limit value of the sweep parameters you can set
vary as follows depending on the option installed in the E4980A. The options
are Power/DC Bias Enhance (option 001) and Bias Current Interface (option
002).
Option 001 Installed Installed Not installed Not installed
Option 002 Installed Not installed Installed Not installed
FREQ[Hz] 20 - 2M 20 - 2M 20 - 2M 20 - 2M
LEVEL[V] 0 - 20 0 - 20 0-2 0-2
LEVEL[A] 0 - 100 m 0 - 100 m 0 - 20 m 0 - 20 m
BIAS[V] -40 - 40 -40 - 40 0-2 0-2
BIAS[A] -100 m - 40 -100 m - 100m 0 - 40 ---1
DC SRC[V] -10 - 10 -10 - 10 ---1 ---1
IMP RNG2 0.1 - 100 k 0.1 - 100 k 1 - 100 k 1 - 100 k
1. An error message “DC bias opt not installed” appears.

2. GPIB command is available.

Sweep Parameter Auto-completion
When you want to enter multiple sweep parameters, you can use the
auto-completion feature to specify two points and have the sweep points
between them automatically entered.
Figure 4-23 Sweep parameter auto-completion
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪊㪋
To quickly configure multiple sweep points:

Step 4. Specify the start point by selecting the corresponding sweep point field (n)
with the cursor keys.
Step 5. Specify the end point by selecting the corresponding sweep point field (m)
with the cursor keys.

Step 6. Have all sweep points between the start and end points automatically
entered by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
FILL LINEAR Linearly enters all sweep points between the start and end points.
FILL LOG Logarithmically enters all sweep points between the start and end
points. 1
1. Available only when using the frequency as the list sweep parameter.
If n is not found, calculation is made on the assumption that n=1

represents the minimum value.
If m is not found, calculation is made on the assumption that m=201
represents the maximum value.

User’s Guide
5 System Configurations
This chapter provides information on the various settings accessible through

the SYSTEM MENU page of the E4980A/AL.
SYSTEM INFO Page

Press the [System] key to open the SYSTEM INFO page. This page displays the
system information of the E4980A/AL, and it allows you to configure each of
the following measurement controls with the cursor placed in the
corresponding field (denoted in parentheses).
• Handler interface (HANDLER I/F field)
• Scanner interface (SCANNER I/F field)
Figure 5-1 shows the fields available on this page along with their
corresponding softkeys.
Figure 5-1 SYSTEM INFO Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪋
155
5- System Configurations
SYSTEM INFO Page
Handler Interface
When equipped with Option 201 Handler Interface, the E4980A/AL can
interact with the handler. The 36-contact Amphenol connector on the rear
panel is used to connect the interface, through which control input/output
signals and comparator bin sorting result signals are communicated.
For more information on available options, see Appendix E , “Handler
Interface,” on page 465.
When the E4980A/AL is not equipped with the Handler Interface, the
HANDLER I/F field shows a “NOT INSTALLED” message and the ON/OFF
settings are not available.
Softkey Description
ON Turns ON the handler interface feature.

OFF Turns OFF the handler interface feature.

System Configurations
SYSTEM INFO Page
Scanner Interface
When equipped with Option 301 Scanner Interface, the E4980A/AL supports
multi-channel correction. The 14-contact Amphenol connector on the rear
panel is used to connect the interface, through which control output signals
and multi-channel correction channel selector signals are communicated.
For more information on available options, see Appendix F , “Scanner
Interface,” on page 493.
When the E4980A/AL is not equipped with the Scanner Interface, the
SCANNER I/F field shows a “NOT INSTALLED” message and the ON/OFF
settings are not available.
Softkey Description
ON Turns ON the scanner interface feature.

OFF Turns OFF the scanner interface feature.
Monitor Information
The SYSTEM INFO page displays the following monitor information. None of
this information can be edited on the SYSTEM INFO page.
Monitor Description
Information
MODEL No. Displays the model number, i.e. E4980A/AL.

SER No. Displays the serial number of the instrument.
FW VER Displays the version of the firmware installed in the instrument.
FW DATE Displays the date of the instrument’s most recent update.
OPTION Displays the option number of any option installed in the instrument.
MAC ADDR Displays the MAC address.
USB ID Displays the USB address.

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
SYSTEM CONFIG Page

Pressing the [System] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey opens the
SYSTEM CONFIG page. The SYSTEM CONFIG page displays the GPIB interface
and LAN status, and it allows you to configure each of the following controls
with the cursor placed in the corresponding field (denoted in parentheses).
• Beep feature ON/OFF (BEEPER ENABLED field)
• Beep tone configuration (BEEPER TONE field)
• System date configuration (DATE/TIME field)
• GPIB address configuration (GPIB ADDR field)
• IP address obtaining method configuration (IP CONFIG field)
• Manual IP address configuration (MANUAL IP ADDR field)
• Subnet mask configuration (MANUAL SUBNET MASK field)
• Gateway configuration (MANUAL GATEWAY field)
In addition, this page displays the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
settings obtained by setting the IP address to AUTO.
Figure 5-2 SYSTEM CONFIG Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪊㪇㪇㪊

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
Turning On/Off the Beep Feature
The E4980A/AL has a beep feature that generates beeps when one or more of
the following conditions occur:
• An error message or warning message has appeared.
• The instrument has completed open/short correction.
• The instrument has completed open/short/load correction at user-specified
frequency points.
• The DUT has failed the limit test or has been sorted as OUT OF BIN/AUX
BIN by the comparator. 1
• The DUT has passed the limit test or has been sorted into one of bins 1
through 9 by the comparator. 1
• You have turned on/off the key lock.
Regardless of whether the beep feature is on or off, beeps are generated
whenever:
• E4980A/AL starts up.
• You change the beep tone through the front panel.
The beep feature does not support volume control.
To set up the beep feature:

Step 1. Press [System].
Step 2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey.
Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the BEEPER ENABLED field.
Step 4. Turn on or off the beep feature by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
ON Turns ON the beep feature.

OFF Turns OFF the beep feature.
1. You can use the BEEP field on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page or the COMP:BEEP
command to turn on/off the beep feature for the comparator.

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
Changing the Beep Tone
The E4980A/AL allows you to change the beep tone to one of five levels.
To change the beep tone:

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the BEEPER TONE field.
Step 4. Change the beep tone by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
TONE 1 Selects tone 1.


SYSTEM CONFIG Page
Changing the Beep Tone
The E4980A/AL allows you to change the beep tone to one of five levels.
To change the beep tone:

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the BEEPER TONE field.
Step 4. Change the beep tone by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description

Configuring the System Date
The E4980A/AL features a built-in clock.
To configure the system date:

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the DATE/TIME field.
Softkey Description
DATE Selects the date field so that you can change the year, month, and
day.
TIME Selects the time field so that you can change the hour, minute, and
second digits.

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
Step 5. If you have selected the date field, use the following keys to edit the year,
month, and day. If you have selected the time field, proceed to Step 7.
Softkey Description
YEAR Allows you to change the year digits.

MONTH Allows you to change the month digits.
DAY Allows you to change the day digits.
Step 6. Enter the year/month/day using the softkeys or entry keys. If you use the
entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels (x1).
Softkey Description
YEAR INCR + Increments the year in steps of 1.

YEAR DECR - Decrements the year in steps of 1.
MONTH INCR + Increments the month in steps of 1.
MONTH DECR - Decrements the month in steps of 1.
DAY INCR + Increments the day in steps of 1.
DAY INCR - Decrements the day in steps of 1.
When you enter the year through the entry keys, use a four-digit value.
Step 7. If you have selected the time field, use the following keys to edit the hour,
minute, and second digits.
Softkey Description
HOUR Allows you to change the hour digits.

MINUTE Allows you to change the minute digits.
SECOND Allows you to change the second digits.
Step 8. Enter the hour/minute/second digits using the softkeys or entry keys. If you
use the entry keys to enter the value, the softkey labels change to unit labels
(x1).
Softkey Description
HOUR INCR + Increments the hours in steps of 1.

HOUR DECR - Decrements the hours in steps of 1.

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
Softkey Description
MINUTE INCR + Increments the minutes in steps of 1.

MINUTE DECR - Decrements the minutes in steps of 1.
SECOND INCR + Increments the seconds in steps of 1.
SECOND DECR - Decrements the seconds in steps of 1.
When you enter the hour with the entry keys, use a value within the range
of 0 (midnight) through 23 (11:00 pm).
Configuring the GPIB Address
Before you can control the E4980A/AL by issuing GPIB commands from an
external controller connected via its GPIB connector, you have to configure the
GPIB address of your E4980A/AL. For information on the concept and
implementation of automatic configuration by use of GPIB, see “GPIB remote
control system” on page 226.
To configure the GPIB address:

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the GPIB ADDR field.
Step 4. Enter a value with the entry keys in the range of 0 through 30.

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
Configuring the LAN IP address
To enable the E4980A/AL to communicate over a local area network (LAN), you
have to configure its IP address and connect a LAN cable. The IP address can
be either automatically obtained or manually configured. For automatic
configuration, two methods are available: DHCP and AUTO-IP.
When the IP address is set to AUTO, DHCP address is set at first. If DHCP fails
to obtain the address, however, AUTO-IP address is set. When the IP address is
set to MANUAL, the address manually configured is set.
For information on the concept and implementation of automatic configuration
by use of a LAN, see “LAN remote control system” on page 228.
Softkey Function
AUTO Automatically obtains the IP address.

MANUAL Manually configures the IP address.
Table 5-1 IP address configuration methods
Method Description
DHCP You can automatically obtain an available IP address via a DHCP server.
AUTO-IP You can automatically obtain an available IP address within the range
of 169.254.xxx.xxx.
MANUAL You can manually configure the IP address as well as subnet mask and
gateway settings. 1
1. Consult your network administrator for relevant settings of your network.
Once you have automatically obtained an IP address, you can check the
following monitor areas in the SYSTEM CONFIG page to see the address,
subnet mask, and gateway:
• CURRENT IP ADDR
• CURRENT SUBNET MASK
• CURRENT GATEWAY

SYSTEM CONFIG Page
To automatically obtain the IP address:

Step 3. When you want to obtain the IP address automatically, select the IP CONFIG
field using the cursor keys and then press the AUTO softkey.
To manually configure the IP address:

Step 3. Use the cursor keys to select the IP CONFIG field and then press the MANUAL
softkey.
Step 4. Use the cursor keys to select the MANUAL IP ADDR field.
Step 5. Enter the IP address using the entry keys.
Example: 192.168.10.1
Step 6. Press the ENTER softkey.
Step 7. Use the cursor keys to select the MANUAL SUBNET MASK field.
Step 8. Enter the subnet mask using the entry keys.
Step 10. Use the cursor keys to select the MANUAL GATEWAY field.
Step 11. Enter the gateway using the entry keys.
Checking the LAN connection status

You can check the CURRECT LAN STATUS monitor area to see the LAN
connection status of the E4980A/AL. The status is expressed as one of the
following:
Table 5-2 LAN connection status
Status Description
NORMAL LAN connection is OK.

FAULT Disconnected from the LAN or LAN connection has failed.
--- LAN connection is being initialized.

SELF TEST Page
SELF TEST Page

Pressing the [System] key followed by the SELF TEST softkey opens the SELF
TEST page. The SELF TEST page, intended for maintenance and repair, allows
you to check the behavior of the E4980A/AL. You can choose one of available
test items with the cursor placed in the corresponding field (denoted in
parentheses).
• Choosing a Test Item (TEST No. field)
Figure 5-3 SELF TEST Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪍

SELF TEST Page
Choosing a Test Item
The E4980A/AL can run the following self tests:
Table 5-3
Test item Description
SYSTEM Checks the entire system, A1/A2/A3 boards, system

calibration data, and so on.
USER DATA Checks the GPIB/LAN configurations, instrument
configuration information, instrument calibration data, and
scanner calibration data.
BATTERY Checks the internal batteries.
KEY Checks the font panel keys. (Visual confirmation only; no
pass/fail result shown on screen.)
DISPLAY Checks the font panel LEDs and LCD. (Visual confirmation
only; no pass/fail result shown on screen.)
HANDLER Checks the handler interface. (Visual confirmation only; no
INTERFACE pass/fail result shown on screen.)
SCANNER Checks the scanner interface. (Visual confirmation only; no
INTERFACE pass/fail result shown on screen.)
To run a self test:

For step-by-step instructions, see “Daily Checks (Executing the self-test)” on
page 421.

SERVICE Page
SERVICE Page
Pressing the [System] key followed by the SERVICE softkey opens the SERVICE
page.
This page is read-only.
This page displays the system information of the E4980A/AL and allows you to
save the displayed information into USB memory, but it does NOT allow you to
modify or delete the information.
The system information of the E4980A/AL may be used for support and
repair by Keysight Technologies but will never be used for any other
purpose.
Figure 5-4 SELF TEST Page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪎

SERVICE Page
Monitor Information
The SERVICE page displays the following monitor information, which cannot
be edited on the SERVICE page.
Monitor Description
Information
POWER ON Displays how many times the E4980A/AL has been started up as well
as its cumulative power-on time.
SYSCAL REV Displays the program revision of the adjustment for the E4980A/AL.
SYSCAL Displays the date of the last adjustment for the E4980A/AL.
DATE
Saving the System Information into External Memory

The system information of the E4980A/AL can be saved into external memory.
The system information may be useful for support and repair by Keysight
Technologies. For details on the system information, refer to the Service Guide.
For file locations on USB memory, see “Folder/File Structure on USB Memory”
on page 172.
The system information of the E4980A/AL may be used for support and
repair by Keysight Technologies but will never be used for any other
purpose.
To save the system information into external memory:

Step 1. Insert a USB memory stick into the front USB port.
Step 3. Press the SERVICE softkey.
Step 4. Press the MORE softkey.
Step 5. Press the SAVE SYS INFO softkey.
Step 6. While the data is being saved, a “PROCESSING...” message is shown on the
display. When the data has been saved into the USB memory, a “Storing data
completed.” message appears in the system message area.

SERVICE Page

User’s Guide
6 Save/Recall
This chapter provides information on the save/recall functionality of the

E4980A/AL.
Overview of Save/Recall Functionality

Configurations and measurement results can be saved into, and recalled from,
the E4980A/AL’s internal memory or external USB memory through the
save/recall functionality.
Save Methods and Their Uses

Table 6-1 shows available save methods and their uses:
Table 6-1 Save Methods and Their Uses
Save method Recallable Use
Type File format

(extension)
Configuration Save ----------- Yes To save E4980A/AL’s

(internal memory) configuration states into the
internal memory.
Configuration Save (.sta) Yes To save E4980A/AL’s
(USB memory) configuration states into USB
memory.
Data Save (USB CSV format No To save measurement results
memory) (.csv) into USB memory.
Screen Save (USB GIF format No To save E4980A/AL’s
memory) (.gif) screenshot into USB memory.
171
6- Save/Recall
For information on configuration states that can be saved, see Appendix

C , “List of Default Values,” on page 449.
Folder/File Structure on USB Memory

When you save information into USB memory, a predetermined structure
scheme is used to organize folders and files on the memory, as shown in Figure
6-1.
Folder Max. number of Description

files
data 999 Contains measurement results as .csv files.

image 999 Contains screenshots as .gif files.
state 10 Contains instrument configuration states.
system1 1 This single file, whose name is always

“system,” contains the system information.
1. This folder can be operated from the SYSTEM page.
These folders are automatically created in the memory.

Save/Recall
Figure 6-1 Folder/File Structure on USB Memory
\㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸
\㪻㪸㫋㪸
㪜㪋㪐㪏㫏㪇㪇㪈㪅㪺㫊㫍
㪜㪋㪐㪏㫏㪇㪇㪉㪅㪺㫊㫍
㪜㪋㪐㪏㫏㪐㪐㪐㪅㪺㫊㫍
\㫀㫄㪸㪾㪼
㪜㪋㪐㪏㫏㪇㪇㪈㪅㪾㫀㪽
㪜㪋㪐㪏㫏㪇㪇㪉㪅㪾㫀㪽
㪜㪋㪐㪏㫏㪐㪐㪐㪅㪾㫀㪽
\㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪈㪇㪅㫊㫋㪸
㪈㪈㪅㫊㫋㪸
㪈㪐㪅㫊㫋㪸
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪋㪏
USB Memory Notes

Attention should be given to the following points when using a USB memory
device with the E4980A/AL
• Use a USB memory whose interface is USB 1.1.
• Use a USB memory that is USB mass storage class compliant and
formatted with FAT16 or FAT32.
• Use the USB memory solely for the E4980A/AL. Otherwise, other data
previously saved in the USB memory could be erased.
• If you cannot save into or recall from the USB memory, use another USB
memory device.
• Keysight Technologies shall not be responsible for nor assume any liability
for data loss in your USB memory device after using it with the E4980A/AL.

6- Save/Recall
Saving/Recalling Instrument Configuration States
Overview of Instrument Configurations

Pressing the [Save/Recall] opens the CATALOG page. You can save/recall
instrument configuration states in either of two ways:
• Save into the internal memory
• Save into USB memory
You can save up to 10 registers into the internal memory and into a single USB
memory device. Also, register numbers have extensions as shown in Table 6-2:
Table 6-2 Extensions for register numbers
Classification Register number Extension

(No. field)
Internal 0 Recalled when the [Recall A] key is pressed.

memory
1 Recalled when the [Recall B] key is pressed.
2 through 9 -
USB memory 10 Auto recall
11 through 19 -
• Medium mode (MEDIA field)
• Register number (No. field)

Save/Recall
Figure 6-2 CATALOG page
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪇
Medium Mode
You have to specify the medium type of the destination or source before saving
or recalling instrument configurations.
To select the medium mode:

Step 1. Press [Save/Recall].
Step 2. Use the cursor keys to select the MEDIA field.
Step 3. Select the medium mode by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
INT Uses the internal memory as the destination or source. Once you
have selected this mode, the register numbers (in the No. field)
change to 0 through 9.
EXT Uses USB memory as the destination or source. Once you have
selected this mode, the register numbers (in the No. field) change to
10 through 19.

6- Save/Recall
Choosing a Register Number
You have to choose one of the register numbers (in the No. field) before saving
or recalling instrument configurations.
Available choices include 0 through 9 when the medium mode is INT (internal
memory), or 10 through 19 when the medium mode is EXT (USB memory).
To choose a register number and save/recall the configurations:

Step 2. Use the cursor keys to select the No. field of your desired register number.
Step 3. Select your desired action by pressing the appropriate softkey:
Softkey Description
RECALL Recalls the configurations previously saved in the register that

corresponds to your specified register number.
SAVE Saves the configurations into the register that corresponds to your
specified register number.
DELETE Deletes the configurations previously saved in the register that
corresponds to your specified register number.
Memory Status Information
Each register number is associated with one of the following memory status
values:
Status value Description
-1 The register contains non-E4980A/AL configuration information. 1

0 The register contains no configurations.
1 The register does contain configurations.
2 The register contains any configuration that was saved under a
different firmware version or from another E4980A/AL with a
different option(s) equipped. 2
1. This value is not applicable when the medium mode is INT (internal memory).
2. An “Incompatible state file” warning message is displayed. Status information
may fail to be correctly recalled.

Save/Recall
Comment Information
You can view comments entered into the comment line (USER COMMENT field)
on the Measurement Conditions screen. For information on how to enter a
comment, see “Comment line” on page 90.
Saving/Recalling Instrument Configuration States into/from the Internal Memory

Figure 6-3 CATALOG page (when saving instrument configurations into the internal
memory)
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪇
To save configuration states into the internal memory:

Step 3. Press the INT softkey.
Step 4. Use the cursor keys to select the No. field (0 through 9) for your desired
register.

6- Save/Recall
Step 5. Press the SAVE softkey to save configuration states into the internal memory.
• If you have selected the No. field for a register that already contains
configuration states, new configuration states overwrite the existing
ones.
To recall configuration states from the internal memory:

Step 3. Press the INT softkey.
register.
Step 5. Press the RECALL softkey to recall configurations from the internal memory.
DC bias and DC source settings are automatically turned OFF.

If you attempt to recall configuration states under any of the following
conditions, an “Incompatible state file” warning message is displayed.
• The configuration states were saved under a different firmware version.
• The configuration states were saved from another E4980A/AL with a
different option(s) equipped.
If you attempt to recall configuration states under the following condition,
a “No data to load” error message is displayed.
• The checksum has failed.
Using a Hard Key to Recall States from the Internal Memory

You can also recall configuration states from a particular register in the internal
memory by pressing one of the following hard keys:
Hard key Description
Recall A Recalls configuration states from register 0 (#0 in the No. field).
Recall B Recalls configuration states from register 1 (#1 in the No. field).

Save/Recall
Saving/Recalling Instrument Configuration States into/from USB Memory

Figure 6-4 CATALOG page (when saving instrument configurations into USB memory)
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪈
When you save configuration states into USB memory, they are saved as
predefined files in predefined locations. You cannot manually define the file
names or locations.
Each state file is assigned a file name in the format of “register number.sta”.
To save configuration states into USB memory:

Step 3. Press the EXT softkey.
register.

6- Save/Recall
Step 5. Press the SAVE softkey to save configuration states into the USB memory.
If you have selected the No. field for a register that already contains
configuration states, the new configuration states overwrite the existing
ones.
To recall configuration states from USB memory:

Step 3. Press the EXT softkey.
register.
Step 5. Press the RECALL softkey to recall configurations from the USB memory.
State files are automatically assigned file names 10.sta through 19.sta, and
you cannot change the file names.
If you attempt to recall configuration states under any of the following

conditions, an “Incompatible state file” warning message is displayed.
• The configuration states were saved under a different firmware version.
• The configuration states were saved from another E4980A/AL with a
different option(s) equipped.
DC bias and DC source settings are automatically turned OFF.
If you attempt to recall configuration states under the following condition, a

“No data to load” error message is displayed.
• The checksum has changed.

Save/Recall
Using the Auto Recall Feature
You can have the E4980A/AL, at start-up time, automatically recall the
configuration states previously saved in register number 10 on USB memory.
To use this feature, you have to plug the appropriate USB memory into the
E4980A/AL before starting up.
To use the auto recall feature:

Step 1. Plug the appropriate USB memory into the E4980A/AL.
Step 2. Turn on the power to the E4980A/AL.
Step 3. Upon start-up, the instrument configures itself using the instrument
configuration information previously saved in register number 10 on the USB
memory device.

6- Save/Recall
Saving Measurement Results into USB Memory

You can save measurement results obtained by the E4980A/AL into USB
memory as .CSV files. You can later load your saved files into an application
program running on a PC.
You can save up to 201 sets of measurement results at a time, including
measurement results from a list sweep.
Before saving measurement results into USB memory, you need to complete
some tasks preparatory to initiating measurement so that the data buffer
memory contains the necessary data. For more information, see “To save
measurement results into USB memory:” on page 185.
You cannot obtain measurement results that come after your specified
value from the data buffer memory. However, you can set up the data
buffer memory using the “:MEMory:DIM” on page 364 command.
You cannot load measurement results from USB memory into the
E4980A/AL.
Measurement Result Format

Measurement results are output in the format shown in Table 6-3.
The Data A and Data B fields of a measurement result file differ depending on
whether the “effective digits” setting is on or off (controlled by the
:FORM:ASC:LONG command).
Table 6-3 Measurement Result Format
Measure Comparator Result Format

ment
Screen
one point OFF <Data A>,<Data B>,<Status>

one point ON <Data A>,<Data B>,<Status>,<BIN No.>
list ON/OFF <Data A>,<Data B>,<Status>,<IN/OUT>
Data A
Outputs the measurement data for the primary parameter.
The Data A field uses the following two different fixed-length ASCII formats:
When the “effective digits” SN.NNNNNESNN

setting is off: (S:+/-, N:0 to 9, E: exponent character)
(:FORM:ASC:LONG OFF)

Save/Recall
When the “effective digits” SN.NNNNNNNNNESNN

setting is on: (S:+/-, N:0 to 9, E: exponent character)
(:FORM:ASC:LONG ON)
Data B
Outputs the measurement data for the secondary parameter.
The Data B field uses the following two different fixed-length ASCII formats:
When the “effective digits” SN.NNNNNESNN

setting is off: (S:+/-, N:0 to 9, E: exponent character)
:FORM:ASC:LONG OFF
When the “effective digits” SN.NNNNNNNNNESNN
setting is on: (S:+/-, N:0 to 9, E: exponent character)
:FORM:ASC:LONG ON
Status
Represents the measurement result status by using one of the following status
values:
0 Measurement successfully completed.

+1 Overload.
+3 A signal is detected exceeding the allowable limit of the signal source.
+4 The automatic level control (ALC) feature does not work.
The Status field uses the following two-character fixed-length ASCII format:
SN (S:+/-, N:0 to 4)
If the value is 1, the measurement data is 9.9E37; if the value is 0, 3, or 4,

the actual measurement data is output.
The data buffer memory contains a measurement result with no data (as
represented by the status value of -1), but it is excluded when the data is
saved into USB memory.
Bin No. (IN/OUT)

Represents the bin sorting results as well as IN/OUT evaluation results in list
sweep measurement, as shown below:
0 OUT_OF_BINS
+1 to +9 BIN 1 through BIN 9

6- Save/Recall
+10 AUX_BIN
-1 LOW
0 IN
+1 HIGH
The <BIN No.> data output format is either 2- or 3-character fixed-length

ASCII format:
SN or SNN (S:+/-, N:0 to 9)
Example of measurement result output
Example 6-1 Example of saved measurement result data

+1.059517689E-24,+1.954963777E+00,+0,+0
+9.706803904E-25,+2.095857894E-01,+0,+0
+2.172725184E-24,+2.072965495E-01,+0,+0
+3.660460872E-25,+7.172688291E+00,+0,+0
+1.135428381E-24,+6.490636201E-01,+0,+0
+1.384790632E-24,+2.193020669E+00,+0,+0
+3.829879310E-26,+2.788435221E+01,+0,+0

Save/Recall
To save measurement results into USB memory:

For how to save the measurement result, refer to “How to save the
measurement result of List Sweep Measurement to USB memory.” on
page 186.
Step 1. Plug a USB memory stick into the front USB port.
Step 3. Press the SAVE DATA softkey.
Step 4. Press the START LOG softkey and then press the following softkeys to enter
the measurement results into the data buffer memory.
Softkey Description
START LOG Starts logging the measurement results into the data buffer memory.
SAVE & Copies the data from the data buffer memory into the USB memory.
STOP Then stops saving the measurement results into the data buffer
memory and clears the data buffer memory.
Step 5. Start measurement. The data buffer memory is filled with up to 201 sets of
measurement results.
Step 6. Press the SAVE & STOP softkey to save results into the USB memory.
Step 7. When the data has been saved into the USB memory, a “Storing data
completed. : E498xXXX.csv” message appears in the system message area.

6- Save/Recall
Figure 6-5 Saving measurement results into USB memory
㪲㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫㩷㪣㪦㪞㪴
㪣㫆㪾㪾㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋
㪛㪸㫋㪸㩷㪙㫌㪽㪽㪼㫉
㪚㫃㪼㪸㫉
㪤㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐
㪲㪪㪘㪭㪜㩷㩽㩷㪪㪫㪦㪧㪴
㪛㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪤㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪌㪇
Measurement result files are automatically assigned file names

E498x001.csv through E498x999.csv, and you cannot change the file
names.
If the total size of the measurement result data exceeds the capacity of the
data buffer memory, a “Data Buffer Overflow” error message is displayed.
If this happens, press the SAVE & STOP softkey.
How to save the measurement result of List Sweep Measurement to USB

memory.
Step 1. Set the List Sweep. For the setting, refer to the “LIST SWEEP SETUP Page” on
page 147.
Step 3. Using the cursor key, select the TRIG field.
Step 4. Set the trigger mode to (MAN).
Step 5. Set the USB memory to the Front USB Port.
Step 7. Press soft key SAVE DATA.
Step 8. Press soft key START LOG, then set the mode to accumulate the
measurement result to the data buffer memory.
Step 9. Press [Display Format].
Step 10. Press soft key LIST SWEEP.

Save/Recall
Step 11. Press [Trigger], then measure once.

Step 13. Press soft key SAVE DATA.
Step 14. Press soft key SAVE & STOP, then save to USB memory.
Step 15. When you complete the saving at USB memory, the message “Storing data
completed. : E498xXXX.csv” appears at system message area.
For example, when measurement point of List Sweep is 100, 100
measurement results are saved to USB memory.
Measurement result files are automatically assigned file names

E498x001.csv through E498x999.csv, and you cannot change the file
names.

6- Save/Recall
Saving a Screenshot into USB Memory
Saving a Screenshot into USB Memory

You can save a screenshot of the E4980A/AL’s display into USB memory as a
.GIF file. You can later load your saved file into an application program running
on a PC.
To save a screenshot into USB memory

Step 1. Display the screen you want to save.
Step 2. Plug a USB memory device into the front USB port.
Step 4. Press the SAVE DISPLAY softkey.
Step 5. When the data has been saved into the USB memory device, a “Storing image
completed. : E498xXXX.gif” message appears in the system message area.
Screenshot files are automatically assigned file names E498x001.gif

through E498x999.gif, and you cannot change the file names.

User’s Guide
7 Measurement Procedure and Examples
This chapter covers basic measurement procedures as well as basic L, C, and R

measurement theory. It also offers various measurement hints. After the
descriptions of basic measurement procedures, practical measurement
examples are shown using the E4980A/AL.
Basic Measurement Procedure

The following flow chart shows the basic procedures used to measure the
impedance of capacitors, inductors, resistors, and other components. Follow
the procedures to perform impedance measurements while referring to the
items noted to the right side of each step.
For basic measurements, refer to the Impedance Measurement Handbook.

For the fixtures that can be used, refer to the Accessories Selection Guide
For Impedance Measurements.
These documents can be downloaded from this URL:
http://www.keysight.com/find/lcrmeters/
189
7- Measurement Procedure and Examples
Basic Measurement Procedure
Figure 7-1 Basic Measurement Procedure
㪪㫋㪸㫉㫋
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪋㪐㪏㪇㪘䊶㵘㪠㪤㪧㪜㪛㪘㪥㪚㪜㩷㪧㪘㪩㪘㪤㪜㪫㪜㪩㪪
㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪺㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㫊㪅䊶㵘㪧㪘㪩㪘㪣㪣㪜㪣㪆㪪㪜㪩㪠㪜㪪㩷㪚㪠㪩㪚㪬㪠㪫
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜
䊶㵘㪪㪠㪞㪥㪘㪣㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣
㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪼㫊㫋㩷㪽㫀㫏㫋㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆䊶㵘㪝㪦㪬㪩㪄㪫㪜㪩㪤㪠㪥㪘㪣㩷㪧㪘㪠㪩
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪋㪐㪏㪇㪘㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㪚㪦㪥㪝㪠㪞㪬㪩㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
䊶㵘㪤㪜㪘㪪㪬㪩㪜㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪘㪚㪫㪪
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷䊶㵘㪚㪦㪩㪩㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪅
㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㩷㪛㪬㪫㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪼㫊㫋䊶㵘㪧㪘㪩㪘㪪㪠㪫㪠㪚㪪㩷㪠㪥㪚㪠㪛㪜㪥㪫㩷㪫㪦㩷㪛㪬㪫
㪽㫀㫏㫋㫌㫉㪼㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㪚㪦㪥㪥㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪧㪼㫉㪽㫆㫉㫄㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪅䊶㵘㪚㪟㪘㪩㪘㪚㪫㪜㪩㪠㪪㪫㪠㪚㪪㩷㪜㪯㪘㪤㪧㪣㪜㪪
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪎㪊

Measurement Procedure and Examples
Impedance Parameters
All circuit components, resistors, capacitors, and inductors have parasitic
components lurking in the shadows waiting for the unwary. These include, for
example, unwanted resistance in capacitors, unwanted capacitance in
inductors, and unwanted inductance in resistors. Thus, simple components
should be modeled as complex impedances.
Figure 7-2(A) shows the impedance definitions, and Figure 7-2 (B) shows the
vector representation of impedance. Impedance, Z is the total opposition that a
circuit or device offers to the flow of alternating current at a given frequency. Z
contains a real and an imaginary part, and it is expressed in rectangular form
as Resistance and Reactance, or in polar form as absolute value of Impedance
and Phase as follows.
Z = R + jX = Z 
2 2
Z = R +X
 = atan  ------
X
 R
R = Rs
Where,
Z Impedance []
R Resistance []
X Reactance []
|Z| Absolute Value of Impedance []
 Phase of Impedance [deg or rad]
Rs Series Resistance []

Figure 7-2 Definition of Impedance
㪠
㪠㫄㪸㪾㫀㫅㪸㫉㫐
㪧㪸㫉㫋㪱
㪱
㫁㪯
㪭
㪭
㪱㩷㪔
㪠
㱔
㪩
㪩㪼㪸㫃㩷㪧㪸㫉㫋
㩿㪘㪀㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㪃㩷㪚㫌㫉㫉㪼㫅㫋㩿㪙㪀㩷㪭㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉㩷㪩㪼㫇㫉㪼㫊㪼㫅㫋㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪠㫄㫇㪼㪻㪸㫅㪺㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫆㪽㩷㪠㫄㫇㪼㪻㪸㫅㪺㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪎㪋
The following parameters can be used to represent the reactance.
X = 2fL
where
f Test frequency [Hz]

L Inductance [H]
In addition to these parameters, the Quality Factor (Q) and Dissipation Factor
(D) are used to describe the quality of components.
1- = -----
X-
Q = ---
D R
where
Q Quality Factor
D Dissipation Factor
In some case, for the inverse of impedance (Admittance), Y is used. Figure 7-3
shows the vector representation of admittance. As with Z (Impedance), Y
contains a real and an imaginary part, and it is expressed in rectangular form
as Conductance and Susceptance, or in polar form as magnitude of
Admittance and Phase. The following are expressions for Admittance.
Y = --1-
Z

2 2 1-
Y =  G + B  = -----
Z
 = atan  ------ = – 
B
G
B = 2fC
1- = -----
B-
Q = ---
D G
1-
G = ------
Rp
Y Admittance [S]
G Conductance [S]
B Susceptance [S]
|Y| Magnitude of Admittance [S]
 Phase of Admittance [deg or rad]
C Capacitance [F]
Rp Parallel Resistance []
The |Y|- measurement function of the E4980A/AL can obtain the |Y| and 
parameters given in the above equations.
Figure 7-3 Vector Representation of Admittance
㪩㪼㪸㫃㩷㪧㪸㫉㫋
㪞
㱢
㫁㪙
㪰
㪠㫄㪸㪾㫀㫅㪸㫉㫐
㪧㪸㫉㫋
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪎㪌

Parallel/Series Circuit Mode

To measure L, C, or R, there are two equivalent circuit modes: the parallel and
series modes as shown in Table 7-1. The E4980A/AL can select the mode by
setting the FUNC (Cp, Cs, Lp, or Ls) on the MEAS SETUP page. To determine
which mode is better, consider the relative impedance magnitude of the
reactance and Rs and Rp.
Table 7-1 Parallel/Series Circuit Mode
Circuit Mode Measurement Function Definition of D, Q, and

G
Cp mode Cp-D
Cp-Q 1 - = --- 1-
D = ----------------------
Cp Cp-G 2fCpRp Q
Cp-Rp
Rp 1-
G = ------
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪎㪍 Rp
Cs mode Cs-D
Cs-Q 1-
D = 2fCsRs = ---
Cs-Rs Q
Cs Rs
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪎㪎
Lp mode Lp-D
Lp-Q
Rp 1
Lp Lp-G
Q = --------------- = ----
2fLp D
Lp-Rp
Rp
1-
G = ------
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪎㪏 Rp
Ls mode Ls-D
Ls-Q Q = 2fLs 1-
--------------- = ---
Rs D
Ls-Rs
Ls Rs
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪎㪐

Selecting Circuit Mode of Capacitance

The following description gives some practical guidelines for selecting the
capacitance measurement circuit mode.
Small Capacitance (modeled by (a) in Figure 7-4)
Small capacitance yields large reactance, which implies that the effect of the parallel
resistance (Rp) has relatively more significance than that of series resistance (Rs). The
low value of resistance represented by Rs has negligible significance compared with
the capacitive reactance, so the parallel circuit mode (Cp-D or Cp-G) should be used.
Large Capacitance (modeled by (b) in Figure 7-4)

When the converse is true and the measurement involves a large value of capacitance
(low impedance), Rs has relatively more significance than Rp, so the series circuit
mode (Cs-D or Cs-Q) should be used.
Figure 7-4 Capacitance circuit mode selection
Rp Rp
㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋㪣㪼㫊㫊㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋
Rs Rs
㪣㪼㫊㫊㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋
㩿㪸㪀㩷㩷㩷㪪㫄㪸㫃㫃㩷㪚㩷㩿㩷㪿㫀㪾㪿㩷㪱㩷㪀㩿㪹㪀㩷㩷㩷㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪚㩷㩿㩷㫃㫆㫎㩷㪱㩷㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪇
The following rule of thumb can be used for selecting the circuit mode
according to the impedance of the capacitor.
Above approx. 10 k Use parallel circuit mode

Below approx. 10  Use series circuit mode
Between above values Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation
For example, to measure a 20 F capacitor at 1 kHz (impedance will be

approx.8 ), the Cs-D or Cs-Q function is suitable.

Selecting Circuit Mode of Inductance

The following description gives some practical guidelines for selecting the
inductance measurement circuit mode.
Large Inductance (modeled by (a) in Figure 7-5)

The reactance at a given frequency is relatively large (compared with that of a small
inductance), so the parallel resistance becomes more significant than the series
resistance. Therefore, a measurement in the parallel equivalent circuit mode (Lp-D,
Lp-Q, or Lp-G) is more suitable.
Small Inductance (modeled by (b) in Figure 7-5)

Conversely, for low values of inductance the reactance becomes relatively small
(compared with that of a large inductance), so the series resistance component is more
significant. Therefore, the series equivalent circuit mode (Ls-D or Ls-Q) is more
suitable.
Figure 7-5 Inductance circuit mode selection
Rp Rp
㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋㪣㪼㫊㫊㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋
Rs Rs
㪣㪼㫊㫊㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋㪤㫆㫉㪼㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㫀㪽㫀㪺㪸㫅㫋
㩿㪸㪀㩷㩷㩷㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪣㩷㩿㩷㪿㫀㪾㪿㩷㪱㩷㪀㩿㪹㪀㩷㩷㩷㪪㫄㪸㫃㫃㩷㪣㩷㩿㩷㫃㫆㫎㩷㪱㩷㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪈
The following rule of thumb can be used for selecting the circuit mode
according to the impedance of the inductor.
Below approx. 10  Use series circuit mode

Above approx. 10 k Use parallel circuit mode
Between above values Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation
For example, to measure a 1 mH inductor at 1 kHz (impedance will be approx.

6.3 ), the Ls-D or Ls-Q function is suitable.

Test Signal Level
Test Signal Level

Most components have impedance characteristics that are dependent on the
applied test signal level. Consequently, the test signal level should be set
appropriately for each DUT.
Test Signal Level Across the DUT

Figure 7-6 shows a simplified model of the E4980A/AL and a DUT. The test
signal level across the DUT depends on the test signal level, the source
resistance of the E4980A/AL, and the impedance of the DUT as follows.
Zx
Vm = -------------------------  Vosc
Rso + Zx
Vosc -
Im = ------------------------
Rso + Zx
Where,
|Vosc| Signal voltage level of E4980A/AL

Rso Source resistance of E4980A/AL (= 100 )
|Vm| Signal voltage level applied on DUT
|Im| Signal current level flowed in DUT
|Zx| Impedance of DUT
Figure 7-6 Simplified model of test signal level and DUT
Im
㪈㪇㪇㱅 Zx
Rso
Vm
Vosc
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪏㪉

Test Signal Level
Test Signal Level Setting

The E4980A/AL’s test signal level (Vosc in Figure 7-6) can be set to the
appropriate value in the voltage or current mode. Using the ALC (automatic
level control) function, the test signal level setting is the same as the applied
level across the DUT (Vm or Im in Figure 7-6). Accordingly, the test signal level
setting mode can be selected in the following four ways.
• Test signal level set as voltage and ALC set to OFF:
The open terminal voltage is set to the entered voltage value in the LEVEL
field.
• Test signal level set as current and ALC set to OFF:
The short terminal current is set to the entered current value in the LEVEL
field.
• Test signal level set as voltage and ALC set to ON:
The test signal level across the DUT is set to the entered voltage value in
the LEVEL field.
• Test signal level set as current and ALC is set to ON:
The test signal level across the DUT is set to the entered current value in the
LEVEL field.
For more information on the ALC function, refer to “Automatic level control” on
page 93.
By using the level monitor function (VAC and IAC on the MEAS DISPLAY
page), the actual test signal level across the DUT (Vm and Im in Figure 7-6)
can be monitored.
Test Signal Level Setting Selection Example for Inductance

Measurements
An inductor’s inductance value may differ widely depending on the current
through the inductor due to the permeability of its core material. Making
inductance measurements under constant test signal current levels allows you
to extract the frequency characteristics of the inductor in isolation from its test
signal level characteristics.
To make constant current level measurements, set an appropriate test signal
level in the current value and set ALC to ON. The signal current level through
the inductor will be constant.

Four-Terminal Pair Configuration

Generally, any mutual inductance, interference of the test signals, or unwanted
residual factors in the connection method incidental to ordinary termination
methods will have a significant effect on measurement, especially at high
frequency. The E4980A/AL employs a four-terminal pair measurement
configuration that permits easy, stable, and accurate measurement while
avoiding the negative influences inherent in the above factors. The 4TP
configuration can improve the impedance measurement range to below 1 m
Figure 7-7 shows the four-terminal pair measurement principle. The set of
UNKNOWN terminals consists of four coaxial connectors.
• HCUR: High current
• HPOT: High potential
• LPOT: Low potential
• LCUR: Low current
Figure 7-7 Four-terminal pair measurement principle
㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠 Ix 㼂㼕㼞㼠㼡㼍㼘㻌㻳㼞㼛㼡㼚㼐
㻾㼑㼟㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞 H CUR 㻩㻜㼂 L CUR
㻰㼁㼀㻭
㻝㻜㻜䃈
Vx
㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 Ix
H POT L POT
＊1
㼂
Vx
㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌㻳㼞㼛㼡㼚㼐
㻭㼡㼠㼛㻌㻮㼍㼘㼍㼚㼏㼑㻌㻮㼞㼕㼐㼓㼑
㼑㻠㻥㻤㻜㼍㼡㼑㻝㻜㻤㻟
Figure 7-7 *1 The shielding conductor of Lcur is shunted to the system ground
in the E4980A/AL
The four-terminal pair (4TP) configuration solves the effects of mutual coupling
between the leads by employing either or both of the following techniques. The
E4980A/AL employs the method 2. At frequencies higher than 10kHz, the
effects of 1. is also benefited on the E4980A/AL by the balun effects of the
coaxial test leads
1. The outer shield conductors work as the return path for the test signal
current (they are not grounded). The magnetic fields produced by the inner
and outer currents cancel each other because of the opposite directions

and same amount current flow. Hence there is little inductive magnetic
field, test leads do not contribute additional errors due to self or mutual
inductance between the individual leads.
2. The vector voltmeter measures the differential voltage between the inner
and outer conductors. The differential measurement method can minimize
the influence of the mutual inductance.

Measurement Contacts
This section gives general advice and techniques for using the four-terminal
pair configuration efficiently. To take accurate measurements using this
technique, the following steps are required to prepare measurement contacts
(the number labels in the following description correspond to the numbers in
Figure 7-8).
1. The signal path between the E4980A/AL and the DUT should be as short as
possible.
2. To construct the four-terminal pair measurement circuit configuration, the
outer shields of the HCUR and HPOT, LCUR and LPOT terminals must be,
respectively, connected together at the nearest point possible to the point
at which the DUT will be connected.
3. Keep connections between the point at which the shielding ends and DUT
as short as possible.
Figure 7-8 Measurement contacts
㪣㪚㪬㪩㪣㪧㪦㪫㪟㪧㪦㪫㪟㪚㪬㪩
㪽㫆㫌㫉㪄㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㩷㫇㪸㫀㫉
㪺㫆㫅㪽㫀㪾㫌㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀㩿㪉㪀㩿㪉㪀

㩿㪊㪀
㪛㪬㪫
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪋
The following sections offer some techniques for using the four-terminal pair
configuration effectively and efficiently.
Capacitance to Ground
In measuring capacitors of 10 pF or less, the stray capacitance (when the
conductors are grounded, this is capacitance to ground) between the
measurement contacts and the conductors near the capacitor influences the
measurement as shown in Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Model of Capacitance to Ground
Low High
Cl cannot Ch can
be ignored Cx be ignored
Cl Ch
Grounded Conductor
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪌
To minimize the stray capacitance of the test leads, the center conductor of
the test leads should be kept as short as possible, as shown in Figure 7-10 (A).
If four-terminal pair connections are close to the point where contact is made
with the DUT, interconnect the shields of the measurement terminals to the
conductor to reduce the influence of the stray capacitance to ground, as
shown in Figure 7-10 (B).
Figure 7-10 Reducing capacitance to ground
LCUR LPOT HPOT HCUR
as short as
possible
Cx
C Cl Ch
Grounded Conductor Grounded Conductor
(A) Reducing capacitance to ground (B) Reducing the influence of

the capacitance to ground
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪍

Contact Resistance
Contact resistance between the contacting terminals and the DUT causes
measurement error when measuring large values of capacitance, especially in
D (dissipation factor) measurements.
When measuring large capacitance values, the four-terminal measurement
contacts have the advantage of less measurement error as compared to the
two-terminal method. Select a test fixture which can hold the DUT tightly to
stabilize the connection.
Figure 7-11 Contact resistance
LCUR LPOT HPOT HCUR LCUR LPOT HPOT HCUR
DUT DUT
(A) Two-Terminal Method (A) Four-Terminal Method
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪎

Extending Test Leads

When extending the four-terminal pair test leads to the contacts of the DUT,
prepare the contacts as shown in Figure 7-12. If the measurement contact
cannot be made using the four-terminal pair configuration, use one of the
connection methods shown in Figure 7-13 to make the measurement contact.
Figure 7-12 Extending the four-terminal pair test leads
LCUR LPOT HPOT HCUR
Test Leads
Junction
Connectors
Insulator
Extension Cable
DUT
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪏

Figure 7-13 Measurement contacts for test leads extension
Shielded Two-Terminal Connection

Connector Plate
HCUR
HPOT
LPOT
Unshielded leads
must be as short
LCUR as possible.
BNC Terminal
Connector Plate
Five-Terminal Connection
HCUR
HPOT
LPOT
LCUR
BNC Terminal
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪈㪋

Guarding for Measurement of Low Capacitance Values

Use a guard plate to minimize measurement errors caused by stray
capacitance when measuring low capacitance values, such as low-capacitance
chip capacitors. Figure 7-14 shows an example of measurement contacts
using a guard plate in the four-terminal pair measurement configuration.
Figure 7-14 Example DUT Guard Plate Connection
GROUND LCUR LPOT HPOT HCUR
4TP Test Leads Shield Conductor

of the Test Leads
Connect here
Guard Plate
(Should not be Grounded)
DUT
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪈㪌

Shielding
Shielding minimizes the effects of electrical noise picked up by the test leads.
Therefore, connect a shield plate to the outer shield conductors of the
four-terminal pair test leads as shown in Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15 Guard shield
LCUR LPOT HPOT HCUR
DUT
Guard Plate
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪈㪍

Correction Functions
The E4980A/AL features powerful correction functions: Cable Length
correction as well as OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD corrections. These correction
functions are used to correct additional error due to the test fixture and the test
leads. Table 7-2 lists the correction functions with a brief description, and
Table 7-3 shows examples of using correction functions.
Table 7-2 Correction functions
Correction Function Description Typical Usage
Cable Length Compensate phase shift error • Measurements using

Correction due to the 1, 2, or 4 m test the Keysight
leads. 16048A/B/C/D/E or
Keysight 16334A
OPEN Correction Compensate stray admittance • High-impedance
due to the test fixture. measurements
SHORT Correction Compensate residual • Low-impedance
impedance due to the test measurements
fixture.
OPEN/SHORT Compensate the stray • Precise measurements
Correction admittance and residual
impedance due to the test
fixture.
OPEN/SHORT/LOAD Compensate any error due to • Measurements to be
Correction the test fixture and test leads referenced to a
by using the standard. standard
• Measurements using a
test fixture that has
complicated
impedance
characteristics

Table 7-3 Examples of correction functions
• Simple measurements using a  • Measurements using Keysight test leads

Keysight-supplied direct-connecting test and a test fixture
fixture
㪚㪘㪙㪣㪜㩷㪣㪜㪥㪞㪫㪟
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿㪈㫄㪀㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫
䌻
䌻
㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫
䌻
㪣㪚㪩
㪣㪚㪩㪤㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪤㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪈㪍㪇㪋㪏㪘㩷㩿㪈㫄㪀
㪈㪍㪇㪋㪎㪜㩷㪼㫋㪺
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪐㪇
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪏㪐
• Precise measurements to be referenced • Measurements using a test fixture that has

to a working standard complicated impedance characteristics
㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪆㪣㪦㪘㪛㪦㪧㪜㪥㪆㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪆㪣㪦㪘㪛
䌻
䌻
㪪㪺㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉
㪣㪚㪩㪣㪚㪩
㪤㪼㫋㪼㫉㪤㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㪽㫆㫉
㪣㪦㪘㪛㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻
㪽㫆㫉㩷㪣㪦㪘㪛
㪈㪍㪇㪋㪎㪜㩷㪼㫋㪺㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪐㪈㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪐㪉

Performing OPEN Correction

To perform an OPEN correction data measurement, set up an OPEN condition
where nothing is connected to the test fixture. While the OPEN measurement is
being performed, don’t touch the test fixture or move your hands near it.
In the OPEN condition, Hp and Hc, and Lp and Lc are connected. For the
OPEN condition of the fixture, refer to the fixture’s manual.
Performing SHORT Correction

To perform a SHORT correction data measurement, set up a SHORT condition
by using a shorting bar to short between the high terminal and low terminal of
the UNKNOWN terminals.
Figure 7-16 shows a sample shorting bar for the Keysight 16047E test fixture.
The shorting bar should have very low residual impedance, so be sure to use a
high-conductivity metal plate that does not easily corrode for the shorting
plate. Furthermore, it must be clean.
Figure 7-16 Sample Shorting Plate
㪠㫅㫊㪼㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪸㩷㫊㪿㫆㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫇㫃㪸㫋㪼
㫀㫅㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪈㪍㪇㪋㪎㪜
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪐㪊
Performing LOAD Correction

To perform LOAD correction data measurement, connect the LOAD standard to
the measurement contacts.

Preparing the Standard

It is necessary to prepare a working standard, such as a standard resistor or
standard capacitor. Try to select a standard whose impedance is as close as
possible to the impedance of the DUT. Consider the following
recommendations for selecting standards.
• For capacitance measurements:
A standard capacitor whose capacitance is nearly equal to the capacitance
of the DUT is recommended.
• For resistance measurements:
A standard resistor whose resistance is nearly equal to the resistance of the
DUT is recommended.
• For inductance measurements:
A standard inductor whose inductance is nearly equal to the inductance of
the DUT is recommended.
Reference Values of the LOAD Standard

Enter specified reference values of the standard as the REF A and REF B values
by using the appropriate function on the CORRECTION page. For example,
when using a standard capacitor that has a specified parallel capacitance and
D values, enter the specified parallel capacitance value as the REF A value and
the specified D value as the REF B value with the Cp-D function.
If the REF A and REF B values are entered with the Cp-D function,
measurements with other functions (such as the |Z|-  function) can also
be performed.
Using the Pre-Measured Device for the LOAD

Even if you have no standard with the specified reference values, you can
perform a LOAD correction using a device such as a general purpose capacitor
or resistor. The pre-measured values of a device are used for the REF A and
REF B values. Follow the procedure shown below to use a device for the LOAD
standard.
Step 1. For the LOAD standard, prepare a device that has an impedance as close as
possible to the impedance of the DUT.
Step 2. If the device has BNC connectors structured in the four-terminal pair
configuration, measure the device directly by connecting it directly to the
E4980A/AL: Do not use a test fixture. If the device does not have
four-terminal pair measurement terminals, measure the device using a direct
coupling test fixture (such as the Keysight 16047A/C/D/E).
Step 3. On the CORRECTION page, enter the measured values obtained in step 2 as
the REF A and REF B values with the function used in step 2.

Parasitics Incident to DUT Connection
Parasitics Incident to DUT Connection

Bear in mind that some parasitics remain in the measurement path even after
performing corrections, as shown below.
Figure 7-17 shows parasitic impedance model after corrections are performed
using the Keysight 16047A/D/E test fixture. In this case, to minimize the
influence of parasitics on measurement values, insert the DUT completely into
the test fixture while keeping the leads of the DUT as short as possible.
Figure 7-17 Parasitic impedance model (using Keysight16047A/D/E)
㪛㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼
Lo Co Lo
Ro Co' Co' Ro
㪜㫃㪼㪺㫋㫉㫆㪻㪼㪜㫃㪼㪺㫋㫉㫆㪻㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪐㪋
Lo Residual inductance in DUT lead

Ro Lead resistance in DUT lead
Co Stray capacitance

Characteristics Example
Table 7-4 shows typical characteristics of various components. As can be seen
in the figure, a component may have different effective parameter values
depending on its operating conditions. The measured values most useful in
actual applications are obtained from precise measurement under the actual
operating conditions.
Table 7-4 Typical characteristics of components
DUT Characteristics Example Measurement Functions
Large C Cs-Rs, Cs-D,

Cs-Q,
㩿㪀
R-X, |Z|-
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪐㪌
Small C Cp-D, Cp-G,

G-B, |Y|-
㩿㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪐㪍
Large L Lp-Rp, Lp-D

Lp-Q,
㩿㪀
G-B, |Y|-
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪐㪎

Table 7-4 Typical characteristics of components
DUT Characteristics Example Measurement Functions
Small L Ls-Rs, Ls-D, Ls-Q, R-X, |Z|-
㩿㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪐㪏
Large R Cp-Rp, G-B, |Y|-
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪐㪐
Small R Ls-Rs, R-X, |Z|-
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪇㪇

Capacitor Measurements
This paragraph describes a practical example of measuring a ceramic
capacitor.
The basic procedure flow to perform this measurement is the same as the Basic
Measurement Procedure described previously. In this example, a ceramic
capacitor is measured under the following conditions.
Sample (DUT) Ceramic capacitor

Measurement • Function: Cp-D
Conditions • Test Frequency: 1 MHz
• Test Signal Level: 1.5 V
Step 1. Turn the E4980A/AL ON.

Step 2. Set up the E4980A/AL’s measurement conditions by filling in the fields on the
MEAS DISPLAY page.
1. Move to the FREQ field using the cursor keys and input 1 MHz.
2. Move to the LEVEL field using the cursor keys and input 1.5 V.
Step 3. Connect the test fixture to the E4980A/AL (refer to Figure 7-18). The Keysight
16047E Direct Couple Test Fixture (general purpose) is used for this
measurement.
Figure 7-18 Connecting the 16047E
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪈㪎
Step 4. To compensate for the Keysight 16047E’s residuals and strays, an

OPEN/SHORT correction is required.
1. Leave the Keysight 16047E in an OPEN condition as shown in Figure 7-18.

2. Press the [Meas Setup] key and the CORRECTION softkey.

3. Move to the OPEN field by using the cursor keys and press the MEAS OPEN
softkey.
Wait until the message “OPEN measurement in progress” disappears.
4. Press the ON softkey to enable an OPEN correction.
5. Connect a shorting bar to the Keysight 16047E to set up the SHORT
condition as shown in Figure 7-19.
Figure 7-19 Connecting a shorting bar
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪈㪏
6. Move to the SHORT field using the cursor keys and press the MEAS SHORT
softkey.
Wait until the message “SHORT measurement in progress” disappears.
7. Press the ON softkey to enable a SHORT correction.
Step 5. Connect DUT to the test fixture as shown in Figure 7-20

Figure 7-20 Connecting DUT
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪈㪐
Step 6. Press the [Meas Setup] key. Measurements are performed continuously by
the internal trigger, and the measured Cp and D values of the capacitors are
displayed as shown in Figure 7-21.
Figure 7-21 Measurement results of Capacitor
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪉㪇

Inductance Measurements
This section describes a practical example of measuring a magnetic-core
inductor.
The basic procedure flow to perform this measurement is the same as the Basic
Measurement Procedure described previously. A magnetic-core inductor is
measured under the following conditions.
Sample Magnetic-core inductor

(DUT)
Measurement • Function: Ls-Rdc
Conditions • Test frequency: 100 kHz
• Test Signal Level: 10 mA (constant)

Step 2. Set up the E4980A/AL measurement conditions by filling in the fields on the
MEAS DISPLAY page.
1. Move to the FUNC field using the cursor keys and select Ls-Rdc.
2. Move to the FREQ field using the cursor keys and input 100 kHz.
3. Move to the LEVEL field using the cursor keys and input 10 mA.
Step 3. Connect the test fixture to the E4980A/AL as shown in Figure 7-18. The
measurement.
Step 4. Perform the correction. To compensate for the Keysight 16047E’s residuals
and strays, an OPEN/SHORT correction is required.
1. Leave the 16047E in an OPEN condition as shown in Figure 7-18.
3. Move to the OPEN field using the cursor keys and press the MEAS OPEN
softkey.
softkey.

Step 5. Connect the DUT to the test fixture as shown in Figure 7-22.
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪉㪈
Step 6. Press the [Meas Setup] key to display the MEAS DISPLAY page.
1. Move to the ALC field using the cursor keys to press the ON softkey.
When it is set to ON, the test signal current level through the DUT is set to a
constant value (the value set in the LEVEL field).
Step 7. Press the [Meas Setup] key. Measurements are performed continuously by
the internal trigger, and the measured Ls and Rdc values of the magnetic core
inductor are displayed.

Figure 7-23 Measurement results for magnetic core inductor
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪉㪉

Measurements Using DC source

This section describes a practical measurement example of the E4980A/AL
using the DC source. The list sweep is used for this measurement. The basic
procedure flow to perform this measurement is the same as the Basic
Measurement Procedure described previously.
When option 001 is not installed, the DC source cannot be used.
The DC source has a 45mA current-supply capability. If you want to limit

the base current of the transistor, insert a resistor between the DC source
and the base.
Sample (DUT) Transistor

Measurement • Function: R-X
Conditions

Step 2. Set up the E4980A/AL measurement conditions by filling in the fields on the
MEAS DISPLAY page.
1. Move to the FUNC field using the cursor keys and select R-X.
Step 3. Press the [Meas Setup] key to set the following measurement conditions in
each field of the LIST SWEEP SETUP page.
1. Set the list sweep parameter to DC SRC[V].
2. Enter the level of the sweep point.
Step 4. Connect the test fixture to the E4980A/AL as shown in Figure 7-18. The
measurement.
Step 5. Perform the correction. To compensate the Keysight 16047E’s residuals and
strays, an OPEN/SHORT correction is required.
1. Leave the 16047E in an OPEN condition as shown in Figure 7-18.
3. Move to the OPEN field using the cursor keys and press the MEAS OPEN
softkey.

softkey.
Step 6. Connect the transistor base and DC source. The corrector and emitter are
connected to the DUT.
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪎㪉
Step 7. Press the [Meas Setup] key to set the following measurement conditions in
each field of the LIST SWEEP SETUP page
1. Set the list sweep parameter to DC SRC[V].
2. Enter the level of the sweep point.
Step 8. Press the [DC BIAS] key. DCSRC is displayed in the status display area and
the LED indicator of the DC source is ON (orange).

Figure 7-25 Measurement results when using DC source
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪎㪊


User’s Guide
8 Overview of Remote Control
This chapter provides an overview of the remote control system and the SCPI
commands.
Types of remote control system

Depending on the system controller and the interface, you can configure three
types of remote control system as shown in the table below.
System controller Interface Overview
GPIB System to control the E4980A/AL and other devices

connected via GPIB from the external controller. 
For more information, refer to “GPIB remote
control system” on page 226.
LAN System to control the E4980A/AL and other devices
External Controller connected via LAN from the external controller. 
(external computer For more information, refer to “LAN remote
such as PC) control system” on page 228.
USB System to control the E4980A/AL and other devices
connected via USB from the external controller. 
For more information, refer to “USB Remote
Control System” on page 240.
You must install Keysight I/O Libraries Suite in the external controller in
advance.
Use Keysight I/O Libraries Suite 14 or higher.
For further information on I/O Libraries Suite, see the Keysight I/O Libraries
Suite manual.
Keysight I/O Libraries Suite may not be available for certain external
controllers or OS versions. For further details, refer to the Help guidance
for Keysight I/O Libraries Suite.
225
8- Overview of Remote Control
GPIB remote control system
What is GPIB?
GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) is an interface standard for connecting
computers and peripherals that supports the following international standards:
IEEE 488.1, IEC-625, IEEE 488.2, and JIS-C1901. The GPIB interface allows
you to control the Keysight E4980A/AL from an external computer. The
computer sends commands and instructions to the E4980A/AL and receives
data sent from the E4980A/AL via the GPIB.
System configuration
Use GPIB cables to make connections between the E4980A/AL, the external
controller (computer), and peripherals. Figure 8-1 shows an overview of the
GPIB remote control system’s configuration.
Figure 8-1 Configuration of the GPIB remote control system
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪚㫆㪻㪼
㪞㪧㪠㪙㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㪚㫆㫄㫇㫌㫋㪼㫉
㪎㪉㪈
㪞㪧㪠㪙㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㪟㪜㪮㪣㪜㪫㪫
㪧㪘㪚㪢㪘㪩㪛
㪭㪼㪺㫋㫉㪸
㪋㪏㪍㪆㪍㪍㪯㪤
㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫
㻷㼑㼥㼟㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻱㻠㻥㻤㻜㻭㪎㪈㪎
E4980A 20 Hz - 2 MHz
7 8 9
DC DC
Source Bias USB
Trigger 4 5 6
㪞㪧㪠㪙
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
DC
DC Source
Return
(Option 001)
r10VDC Max
Save/ Local/
Recall Lock
㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㪠㫅㫊㫋㫉㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㫊
㪞㪧㪠㪙㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪎㪯㪯
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪇㪋

Overview of Remote Control
Required Equipment
1. E4980A/AL
2. External controller (computer)
Use a personal computer or workstation equipped with the GPIB interface.
You need to install software to control this instrument via the GPIB into the
external controller (for example, HTBasic or Keysight VEE).
3. Other devices (other instruments and/or peripherals that serve your
purpose)
4. GPIB cables for connecting the E4980A/AL, the external controller, and
other devices
Scale of the system you can construct

• You can connect up to 15 devices in a single GPIB system.
• The length of cables to make connections between devices must be 4 m or
less. The total length of connecting cables in a single GPIB system must be
2 m  the number of connected devices (including the controller) or less.
You cannot construct a system in which the total cable length exceeds 20
m.
• The number of connectors connected to an individual device must be four
or less. If you connect five or more connectors, excessive force will be
applied to the connector part, which may result in failure.
• You can choose the device connection topology from star, linear, and
combined. Loop connection is not supported.
Device selector
The device selector is a unique value assigned to each device that is used by
the controller to select the control target (to send/receive messages) among
devices connected on the GPIB remote control system.
The device selector consists of a select code (usually, 7) and a GPIB address.
For example, when the select code is 7 and the GPIB address is 17, the device
selector is 717. The select code must be individually set for each system. The
GPIB address must be set to a unique value for each device, and is used to
identify devices on the same system. In the description and sample programs
in this manual, it is assumed that the device selector is set to 717.

LAN remote control system
Setting the GPIB address of the E4980A/AL

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - GPIB ADDR

The LAN (Local Area Network) remote control system provides two methods:
controlling the E4980A/AL using the SICL-LAN server and controlling the
E4980A/AL using the telnet server.
Use a LAN cable to connect the E4980A/AL to the external controller
(computer). Figure 8-2 shows an overview of the LAN remote control system’s
configuration.
Figure 8-2 Configuration of the LAN remote control system
㪣㪘㪥
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫌㫋㪼㫉
㪠㪧㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊
㪟㪜㪮㪣㪜㪫㪫㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫
㪭㪼㪺㫋㫉㪸
㻷㼑㼥㼟㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻱㻠㻥㻤㻜㪘
E4980A 20 Hz - 2 MHz
7 8 9
DC DC
Source Bias USB
Trigger 4 5 6
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
DC
DC Source
Return
(Option 001)
r10VDC Max
Save/ Local/
Recall Lock
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪇㪌
Required Equipment
1. E4980A/AL
2. External controller (personal computer or workstation that can be
connected to a LAN and with Keysight I/O Libraries Suite installed)
3. Other devices (other instruments and/or peripherals that serve your
purpose)
4. LAN cable for connecting the E4980A/AL with the external controller

Preparing the E4980A/AL

Before controlling the E4980A/AL via a LAN, you need to configure the network
function. For detailed information on the procedure, refer to Chapter 5,
“System Configurations.”.

Control over SICL-LAN server

In a control system using the SICL-LAN server, communication between the
external controller (client) and the E4980A/AL (server) is performed using the
SICL-LAN protocol. Communication is performed using SICL (Standard
Instrument Control Library). You can control the E4980A/AL by programming
using various languages.
Preparing the external controller

To establish communication with the E4980A/AL using the TCP/IP protocol,
you need to set the I/O interface of the external controller in advance. This
section shows the setting procedure when using the external controller in the
Windows environment.
Step 1. From your PC’s Start menu, click Program - Keysight I/O Libraries Suite -
Keysight Connection Expert to open the Keysight Connection Expert setting
screen.
Step 2. In the Keysight Connection Expert setting screen, select LAN(TCPIP0) and
then select + Instrument on the menu.

Step 3. In the Add a LAN device screen, click Enter Address tab and setup the IP
address and click OK. You can change the settings as necessary. For details,
refer to the Keysight I/O Libraries Suite manual.
Step 4. In the Keysight Connection Expert screen, check that the E4980A/AL has
been added.

Control using C or Basic

You can control the E4980A/AL by programming using SICL/VISA with Visual
Studio in a windows environment.
For more information on the control method, see a sample program using the
VBA macro of Microsoft Excel described in “Section 9, Sample Program.”
Control using Keysight VEE

Keysight VEE allows you to control the E4980A/AL via the direct I/O interface.
The following example shows how to control the E4980A/AL whose IP address
is set to 192.168.1.101.
When using Keysight VEE for PCs, use Keysight VEE Pro 6 for Windows or
higher.
Step 1. On the Keysight VEE’s I/O menu, click Instrument Manager....

Step 2. In the Instrument Manager setting screen, click Add....
GCWL

Step 3. The Instrument Properties setting screen appears. Make the settings as
follows: Name: SICL_LAN (you can specify any name), Interface: TCPIP, Board
Number: 0, and TCPIP Address: TCPIP0::192.168.1.101::inst0::INSTR.
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪇㪎
Figure 8-3 shows an example of control using the direct I/O interface that has
been set in the above procedure.
Figure 8-3 Example of control using Keysight VEE
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪇㪏

Control over telnet server

In a control system that operates over the telnet server, communications are
performed through connection between the sockets provided by the processes
of the external controller and the E4980A/AL to establish a network path
between them.
A socket is an endpoint for network connection; port 5024 and port 5025 are
provided for the sockets for the E4980A/AL. Port 5024 is provided for
conversational control using telnet (user interface program for the TELNET
protocol) and port 5025 for control from a program.
Preparing the external controller

As in the case of the SICL-LAN server, you need to set the I/O interface of the
external controller in advance to establish communication to the E4980A/AL
using the TCP/IP protocol. For the procedure, refer to “Preparing the external
controller” on page 230 of the “Control over SICL-LAN server” section.
Conversational control using telnet (using port 5024)

You can use telnet to perform conversational control by sending SCPI
commands to the E4980A/AL on a message-by-message basis. For telnet, the
socket of port 5024 is used for communications.
For port 5024, service requests are asynchronous. Also, use Ctrl+C to clear
the device.
In this example, to show you the control procedure using telnet, in a Windows
environment you control the E4980A/AL (IP address: 192.168.1.101) from the
external controller.
Step 1. Open the MS-DOS command prompt screen.
Step 2. At the MS-DOS prompt, type “telnet 192.168.1.101 5024” and press Enter.
Step 3. The telnet screen opens.
Step 4. Type a command and press Enter; it is sent to the E4980A/AL and executed. If
you enter a command that queries some data, the query response is
displayed below the line in which you entered the command.
Figure 8-4 shows the screen displaying the measured value with :FETC? after
using the :FREQ command to set measurement frequency to 10 kHZ, the
:FUNC:RANG:AUTO command to set the auto range setting to on, the
:FUNC:IMP command to set a measurement item to Cp-D, and the *TRG
command to trigger the instrument. The setting check is made with the query
after each setting.

Figure 8-4 Example of control using telnet
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪋㪈
Step 5. Press ] while holding down Ctrl in the telnet screen to break the connection to
the E4980A/AL. The telnet prompt appears. Type “quit” at the telnet prompt
and press Enter to finish using telnet.
Control from a program (using port 5025)

When controlling the E4980A/AL from a program on the external controller,
use the socket of port 5025 for connection.

You can control the E4980A/AL by socket programming using Visual Studio in
a Windows environment.
For socket programming, the library for network connection on the TCP/IP
protocol is required. For a UNIX environment, BSD (Berkeley Software
Distribution) Sockets API is available; for a Windows environment, WinSock
(WinSock1.1 and WinSock2.0), created by porting BSD Sockets to Windows
and expanding it, is available.

Keysight VEE allows you to control the E4980A/AL through the connection to
the socket of port 5025 using the To/From Socket. Figure 8-5 shows an
example (when the IP address of the E4980A/AL is 192.168.1.101). Enter
“5025” in the field to specify the port for connection (1 in Figure 8-5) and enter
the IP address of the E4980A/AL in the field to specify the host name (2 in
Figure 8-5).

Figure 8-5 Example of control using Keysight VEE
㪈㪉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪋㪉

Control via Web server

For control over a Web server, communications are performed between the
external controller and the E4980A/AL through a LAN, regarding the
E4980A/AL as a Web server. You can control the E4980A/AL and send SCPI
commands from the external controller by displaying the E4980A/AL’s front
panel in the external controller with Internet Explorer (IE6.0 SP2 or later).
In addition, you can import the screen and recall list measurement data.
Preparing External Controller

As in the case of the SICL-LAN server, you need to set the I/O interface of the
external controller in advance to establish communication to the E4980A/AL
using the TCP/IP protocol. For the procedure, refer to“Preparing the external
controller” on page 230 of “Control over SICL-LAN server” section.
Control using web server

The following steps show how to control the E4980A/AL (IP address example:
10.116.199.134) using Internet Explorer.
Step 1. Start Internet Explorer.
Step 2. Type http://10.116.199.134/ in the address field and press the enter key.

Enter CURRENT IP ADDR on the E4980A/AL’s SYSTEM CONFIG page for an IP
address.
Step 3. The Web server’s start screen appears.
Figure 8-6 Web Server Start Screen

Web Server Function

The Web Server function consists of the following pages.
Page Description
Welcome Page Displays various setting information

Control Instrument Virtual front panel and sending/reading SCPI commands
Get Image Receives images
Transfer Data Receives test results
Configure LAN Displays and edit the LAN configuration
? Displays the Help page

Password of Configure LAN

For the Web Server function, a password must be entered.
The default password is “Keysight”.
Changing the Password of the Configure LAN

You can change the password from the Gear icon on the right upper corner.

USB Remote Control System

The USB (Universal Serial Bus) remote control system provides device control
via USB, which is equivalent to control via GPIB. Connection is made through
an interface in compliance with USBTMC-USB488 and USB 2.0.
USBTMC (USB Test & Measurement Class) is a protocol whose design is based
on USB for communication with a USB device, such as that via GPIB.
The USB remote control system controls instruments that use the name “alias.”
There is no such address for GPIB connections.
Use a USB cable to connect the E4980A/AL to an external controller (personal
computer). Figure 8-7 shows an overview of the system configuration for the
USB remote control system
Figure 8-7 Configuration of the USB Remote Control System
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫌㫋㪼㫉
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪺㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪟㪜㪮㪣㪜㪫㪫㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫
㪭㪼㪺㫋㫉㪸
㻷㼑㼥㼟㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻱㻠㻥㻤㻜㪘
E4980A 20 Hz - 2 MHz
㪘㫃㫀㪸㫊㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
7 8 9
DC DC
Source Bias USB
Trigger 4 5 6
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
DC
DC Source
Return
(Option 001)
r10VDC Max
Save/ Local/
Recall Lock
㪘㫃㫀㪸㫊㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪇㪍
Required Equipment
1. E4980A/AL (models with USB interface port (type mini-B)).
2. External controller (personal computer with Keysight I/O Libraries Suite and
USB host port (type A)) installed.
3. Other USB-compatible devices (instruments and/or peripherals for specific
purposes).
4. USB cable for connecting the E4980A/AL to the external controller (with
type A/4-prong male or type mini-B/5-prong male connectors, depending
on device used).

USB Port Types

There are two standard types of USB ports. The external controller (PC) must
be connected via the USB host port (type A), while the E4980A/AL and other
USB-compatible devices must be connected via the USB interface port (type
mini-B).
Type A: USB host port
Type mini-B: USB interface port
Preparing E4980A/AL
You do not have to configure any softkey or command for the E4980A/AL in
order to control the E4980A/AL from an external controller. Simply connect a
USB cable to the USB interface port.
Preparing External Controller

You must set up the I/O interface of the external controller in advance to
establish communication with the E4980A/AL via a USB. The USB can identify
devices automatically, so once you connect a USB cable to a target device, a
dialog box will appear for USB device registration.
The E4980A/AL will be identified as a new device if its serial number has
been changed.

Changing Alias on Setting Screen

The following are steps using Keysight I/O Libraries Suite 14.
Step 1. From your PC’s Start menu, click Program - Keysight IO Libraries Suite
-Keysight Connection Expert to open the setting screen.
Step 2. In the setting screen, select the alias names from USB0 onward in the My
Instruments frame, and then select the Create and edit alias from I/O
Configuration on the menu bar.
Figure 8-8 Changing Alias
Step 3. Change the VISA alias in the VISA Alias dialog box and press OK.
Figure 8-9


You can control the E4980A/AL by programming using SICL/VISA with Visual
Studio in a Windows environment. For further information on controlling the
E4980A/AL, see the manual for SICL or VISA. For Keysight I/O Libraries Suite,
use Keysight I/O Libraries Suite 14.
You may employ aliases in programming using SICL/VISA.
The following example shows an OPEN command to control the E4980A/AL,
for which the alias is E4980_USBIF.
SICL id = iopen ("E4980_USBIF")

VISA viOpen (...,"E4980_USBIF",...)
For further details on the programming using SICL/VISA, see the SICL
Users Guide or the VISA Users Guide.


Keysight VEE allows you to control the E4980A/AL via the direct I/O interface.
The following example shows how to control the E4980A/AL, for which alias is
given as E4980_USBIF.
When using Keysight VEE for PCs, use Keysight VEE Pro 7 for Windows or
a later version.
Step 1. On the Keysight VEE's I/O menu, click Instrument Manager...

Step 2. In the Instrument Manager setting screen, click Add... and in the Add
Interface/Device screen select USB.
GCWL
Step 3. The Instrument Properties dialog box appears. Specify Name:

E4980_USBIF(any other name acceptable), Interface: USB, Board Number: 0
(USB port number), and Alias: E4980_USBIF (which is registered in the IO
Config setting screen), then click OK.
GCWL
Figure 8-10 shows an example of control using the direct I/O interface that was
set in the above procedures.

Figure 8-10 Sample Control Using Keysight VEE (USB)
GCWL

Sending SCPI command messages
Types and structure of commands

The SCPI commands available for the E4980A/AL are classified into two groups
as follows.
E4980A/AL commands
Commands specific to the E4980A/AL. They cover all measurement functions
that the E4980A/AL has and some general-purpose functions. The commands
in this group are arranged in a hierarchical structure called the command tree
(see “Command Tree” on page 388). Each command consists of character
strings (mnemonics) indicating each hierarchical level and colon (:) separators
between hierarchical levels.
IEEE common commands

Commands to cover general-purpose functions defined in IEEE488.2 that are
commonly available to instruments that support this standard. The commands
in this group have an asterisk (*) at the beginning. There is no hierarchical
structure for the commands in this group.
Concepts of the command tree

The commands at the top of the command tree are called “root commands” or
simply “roots.” To access lower-level commands in the tree, you need to
specify a specific path like a directory path in the DOS file system. After turning
the power on or resetting your PC, the current path is set to the root. Special
characters in messages change the path setting as described below.
Message terminator A message terminator such as the 
<new line> character sets the current path to the root.
Colon (:) A colon between two command mnemonics lowers the level
of the current path in the command tree. A colon used as the
first character of a command specifies the command
mnemonic that follows as the root-level command.
Semicolon (;) A semicolon does not change the current path but separates
two commands in the same message.
Figure 8-11 shows an example of how to use colons and semicolons to
efficiently access commands in the command tree.

Figure 8-11 Using colons and semicolons
Grammar of messages
This section describes the grammar to send program messages via GPIB.
Program messages are messages that the user sends to the instrument from
the external controller to control the instrument. A program message consists
of one or more commands and their necessary parameters.
Upper/lower case sensitivity

Upper/lower case insensitive.
Program message terminator

A program message must be terminated with one of the three program
message terminators: <new line>, <ÊND>, or <new line><ÊND>. <ÊND>
indicates that EOI on the GPIB interface becomes active at the instant when
the immediately previous data byte is sent. For example, the OUTPUT
command of HTBasic automatically sends the message terminator after the
last data byte.
Parameters
A space (ASCII code: 32) is required between a command and its first
parameter. When sending several parameters in a single command, separate
each parameter with a comma (,).

Message including several commands

When sending two or more commands in a single message, separate each
command with a semicolon (;). The following example shows how to send the
*CLS command and the :STAT:PRES command in a single message using
HTBasic.
OUTPUT 717;"*CLS;:STAT:PRES"
Remote mode
The E4980A/AL enters remote mode when controlled with commands from the
controller and RMT is displayed in the status display area in the lower right of
the screen.
Press [Local/Lock] to cancel the remote mode.
When the E4980A/AL enters a local lockout state by sending the LOCAL
LOCK BUS command from the controller, you cannot unlock the remote
mode even if you press [Local/Lock]. (Only RMT is displayed in the status
display area, so you cannot distinguish the local lockout state from a
normal remote mode.)
Send the LOCAL BUS command from the controller to cancel this state,
which enables control of the E4980A/AL on the front panel.

Trigger System
Trigger System
The trigger system is responsible for such tasks as detecting the start of a
measurement cycle (triggering) and controlling the system state. As Figure
8-12 shows, the trigger system has a system-wide state that can be “Idle,”
“Waiting for Trigger,” or “Measurement.”
Figure 8-12 Trigger system
㪠㪛㪣㪜㪑㪘㪙㪦㪩㩷㪪㪚㪧㪠㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪮㪘㪠㪫㩷㪝㪦㪩
㪤㪜㪘㪪㪬㪩㪜㪤㪜㪥㪫
㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪐
The following subsections describe each state and explain how the trigger
system switches among the states.
System-wide states and transitions
“Idle” State
The trigger system switches to “Idle” state when one of the following
commands has been executed. In the “Idle” state. measurement data and
monitor data can be read with query commands of the :FETCh subsystem.
Also, turning on the power to the instrument puts the trigger system into “Idle”
state. When the power is turned on, however, the continuous initiation mode is
on and the trigger source is set to “Internal”; accordingly, the trigger system
immediately switches to the “Waiting for Trigger” state and subsequently
repeats transitions between the “Measurement” and “Waiting for Trigger”
states.
• :ABOR
• *RST
• Other commands to change settings (:FREQ, etc.)
When the DC bias function is turned on, the trigger system switches to the
“Idle” state.

Trigger System
When starting the trigger system with one of the following commands, the
system switches from “Idle” to the “Waiting for Trigger” state. The conditions of
transition differ depending on which trigger source is specified (Refer to Figure
8-14 on page 253 and Figure 8-15 on page 254).
• :INIT[:IMM]
• :INIT:CONT
When the trigger source is set to the external trigger (EXT), the conditions for
switching from “Idle” to “Waiting for Trigger” differ between the remote mode
and local mode.
Remote mode When the :INIT:CONT is ON, the trigger system automatically
switches to “Waiting for Trigger.”
When the :INIT:CONT is OFF, the trigger system switches to
the “Waiting for Trigger” state by sending the :INIT:IMM
command.
Local mode The trigger system automatically switches from “Idle” to
“Waiting for Trigger.”
When the trigger source is set to the internal trigger (INT) or manual trigger
(MAN), the trigger system automatically switches from the “Idle” state to the
“Waiting for Trigger” state.
The E4980A/AL in the “Idle” state switches to the “Measurement” state by

using the :TRIG command.
When the :ABOR command is executed, the trigger system switches to the
“Idle” state regardless of which state the E4980A/AL is currently in. An
error occurs when query commands of the :FETCh subsystem are executed
because no measurement data exist.
“Waiting for Trigger” State

When the trigger system is in the “Waiting for Trigger” state and either the
instrument is triggered (i.e., a trigger is detected) or one of the following
commands is executed, the trigger system switches to the “Measurement”
state.
• :TRIG
As shown in the table below, the instrument is triggered differently depending
on which trigger source is specified. To specify the trigger source, use the
:TRIG:SOUR command.
Trigger Source How instrument is triggered
Internal trigger The instrument is automatically triggered within itself.

(Internal)

Trigger System
Trigger Source How instrument is triggered
External trigger  The instrument is triggered when a trigger signal is input

(External) through the external trigger terminal, the handler I/O port,
or the scanner I/O port.
Bus trigger The instrument is triggered when the *TRG command or
(Bus) TRIGGER (GET) bus command is issued.
Manual trigger The instrument is triggered when you press [Trigger] on
(Man) the front panel.
When the sweep averaging function is on, even if the instrument is set so
that the trigger is detected for each sweep, the sweep is performed
repeatedly until the sweep averaging for a specified number of times
finishes. This is done by triggering the instrument once at the beginning or
executing the : TRIG command.
There are three kinds of trigger commands: the *TRG common command, the
TRIGGER (GET) bus command, and the :TRG GPIB command. These
commands are classified into two types in this trigger system. (Refer to Figure
8-13).
Figure 8-13 Trigger system and trigger commands
㩿㪈㪀㩷㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㩷㪪㪚㪧㪠㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㩿㪉㪀㩷㪁㪫㪩㪞㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㫆㫅㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㩷㪸㫅㪻
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩㩷㩿㪞㪜㪫㪀㩷㪹㫌㫊㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪿㪖㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻
㪠㪛㪣㪜㪠㪛㪣㪜
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪑㪠㪥㪠㪫㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪠㪥㪠㪫

㪚㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻
㪮㪘㪠㪫㩷㪝㪦㪩㪮㪘㪠㪫㩷㪝㪦㪩
㪤㪜㪘㪪㪬㪩㪜㪤㪜㪥㪫㪤㪜㪘㪪㪬㪩㪜㪤㪜㪥㪫
㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㪼㪁㪫㪩㪞㩷㫆㫉㩷㪞㪜㪫
㪚㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪇
1. :TRIG GPIB command

When the trigger system is either in the “Waiting for Trigger” or “Idle” state,
the E4980A/AL is triggered by sending the :TRIG command. When reading
measurement results via a controller in the “Idle” state, you need to use the
:FETch? query command.
2. *TRG command or TRIGGER (GET) bus command

Trigger System
In the “Waiting for Trigger” state, the E4980A/AL is triggered by sending

the *TRG command or the TRIGGER (GET) bus command, and
measurement results in one trigger sequence can be read without sending
the :FETCh? query command in the “Idle” state.
Therefore,
"*TRG" = ":TRIG;:FETCh?"
The following two sample programs show the difference between the :TRIG
command and the *TRG commands.
10 ASSIGN @Adrs TO 717
20 REMOTE @Adrs
30 OUTPUT @Adrs;"*RST;*CLS"
40 OUTPUT @Adrs;":TRIG:SOUR BUS"
50 OUTPUT @Adrs;":ABOR;:INIT"
60 OUTPUT @Adrs;":TRIG"
70 OUTPUT @Adrs;":FETC?"
80 ENTER @Adrs;A,B,C
90 END
20 REMOTE @Adrs
40 OUTPUT @Adrs;":TRIG:SOUR BUS"
50 OUTPUT @Adrs;":ABOR;:INIT"
60 OUTPUT @Adrs;"*TRG"
70 ENTER @Adrs;A,B,C
80 END
Measurement State
In the “Measurement” state, the instrument waits for the sweep delay time to
elapse when it is specified and then starts a measurement cycle (sweep).
When the instrument finishes measurement, the trigger system behaves in one
of the following ways depending on the setting of the continuous initiation
mode.
If the continuous initiation mode is off:
The trigger system switches to the “Idle” state
If the continuous initiation mode is on:
The trigger system switches to the “Idle” state and then
automatically switches to the “Waiting for Trigger” state
When the E4980A/AL is in remote mode, measurements can be made only

on the screen displayed by pressing [Display Format].
A typical flowchart of data transfer using the trigger system is shown below.

Trigger System
Figure 8-14 Trigger system and data transfer (INT/MAN)
㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㪑㪪㪦㪬㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㩷㫆㫉㩷㪤㪘㪥
㪮㪸㫀㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㫆㫉
㫋㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㪠㪥㪫㩷㫀㫊㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐㪅
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㪤㪘㪥㩷㫀㫊㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅
㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㩷㫆㫉㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㩷㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㪼㪻㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐
㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪽㫀㫅㫀㫊㪿㪼㫊㪅
㪠㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪛㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㫌㪽㪽㪼㫉
㪼㫄㫇㫋㫐
㪩㪼㪸㪻㫐
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫋㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐㩷㫉㪼㪾㪸㫉㪻㫃㪼㫊㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫎㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㫀㫅㫌㫆㫌㫊㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫆㫉㩷㫆㪽㪽㪅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪊

Trigger System
Figure 8-15 Trigger system and data transfer (EXT/BUS)
㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㪑㪪㪦㪬㪩㩷㪜㪯㪫㩷㫆㫉㩷㪙㪬㪪
㪮㪸㫀㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㫆㫉
㫋㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㪜㪯㪫㩷㫀㫊㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㪅
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㪙㪬㪪㩷㫀㫊㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅
㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㪃㩷㪁㪫㪩㪞㩷㫆㫉㩷㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩㩿㪞㪜㪫㪀㩷㪹㫌㫊㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐
㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪽㫀㫅㫀㫊㪿㪼㫊㪅
㪠㪻㫃㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪼㫄㫇㫋㫐
㪩㪼㪸㪻㫐
㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪑㪫㪩㪠㪞㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㪅
㪩㪼㫄㫆㫋㪼㩷㪑㩷㪫㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㫀㫅㫌㫆㫌㫊㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫆㫅㪅㩷㩿㪜㪯㪫㪃㩷㪙㪬㪪㪀
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪫㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪑㪠㪥㪠㪫㪑㪠㪤㪤㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㫀㫅㫌㫆㫌㫊㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫀㫊㩷㫆㪽㪽㪅㩷㩿㪜㪯㪫㪃㩷㪙㪬㪪㪀
㪣㫆㪺㪸㫃㩷㪑㩷㪫㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㫊㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐㩷㫉㪼㪾㪸㫉㪻㫃㪼㫊㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫎㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㫀㫅㫌㫆㫌㫊㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫀㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫆㫉㩷㫆㪽㪽㪅㩷㩿㪜㪯㪫㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㪀
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪋㪋
When the E4980A/AL is set to the external trigger mode, and is triggered
via the external trigger input terminal or an optional interface, this trigger
signal has the same effect as the :TRIG command.

Data Buffer Memory
Data Buffer Memory
Data Buffer Memory

The E4980A/AL has a data buffer memory function. The data buffer memory
can hold up to 201 sets of measurement results, and all buffered measurement
results are transferred at once to the controller by using the :MEM:READ?
DBUF command. This function makes it possible to greatly reduce the overall
time for data transfer.
Refer to the following figure. Line numbers in the figure correspond to those of
the reference codes below the figure.
Figure 8-16 Data buffer memory
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃㫃㪼㫉
㪫㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉
㪠㫅㫀㫋㫀㪸㫃㫀㫑㪼㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪘㫃㫃㩷㪛㪸㫋㪸㪚㫃㪼㪸㫉
㪈㪈㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪈㪈㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪈㪈
㪉㪉㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪉㪉㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪉㪉
㪊㪊㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪊㪊㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪊㪊
㪋㪋㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪋㪋㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪋㪋
㪌㪌㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪌㪌㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪌㪌
㪣㪠㪥㪜㩷㪐㪇㪄㪈㪇㪇㪣㪠㪥㪜㩷㪈㪉㪇㪣㪠㪥㪜㩷㪈㪋㪇㪄㪈㪌㪇㪣㪠㪥㪜㩷㪈㪎㪇
GCWG
10 OPTION BASE 1
20 DIM D(5,4)
40 REMOTE @Adrs
60 OUTPUT @Adrs;"FORM ASCII"
70 OUTPUT @Adrs;"TRIG:SOUR BUS"
80 OUTPUT @Adrs;"DISP:PAGE MEAS"
90 OUTPUT @Adrs;"MEM:DIM DBUF,5"
100 OUTPUT @Adrs;"MEM:FILL DBUF"
110 FOR I=1 TO 5
120 OUTPUT @Adrs;"TRIGGER:IMMEDIATE"
130 NEXT I
140 OUTPUT @Adrs;"MEM:READ? DBUF"
150 ENTER @Adrs;D(*)

Data Buffer Memory
160 PRINT D(*)

170 OUTPUT @Adrs;"MEM:CLE DBUF"
180 END
When Data Buffer Memory is Used

Follow the rules below when using the data buffer memory function.
o Measurement data collected after sending the :MMEM:FILL DBUF
command to use the data buffer memory function are stored in the data
buffer memory in the order measured.
o When the E4980A/AL is triggered using the :TRIG command, the
measurement results are stored only in the data buffer memory. Therefore,
you do not have to clear the output buffer after each measurement.
*When the E4980A/AL is triggered using the *TRG or TRIGGER (GET) bus
command, the measurement results are stored in both the data buffer
memory and the output buffer. Therefore, it is necessary to read the
measurement results in the output buffer using the controller and to clear
the output buffer each time a measurement is made. If you fail to do this, an
error (-410, “Query INTERRUPTED”) will occur.
The output buffer is the area where measurement data are stored when the
E4980A/AL is triggered without using the data buffer memory. The data
buffer memory is off in the E4980A/AL’s initial state, and measurement data
are stored in the output buffer. It is necessary to read data in the output
buffer using the controller and clear the output buffer each time a
measurement is made.
o When the number of sets of measurement data exceeds the capacity of the
buffer memory, all of the overflowed measurement data will be lost, an error
(90, “Data Memory Overflow”) will occur, and bit 3 of the standard event
status register will be set to 1. When you store new data into the buffer data
memory, use the :MEM:CLE DBUF command to clear the data buffer
memory.
o When the number of sets of measurement data is less than the capacity of
the buffer memory, the following data, instead of the actual measurement
data, are input to the unused portion of the data buffer memory.
Data A 9.9E37
Data B 9.9E37
Status -1
BIN No. or IN/OUT 0
o When the data buffer memory function is used during a list sweep
measurement, the measurement result for one sweep point is stored as one
set of measurement data. Therefore, when two or more sweep points are the

Data Buffer Memory
same and are adjacent, the E4980A/AL measures the device once, but the
number of data sets stored in the data buffer memory is equal to that of the
sweep points.
o When the list sweep measurement’s limit function is set to off at a sweep
point, IN/OUT is 0. Also, when the comparator function is set to off, the BIN
No. is 0.

Data Buffer Memory
Output Format of Data Buffer Memory

There are two formats returned by the :MEM:READ? DBUF command: ASCII
and BINARY. Each format is described below. For sample programs using the
data buffer memory (output format: ASCII and BINARY), refer to the chapter on
sample programs.
o ASCII Format
Figure 8-18 below shows the output format when the ASCII format is
selected as the data format. The data format and meaning of <DATA A>,
<DATA B>, <STATUS>, <BIN No.>, or <IN/OUT> are the same as those of the
ASCII data format described in Data Format of “Data Transfer” on page 264
The exponent part for <DATA A>, <DATA B> can be change to 3 digit by the
command of :FORM:EXP:DIG
Figure 8-17 ASCII format (Buffer memory)
(14/#5%.10)1((
㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪪㪥㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
&#6## &#6#$ 56#675 $+00Q

QT
+0176
(14/#5%.10)10
㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪪㪥㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
&#6## &#6#$ 56#675 $+00Q

QT
+0176
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪉㪇
o BINARY Format
Figure 8-19 shows the output format when the BINARY format is selected
as the data format. The data format and meaning of <DATA A>, <DATA B>,
<STATUS>, <BIN No.>, or <IN/OUT> are the same as those of the BINARY
data format described in Data Format of “Data Transfer” on page 264

Data Buffer Memory
Figure 8-18 Binary format (Buffer memory)
D[VGU
㪓㩷㪙㪠㪥㩷㪥㫆㪅㪕
㪥㫆㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㪹㫐㫋㪼㫊
㩺㪋㪓㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪘㩷㪕㪓㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪙㩷㪕㪓㩷㪪㪫㪘㪫㪬㪪㩷㪕㫆㫉㪇㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
㫋㫆㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉
㪓㩷㪠㪥㪆㪦㪥㪫㩷㪕
D[VGU D[VGU D[VGU D[VGU D[VGU D[VGU
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪉㪈
NLÊND is not included in the number of bytes to transfer. For example,

the number of byte of “:MEM:DIM DBUF, 3”, is (8  4)  3 + 1 = 97 bytes.

Starting a Measurement Cycle (triggering the instrument)
Configuring the instrument to automatically perform continuous measurement

Step 1. When the trigger system does not run (“Idle” state), use the :INIT:CONT
command to turn on the continuous initiation mode.
Step 2. Issue the :TRIG:SOUR command to set the trigger source to the internal
trigger.
Starting Measurement on Demand

There are two ways to start measurement on demand.
Trigger the instrument to start measurement when the trigger system

is in the “Waiting for Trigger” state
Put the E4980A/AL in the “Waiting for Trigger” state and start measurement
whenever you want. In cases where it takes some time to obtain stable
measurement values, a controller can control the timing for triggering.
Follow the steps below.
Step 1. When the trigger system is not operating (“Idle” state), use the :INIT:CONT
command to turn on the continuous initiation mode.
Step 2. Issue the :TRIG:SOUR command to set the trigger source to “Bus Trigger.”
Step 3. Trigger the instrument whenever you want to perform measurement. An
external controller can trigger the instrument with one of the following two
commands:
Command Applicable trigger source
*TRG Bus trigger only

:TRIG External trigger
Bus trigger
Manual trigger
Step 4. Repeat Step 3 to start the next measurement cycle.
Obtaining measurement data on demand while continuous sweep is

performed
Start measurement whenever you want while the E4980A/AL performs
continuous measurement.
Follow the steps below.
Step 1. When the trigger system is operating (any state other than “Idle”), abort the
trigger system using the :ABOR command.

Step 2. Issue the :TRIG:SOUR command to set the trigger source to “Internal Trigger.”
Step 3. The trigger system starts, and the instrument is automatically triggered by
the internal trigger, performing continuous measurement.
Step 4. Read measurement data on demand.
For the list sweep measurement, the method of triggering the instrument
differs depending on the list sweep mode.
Use the :LIST:MODE SEQ|STEP command to change the list sweep mode.
1. Sequential mode
When the E4980A/AL is triggered once, the device is measured at all
sweep points.
2. Step mode
The sweep point is incremented each time the E4980A/AL is triggered.
Figure 8-19 Sequential mode and step mode

Waiting for the End of Measurement
Using the status register

The E4980A/AL’s status can be detected through the status registers. This
section explains how to use the status registers to detect the end of
measurement. For a complete description of the status report mechanism,
including the specifications of each bit, see “Status Byte” on page 270.
The measurement status is reported by the operation status event register. An
SRQ (service request) is convenient for detecting the end of measurement. It
uses the information reported by this register.
To detect the end of measurement via an SRQ, use one of the following
commands:
• *SRE
• :STAT:OPER:ENAB
Follow these steps to use an SRQ.
Step 1. Configure the E4980A/AL so that it generates an SRQ when the operation
status event register’s bit (a bit that is set to 1 during measurement) is
changed from 1 to 0.
Step 2. Trigger the instrument to start a measurement cycle.
Step 3. When an SRQ is generated, the program interrupts the measurement cycle.
When the sweep averaging function is on, the E4980A/AL generates an

SRQ when it has finished taking a number of measurements that is equal
to the sweep averaging number.

Figure 8-20 Sequence generating SRQ (end of measurement)
㪪㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷
㪩㪼㫈㫌㪼㫊㫋㪪㪩㪨
㪪㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪩㪼㫈㫌㪼㫊㫋㪞㪼㫅㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪈㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪁㪪㪩㪜㩷㪈㪉㪏
㪎㪍㪌㪋㪊㪉㪈㪇
㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊
㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㪼㫉㪩㪨㪪㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪙㫐㫋㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪪㫌㫄㫄㪸㫉㫐
㪈㪉㪏㪍㪋㪊㪉㪈㪍㪏㪋㪉㪈
㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪈㪇㪇㪇㪇㪑㩷㪪㪫㪘㪫㩷㪑㩷㪦㪧㪜㪩㩷㪑㩷㪜㪥㪘㪙㩷㪈㪍
㪈㪌㪈㪋㪈㪊㪈㪉㪈㪈㪈㪇㪐㪏㪎㪍㪌㪋㪊㪉㪈㪇
㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㩿㪑㪪㪫㪘㪫㪑㪦㪧㪜㪩㪖㪀
㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪧㫆㫊㫀㫋㫀㫍㪼㩷㪫㫉㪸㫅㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪝㫀㫃㫋㪼㫉
㩿㪸㫃㫎㪸㫐㫊㩷㪇㪀
㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪈㪥㪼㪾㪸㫋㫀㫍㪼㩷㪫㫉㪸㫅㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪝㫀㫃㫋㪼㫉
㩿㪸㫃㫎㪸㫐㫊㩷㪇㫏㪽㪽㪽㪽㪀
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪚㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪊㪉㪎㪍㪏㪈㪍㪊㪏㪋㪏㪈㪐㪉㪋㪇㪐㪍㪉㪇㪋㪏㪈㪇㪉㪋㪌㪈㪉㪉㪌㪍㪈㪉㪏㪍㪋㪊㪉㪈㪍㪏㪋㪉㪈㩿㪑㪪㪫㪘㪫㪑㪦㪧㪜㪩㪑㪚㪦㪥㪛㪖㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪍

Data Transfer
Data Transfer
This section describes data transfer.
Data Format
The E4980A/AL offers two data formats for GPIB data transfer to the controller,
ASCII and BINARY. Data transfer rates vary depending on the data format
used.
ASCII Format
The ASCII data format is the default output format. When the :FORM:DATA
ASC command is executed, the E4980A/AL transfers data in the ASCII format.
The ASCII format of the E4980A/AL has two modes: the six-significant-digit
mode and the ten-significant-digit mode. The six-significant-digit mode is the
default, though the format can be switched to the ten-significant-digit mode
by using the :FORM:ASC:LONG ON command. The ASCII data output format
on the MEAS DISPLAY, BIN No., or BIN COUNT page is described below.
Figure 8-21 ASCII Format 1
(14/#5%.10)1((
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪑㩷㪦㪝㪝
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪑㩷㪦㪥
㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪪㪥㩷㫆㫉㩷㪪㪥㪥㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
&#6## &#6#$ 56#675 $+00Q
(14/#5%.10)10
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪑㩷㪦㪝㪝
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪑㩷㪦㪥
㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪪㪥㩷㫆㫉㩷㪪㪥㪥㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
&#6## &#6#$ 56#675 $+00Q
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪊㪇
The <DATA A>, <DATA B>, <STATUS>, and <BIN No.> formats are as follows.
• <DATA A> and <DATA B> format:

Data Transfer
The data output formats for <DATA A> (primary parameter’s measurement
data), and <DATA B> (secondary parameter’s measurement data) uses the
12-ASCII character fixed-length format as follows.
The exponent part for <DATA A>, <DATA B> can be change to 3 digit by the
command of :FORM:EXP:DIG
SN.NNNNNESNN (S:+/-, N: 0 to 9, E: Exponent Sign, LONG OFF)
SN.NNNNNNNNNESNN (S:+/-, N: 0 to 9, E: Exponent Sign, LONG ON)
• <STATUS> Format:
The <STATUS> data shows the status of measurement data as follows.
-1: No data (in the data buffer memory)
0: Normal measurement data
+1: Overload
+3: Signal source overloaded
+4: ALC (auto level control) unable to regulate
The data output formats for <STATUS> uses the two-ASCII character
fixed-length format as follows.
SN (S:+/-, N: 0 to 4)
When the <STATUS> is -1 or 1, the measurement data are given as 9.9E37.

When the <STATUS> is 0, 3, or 4, however, the actual measurement data
are output.
• <BIN No.> Format:

The <BIN No.> shows the bin sorting results as follows.
0: OUT_OF_BINS
+1 to +9: BIN 1 to BIN 9
+10: AUX_BIN
The <BIN No.> data is output with the measurement data only when the
comparator function is set to on.
The data output formats for <BIN No.> uses a two- or three-ASCII character
data-length format as follows.
SN or SNN (S:+/-, N: 0 to 9)

Data Transfer
The ASCII data output format on the LIST SWEEP page is shown below. The
data loop is repeated according to the number of sweep points.
Figure 8-22 ASCII Format 2 (List Sweep)
(14/#5%.10)1((
㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪪㪥㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
&#6## &#6#$ 56#675 +0176
(14/#5%.10)10
㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪅㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪥㪜㪪㪥㪥㪪㪥㪪㪥㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
&#6## &#6#$ 56#675 +0176
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪊㪈
The <DATA A>, <DATA B>, and <STATUS> formats are the same as the formats
on the MEAS DISPLAY, BIN No., or BIN COUNT page. Therefore, only the
<IN/OUT> format will be described here.
• <IN/OUT> format:
The <IN/OUT> data shows the result of the list sweep’s comparator
function.
-1: LOW
0: IN
+1: HIGH
When the comparator function of the list sweep measurement is not used,
the <IN/OUT> data output result is 0 (zero).
The data output formats for <IN/OUT> use the two-ASCII character
fixed-length format as follows.
SN (S:+/-, N: 0 to 1)

Data Transfer
BINARY Format
When the :FORM:DATA REAL,64 command is executed, the E4980A/AL
transfers data in the BINARY format. This BINARY format is the 64-bit floating
point binary format specified in IEEE Standard 754-1985. The BINARY data
output format on the MEAS DISPALY, BIN No, or BIN COUNT page is shown
below.
Figure 8-23 BINARY Format 1
%1/21((
D[VGU
%1/210
㩺㪉㪓㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪘㩷㪕㪓㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪙㩷㪕㪓㩷㪪㪫㪘㪫㪬㪪㩷㪕㪓㩷㪙㪠㪥㩷㪥㫆㪅㪕㪇㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪊㪉
The BINARY data output format consists of the first four bytes (described
below), <DATA A>, <DATA B>, <STATUS>, <BIN No.>, 0 (ASCII), and the
terminator (NL).
# (1 byte): A code for the BINARY data output format
(ASCII character)
2 (1 byte): The number of the bytes for the “No. of the
bytes to transfer” (ASCII character)
No. of bytes to transfer (2 bytes): The number of data bytes of <DATA A>,
<DATA B>, <BIN No.> and 0
Data formats of the <DATA A>, <DATA B>, <STATUS>, and <BIN No.> are
common (8 bytes, IEEE754 floating point format) as follows. The meaning of
each data item is the same as that in the ASCII format.

Data Transfer
Figure 8-24 8 bytes, IEEE754 floating point format
㪏㪙㪰㪫㪜㪪
㪪㪜㪜㪜㪜㪜㪜㪜㩷㪜㪜㪜㪜㪝㪝㪝㪝㩷㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㩷㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㩷㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㩷㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㩷㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㩷㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝㪝
㪪㪑㩷㪈㪙㪠㪫
㪜㪑㩷㪈㪈㪙㪠㪫㪪㪝㪑㩷㪌㪉㪙㪠㪫㪪
㪮㪿㪼㫉㪼㪃
㩷㪪㪑㩷㩷㩷㫀㫊㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㩷㪹㫀㫋㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㪈㪙㫀㫋
㩷㪜㪑㩷㩷㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㫅㩷㪼㫏㫇㫆㫅㪼㫅㫋㩷㪹㫀㫋㪅㩷㪈㪈㪙㫀㫋㫊㩷㩷
㩷㪝㪑㩷㩷㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪽㫉㪸㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪹㫀㫋㪅㩷㪌㪉㪙㫀㫋㫊
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪊㪋
The real number RN represented in the floating point format is provided by

employing the following formula. (EXP: Exponent part (E) converted to decimal,
f: Fractional part (F) converted to decimal notation)
• When
0 < EXP < 11111111111 (2047)
RN = (-1)S  2(EXP-1023)  {1 + f / (252)}
• When EXP = 0
RN = (-1)S  2-1022  {f / (252)}
• When EXP = 0, f = 0
RN = 0
For example,
S = 1
EXP = 0111111 1111 (1023)
f=
1,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
(251)

RN = (-1)1  2(1023 - 1023)  {1 + (251 / 252)}
= -1  1  1.5
= -1.5

Data Transfer
When the list sweep measurement is performed, the binary data format is as
follows. <DATA A>, <DATA B>, <STATUS>, and <IN/OUT> are repeated as many
times as there are sweep points. Each data format is the same as the 8-byte
data format described previously.
Figure 8-25 Binary Format 2 (List sweep)
D[VGU
㩺㪋㪓㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪘㩷㪕㪓㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪙㩷㪕㪓㩷㪪㪫㪘㪫㪬㪪㩷㪕㪓㩷㪠㪥㪆㪦㪥㪫㩷㪕㪇㪥㪣㪵㪜㪥㪛
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪇㪊㪊

Status Byte
Status Byte
The status byte register contains an 8-bit word that the E4980A/AL places on
the GPIB bus when it is serially polled.
The value of each bit indicates the status of an internal function of the
E4980A/AL, and two bits of the status byte are used as summary bits of the
registers. Bits are set to “1” and reset to “0.”
Figure 8-26 Status Byte Register
㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪪㫌㫄㫄㪸㫉㫐
㪤㪼㫊㫊㪸㪾㪼㫊
㫉㪼㪸㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪸㫃㩷㪧㫆㫃㫃
㪪㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㪩㪨㪪
㪩㪼㫈㫌㪼㫊㫋㪎㪍㪜㪪㪙㪤㪘㪭㪊㪉㪈㪇㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪙㫐㫋㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪞㪼㫅㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪤㪪㪪
㫉㪼㪸㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪁㪪㪫㪙㪖
㪣㫆㪾㫀㪺㪸㫃㩷㪦㪩
㪎㪌㪋㪊㪉㪈㪇㪪㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪩㪼㫈㫌㪼㫊㫋㩷㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪪㪼㫋㩷㪹㫐㩷㪁㪪㪩㪜
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪊

Status Byte
Table 8-1 gives the individual bit assignments of the status byte and its bit
weights. When you read the status byte using GPIB serial polling, the value is
the sum of the total bit weights of all the high bits existing at the time you read
the byte. After serial polling of the status byte, only bit 6 (RQS) is cleared.
Table 8-1 Status Bit definition of the Status Byte Register
Bit No. Bit Name Description

Weight
0 1 unused always 0 (zero)
4 16 MAV (message available) This bit is set to “1” when the E4980A/AL has available data to output
that have not been read yet. This bit is reset to “0” when all the data
have been retrieved. (This bit is not cleared by serial polling.)
5 32 Standard Event Status Register This bit is set to “1” when any enabled bits of the standard event status
Summary register have been set to “1.” This bit is cleared when all bits of the
standard event status register are set to “0.” (This bit is not cleared by
serial polling).
6 64 RQS Bit 6 serves two functions (RQS/MSS), depending on how it is read.

RQS (Request Service) Bit
If bit 6 is read in the serial polling process, it is treated as an RQS bit
and is reset during the serial polling process.

MSS (Master Summary) Bit
If bit 6 is read using the *STB? (status byte) query, it is treated as an
MSS bit, and its value is not changed by executing the *STB? query.

To understand this operation, think of the RQS and MSS bits as two
inputs to a multiplexer (MUX) and the output of the MUX being bit 6 of
the status byte register.

During the serial polling operation the MUX path selected is from the
service request generation circuit to bit 6, so bit 6 represents the RQS
bit.

During execution of the *STB? query the MUX path selected is from
the master summary bit generation circuit to bit 6, so bit 6 represents
the MSS bit.

To clear the MSS bit, all bits of the original registers corresponding to
the enabled summary bit in the status byte and the output buffer of the
E4980A/AL must be cleared. When you read the status byte including
the MSS bit instead of the RQS bit, the *STB? query must be used. The
*STB? query clears neither the MSS bit nor the RQS bit.
7 128 Operation Status Register This bit is set to “1” when one or more enabled bits of the operation
Summary status register is set to “1.” This bit is cleared when all bits of the
operation status register are set to 0. (This bit is not cleared by serial
polling.)

Status Byte
Enabling the Status Byte

A service request (SRQ) will be generated when any enabled bit in the status
byte register is set to “1.” Therefore, to enable/disable any bits of the status
byte register, you can set bits in the service request enable register. These bits
correspond to bits in the status byte register. When a bit is set in the service
request enable register, it enables that bit in the status byte register to request
service. To set bits in the service request enable register, the *SRE command is
used. The syntax of the *SRE command is:
*SRE <n>
Where, <n>: decimal number (0 to 255)
For example, 
If <n> is equal to 160 (10100000 in binary notation), bits 5 and 7 are enabled as
follows.
Bit No. of Status Byte MSB LSB

76543210
Bit Pattern for *SRE command 10100000
In this case, when either bit 5 or bit 7 of the status byte is set to “1,” a service
request is generated.
The default setting is *SRE 0 (all bits of the status byte are disabled).
Bit 6 (RQS) is non-maskable, and bits 0 to 3 are always 0 (zero). Thus, it is

meaningless to mask these bits. (The *SRE command’s bit pattern for
masking bit 6 is ignored, while the *SRE command’s bit pattern for
masking bits 0 to 6 is accepted, but is meaningless.)

Status Byte
Operation Status Register Structure

The operation status register group provides reports on operation status by
summarizing multiple events into a summary message (bit 7) of the status
byte. The structure of the operation status register group is shown in Figure
8-28 below. This group consists of the following three registers.
• Operation status condition register
• Operation status event register
• Operation status event enable register
Figure 8-27 Operation Status Register Structure
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪛㪸㫋㪸㩷㪙㫀㫋
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪙㫀㫋
㪪㫎㪼㪼㫇㫀㫅㪾㩷㪙㫀㫋
㪈㪌㪈㪋㪋㪊㪉㪈㪇
㪚㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪫㫉㪸㫅㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪝㫀㫃㫋㪼㫉
㩿㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪀
㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪪㫌㫄㫄㪸㫉㫐㩷㪤㪼㫊㫊㪸㪾㪼
㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㫄㫄㪸㫉㫐㩷㪙㫀㫋
㩿㪙㫀㫋㩷㪎㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪙㫐㫋㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪌

Status Byte
Operation Status Condition Register

The operation status condition register consists of 16 bits, and reflects these
states in its condition bits. Therefore, each time the E4980A/AL’s condition is
changed, its condition bit changes from “0” to “1,” or from “1” to “0.” Table 8-2
below shows each bit of the operation status condition register.
Table 8-2 Operation Status Condition Register Assignments

Weight
0 1 Correction Data 0: Correction data measurement not in progress

Measurement Bit 1: Correction data measurement in progress
3 8 List Sweeping bit 0: List sweep measurement not in progress
1: List sweep measurement in progress
4 16 Measuring bit 0: Measurement not in progress
1: Measurement in progress
5 to 15 unused always 0 (zero)
When you read the contents of the operation status condition register using
the :STAT:OPER:COND? query, this register is not cleared. To clear it, change
the device’s operation state by setting all bits to 0.
Operation Status Event Register

The operation status event register consists of 16-bit registers, and each event
bit in the event register corresponds to a condition bit in the operation status
condition register. Each event bit is set to “1” when its corresponding bit in the
condition register makes a “1”-to-“0” transition only. A negative transition filter
is used.
Table 8-3 Operation Status Event Register Assignments

Weight
0 1 Correction Data This bit is set to “1” when the OPEN, SHORT, or LOAD
Measurement Complete Bit correction data measurement is completed.
3 8 List Sweep Measurement This bit is set to “1” when a last sweep point
Complete Bit measurement of the list sweep measurement is
completed.

Status Byte
Table 8-3 Operation Status Event Register Assignments

Weight
4 16 Measurement Complete Bit This bit is set to “1” when a single point measurement is
completed. This bit indicates a corrected measured value.
5 to 15 unused always 0 (zero)
When you read the contents of the operation status event register using the
:STAT:OPER:EVEN? query, the operation status event register is cleared, and
bit 7 of the status byte is reset to “0.”
Enabling the Operation Status Event Register

An operation status register summary (bit 7 of the status byte) will be set when
any enable bit in the operation status event register is set to “1.” To
enable/disable any bits of this register, the operation status event enable
register is used. This particular register is the same length as the operation
status event register. When a bit is set in the enable register, it enables the
corresponding bit in the event register to request a service. To set any bit in the
enable register, the :STAT:OPER:ENAB command is used. The syntax of the
:STAT:OPER:ENAB command is:
:STAT:OPER:ENAB <n>
where, <n>: decimal number (-32768 to 32767)
For example,
If <n> is equal to 8 (0000000000001000 in binary), bit 3 is enabled as follows.
Bit No. of Event Register MSB LSB

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Event Enable Register 0 0 0 0 0 00000001000
In this case, when bit 3 of the operation status event register is set to “1,” the
operation status register summary (bit 7 of the status byte) is set to “1.”
The default setting is :STAT:OPER:ENAB 0 (all bits of the operation status event
register are disabled).
Bit 1, bit 2, and bits 5 to 15 are always 0 (zero). Thus, it is meaningless to

mask them.

Status Byte
Standard Event Status Register

The standard event status register consists of 8 bits as shown in Table 8-4 and is
defined in IEEE 488.2-1987. If one or more enable bits of the standard event
status register is set to “1,” bit 5 (standard event status register summary) of
the status byte is set to “1.”
When each error bit (bits 2, 3, 4, and 5) of the standard event status register is
set to “1,” an error message with the following error numbers is input to the
error queue.
Bit No. Error No.
2 (query error) -400 to -499

3 (Device specific error) 0 to 32,767, -300 to -399
4 (Execution error) -200 to -299
5 (Command error) -100 to -199
When you read the contents of the standard event status register using the
*ESR? query command, the standard event status register is cleared, and bit 5
of the status byte is reset to “0.”

Status Byte
Figure 8-28 Standard Event Status Register
㪛㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪛㪼㫇㪼㫅㪻㪼㫅㫋㩷㪜㫉㫉㫆㫉
㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㪼
㪩㪼㫈㫌㪼㫊㫋㩷㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃
㪚㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㫉㫉㫆㫉
㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪜㫉㫉㫆㫉
㪬㫊㪼㫉㩷㪩㪼㫈㫌㪼㫊㫋
㪨㫌㪼㫉㫐㩷㪜㫉㫉㫆㫉
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪦㫅
㪎㪍㪌㪋㪊㪉㪈㪇㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷
㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪁㪜㪪㪩㪖
㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷
㪎㪍㪌㪋㪊㪉㪈㪇㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪪㫌㫄㫄㪸㫉㫐㩷㪤㪼㫊㫊㪸㪾㪼㪁㪜㪪㪜
㪜㫍㪼㫅㫋㩷㪪㫌㫄㫄㪸㫉㫐㩷㪙㫀㫋㩷㩿㪜㪪㪙㪀
㩿㪙㫀㫋㩷㪌㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪙㫐㫋㪼㩷㪩㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪀
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪉㪋

Status Byte
Table 8-4 Standard Event Status Register Assignments
Bit Bit Name Description

No. Weight
0 1 Operation Complete (OPC) This bit is set to “1” when the E4980A/AL has completed all
Bit selected pending operations before sending the *OPC
command.
1 2 Request Control (RQC) Bit always 0 (zero)
2 4 Query Error (QYE) Bit This bit is set to “1” when reading data from the output
buffer and no data was present, or when the data was lost.
3 8 Device specific error (DDE) This bit is set to “1” when a device-dependent error
Bit (except for the command error, query error, and execution
error) has occurred.
4 16 Execution Error (EXE) Bit This bit is set to “1” when a parameter following a header
of the GPIB command was evaluated by the E4980A/AL as
being outside its legal input range or is otherwise
inconsistent with the E4980A/AL’s capabilities.
5 32 Command Error (CME) Bit This bit is set to “1” if the following command errors occur.
• IEEE 488.2 syntax error

• The device received a TRIGGER (GET) bus
command inside a program message.
6 64 User Request (URQ) Bit always 0 (zero)
7 128 Power On (PON) Bit This bit is set to “1” when the E4980A/AL’s power supply has
been turned off and then on since the last time this
register was read.

Status Byte
Enabling the Event Status Register

An event status register summary (bit 5 of the status byte) is set to “1” when
any enabled bit in the standard event status register is set to “1.” To
enable/disable any bits of the standard event status register, you can set the
bits in the standard event status enable register. These bits correspond to bits
in the standard event status register. When a bit is set in the standard event
status enable register, it enables the corresponding bit in the standard event
status register to set bit 5 of the status byte (event status register summary bit)
to “1.” To set any bit in the standard event status enable register, the *ESE
command is used. The syntax of the *ESE command is:
*ESE <n>
Where, <n>: decimal number (0 to 255).
For example,
If <n> is equal to 34 (00100010), bit 1 and bit 5 are enabled as follows.
Bit No. of Event Status Register MSB LSB

76543210
Bit Pattern for *ESE command 00100010
When either bit 1 or 5 of the status byte is set to “1,” a service request will be
generated.
The default setting is *ESE 0 (all bits of the standard event status register are
disabled).
Bits 1 and 6 of the event status register are always 0 (zero). Thus it is
meaningless to mask these bits.

Status Byte

User’s Guide
9 Sample Program
This chapter describes sample programs of the E4980A/AL. The programs are
written in VBA macro.
Set Up Measurement Conditions and LCD Display

This application program sets the measurement conditions and the LCD
display of the E4980A/AL.
The program of Example 9-1 is described in detail below. Each explanation
below is inserted as a comment line in the program. For details on the VISA
functions, refer to the I/O Library Suite manual.
Configuration Assigns variables and enables error handling by the
subroutine named ErrorHandler
Open Instrument Assigns a USB address or GPIB address to the I/O bus.
Setup Start Sets the measurement conditions and the LCD display.
Setup End Closes the I/O bus.
ErrorProc Displays an error number when an error occurs.
ErrorCheck A subroutine to check whether an error occurs when the I/O
Library Suite function is executed.
SelectLCR A subroutine to change assignment of the I/O bus and
address setting according to the selection of a drop down list
in the B3 cell of the “Control Panel” sheet.
281
9- Sample Program
Example 9-1 Setting measurement conditions and screen display

Sub Example_1()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================
Dim defrm As Long 'Session to Default Resource

Manager
Dim AgtE4980A/AL As Long 'Session to instrument
On Error GoTo ErrorHandler
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================
ErrorCheck viOpenDefaultRM(defrm)
Call selectLCR(defrm, AgtE4980A/AL)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================
Cells(12, 2).Value = "Start to set configuration."
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "DISP:PAGE MSET" +

vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "DISP:LINE ""Control
Example""" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:IMP ZTD" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FREQ 1E6" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "VOLT 1" + vbLf, 0)

Sample Program
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "TRIG:SOUR BUS" + vbLf,

0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "AMPL:ALC ON" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "OUTP:DC:ISOL ON" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:IMP:RANG 1E4" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "BIAS:VOLT 5" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "APER LONG,4" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:SMON:VAC ON" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:SMON:IAC ON" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "TRIG:DEL 5" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:DEV1:MODE ABS" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:DEV2:MODE ABS" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:DEV1:REF 10000" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:DEV2:REF 1" +
vbLf, 0)
Cells(12, 2).Value = "End to set configuration."
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================

9- Sample Program
ErrorHandler:
' Display the error message

MsgBox "*** Error : " + Error$, MB_ICON_EXCLAMATION
End
End Sub
'===================================
' ErrorCheck
'===================================
Sub ErrorCheck(ErrorStatus As Long)

Dim strVisaErr As String * 500
'
' Check if VISA Error
'
If ErrorStatus <> VI_SUCCESS Then
Call viStatusDesc(defrm, ErrorStatus, strVisaErr)
MsgBox "*** Error : " + strVisaErr
End If
End Sub
'===================================
' SelectLCR
'===================================
Sub selectLCR(defrm As Long, AgtE4980A/AL As Long)

Dim Lcr As String
Lcr = Worksheets("ControlPanel").Range("B3").Value
If Lcr = "GPIB" Then
ErrorCheck viOpen(defrm, "GPIB0::17::INSTR", 0, 0,
AgtE4980A/AL)

Sample Program
End If
If Lcr = "USB" Then
ErrorCheck viOpen(defrm,
"USB0::2391::2313::MY12345678::0::INSTR", 0, 0, AgtE4980A/AL)
End If
End Sub

9- Sample Program
Detecting End of Measurement

This application program detects the end of measurement with the status byte
after the E4980A/AL is triggered.
The program of Example 9-2 is described in detail below.
subroutine named ErrorHandler.
Open Instrument Assigns a USB address or GPIB address to the I/O bus. Also
sets the attribute for timeout processing.
Setup Start Sets the trigger and status byte.
STB Check Waits until the status byte becomes 192. Displays the status
byte while waiting and again after processing.

Sample Program
Example 9-2 Detecting End of Measurement

Sub Example_2()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Result As String * 500
Dim Res As Variant
Dim i As Integer, StbStatus As Integer
Const TimeOutTime = 30000
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================
ErrorCheck viSetAttribute(AgtE4980A/AL,
VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE, TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*RST;*CLS" + vbLf, 0)

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*SRE 0" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 0" +
vbLf, 0)

9- Sample Program
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "TRIG:SOUR BUS" +

vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "APER LONG,3" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "ABOR;INIT" + vbLf, 0)

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "TRIG:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*SRE 128" + vbLf, 0)

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 16" +
vbLf, 0)
'===================================
' STB Check
'===================================
Do
ErrorCheck viReadSTB(AgtE4980A/AL, StbStatus)
Range("B12").Value = StbStatus
Loop Until StbStatus = 192
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*CLS" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viReadSTB(AgtE4980A/AL, StbStatus)

Range("D12").Value = StbStatus
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================

Sample Program
' ErrorProc
'===================================
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

9- Sample Program
Read Measurement Results

This section describes how to read measurement results in ASCII format and
BINARY format using sample programs. The following samples show three
methods for each data format: comparator, data buffer memory, and list
sweep.
Read measurement data in ASCII format (Comparator)

This application program reads measurement data in ASCII format with the
comparator function on.
The program of Example 9-3 is described below.
subroutine named ErrorHandle.
sets the time for timeout.
Setup Start Sets the trigger, comparator function, and data format.
Meas Read Reads the measurement data using the :FETCh? command,
separates the returned ASCII format character string data
with commas, and displays them individually.
Example 9-3 Read measurement results (ASCII format, comparator)

Sub Example_3_1()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Res As Variant
Dim Nop As Integer, i As Integer

Sample Program
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================
ErrorCheck viSetAttribute(AgtE4980A/AL, VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,
TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================
Nop = 4

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FORM ASC" + vbLf, 0)
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "COMP ON" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "INIT:CONT OFF" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "INIT:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
'===================================
' Meas Read
'===================================`
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FETCh?" + vbLf, 0)

ErrorCheck viVScanf(AgtE4980A/AL, "%t", Result)

9- Sample Program
Res = Split(Result, ",")

For i = 0 To Nop - 1
Cells(13, i + 2).Value = Val(Res(i))
Next i
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================`
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================`
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

Sample Program
Read measurement data in ASCII format (Data buffer memory)

This application program reads measurement data in ASCII format with the
comparator function on by using the data buffer memory.
subroutine named ErrorHandle
Setup Start Sets the trigger, comparator function, memory buffer, and
data format.
Mem Buf Read Reads the measurement data stored in the memory buffer,
separates the returned ASCII format character string data
with commas, and displays them individually. Then the
memory buffer is cleared.
Example 9-4 Read measurement results (ASCII format, data buffer memory)
Sub Example_3_2()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Res As Variant
Dim NoofMeas As Integer, i As Integer, j As Integer, k As
Integer
Dim outEventType As Long, outEventContext As Long
'===================================

9- Sample Program
' Open Instrument

'===================================
TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================
NoofMeas = 5

0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:DIM DBUF, " +
CStr(NoofMeas) + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:CLE DBUF" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:FILL DBUF" + vbLf,
0)
For i = 1 To NoofMeas
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL,
":INIT:IMM;:TRIG:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
Next i
'===================================
' Mem Buf Read
'===================================

Sample Program
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:READ? DBUF" +

vbLf, 0)

For i = 0 To (NoofMeas * 4) - 1
j = i Mod 4
k = i \ 4
Cells(k + 24, j + 2).Value = Val(Res(i))
Next i

0)
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================`
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================`
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

9- Sample Program
Read measurement data in ASCII format (List sweep)

This application program performs a list sweep and reads the measured value
and limit judgment at each measurement point in ASCII format.
Setup Start Sets the trigger, list sweep, and data format.
List Read Reads the measurement data, separates the ASCII format
character string data with commas, and displays them
individually.
Example 9-5 Read measurement results (ASCII format, list sweep)

Sub Example_3_3()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Res As Variant
Dim Nop As Long, i As Integer, j As Integer, k As Integer
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================

Sample Program
TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================
Nop = 7 * 4

0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "DISP:PAGE LIST" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:MODE SEQ" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:FREQ
1E3,2E3,5E3,1E4,2E4,5E4,1E5" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:BAND1 A,100,200"
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "INIT:CONT ON" + vbLf,
0)

9- Sample Program
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":TRIG:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
'===================================
' List Read
'===================================
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":FETC?" + vbLf, 0)

j = i Mod 4
k = i \ 4
Cells(k + 39, j + 2).Value = Val(Res(i))
Next i
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

Sample Program
Read measurement data in BINARY (comparator)

This application program reads the measurement data in BINARY format when
the comparator function is on.
Setup Start Sets the trigger, comparator function, and data format.
Meas Read Reads the measurement data using the :FETCh? command
and displays the returned BINARY format array data
individually.
Setup End Close the I/O bus.
BinaryAry Read Sets the address of the array in which measured data is
stored. A subroutine to set the returned BINARY format data
in the array.
Example 9-6 Read measurement results (BINARY format, comparator)

Sub Example_3_4()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Res() As Double
'===================================
' Open Instrument

9- Sample Program
'===================================
TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FORM REAL" + vbLf, 0)
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "INIT:CONT OFF" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "INIT:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
'===================================
' Meas Read
'===================================
Call Scpi_read_binary_double_array(AgtE4980A/AL, Res, Nop)
For i = 0 To 3
Cells(13, i + 9).Value = Res(i)
Next i

Sample Program
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub
'===================================
' BinaryAry Read
'===================================
Sub Scpi_read_binary_double_array(vi As Long, data() As

Double, Nop As Long)
Dim dblArray(10000) As Double
Dim paramsArray(3) As Long
Dim err As Long
Dim i As Long
Dim lf_eoi As String * 1
Nop = UBound(dblArray) - LBound(dblArray) + 1

paramsArray(0) = VarPtr(Nop)

9- Sample Program
paramsArray(1) = VarPtr(dblArray(0))
err = viVScanf(vi, "%#Zb%1t", paramsArray(0))

If err <> 0 Then MsgBox "Binary Error"
ReDim data(Nop - 1)
data(i) = dblArray(i)
Next
End Sub

Sample Program
Read measurement data in BINARY format (Data buffer memory)

This application program reads measurement data in BINARY format with the
comparator function on by using the data buffer memory.
Setup Start Sets the trigger, comparator function, memory buffer, and
data format.
Mem Buf Read Reads the measurement data stored in the memory buffer
and displays the returned BINARY format array data
individually. Then the memory buffer is cleared.
Example 9-7 Reads measurement results (BINARY format, data buffer memory)
Sub Example_3_5()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Res() As Double
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================

9- Sample Program
TimeOutTime)
NofMeas = 5
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================

0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FORM REAL" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:DIM DBUF, " +
CStr(NofMeas) + vbLf, 0)
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:FILL DBUF" + vbLf,
0)
'
For i = 1 To NofMeas
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL,
":INIT:IMM;:TRIG:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
Next i
'===================================
' Mem Buf Read
'===================================
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "MEM:READ? DBUF" +

vbLf, 0)

Sample Program
j = i Mod 4
k = i \ 4
Cells(k + 24, j + 9).Value = Res(i)
Next i
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================`
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

9- Sample Program
Read measurement data in BINARY format (List sweep)

This application program performs a list sweep and reads the measured value
and limit judgment at each measurement point in BINARY format.
Setup Start Sets the trigger, list sweep, and data format.
List Read Reads the measurement data and displays the returned
BINARY format array data individually.
Example 9-8 Read measurement results (BINARY format, list sweep)

Sub Example_3_6()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
Dim Res() As Double
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================

Sample Program

TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================

0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "DISP:PAGE LIST" +
vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FORM REAL,64" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:MODE SEQ" + vbLf,
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:FREQ
1E3,2E3,5E3,1E4,2E4,5E4,1E5" + vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
+ vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "INIT:CONT ON" + vbLf,
0)
'
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":TRIG:IMM" + vbLf, 0)
'===================================

9- Sample Program
' List Read

'===================================
j = i Mod 4
k = i \ 4
Cells(k + 39, j + 9).Value = Res(i)
Next i
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================`
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

Sample Program
Save/Recall
Save/Recall
This application program saves into/recalls from the E4980A/AL’s internal flash
memory the status data by using the save/recall function.
SaveRecall Saves into or recalls from the E4980A/AL’s register 1 the
status data according to the contents of a specified cell. Also
confirms whether each process finishes using the *OPC?
query command.
Example 9-9 Save/Recall

Sub Example_4()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Manager
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================

9- Sample Program
Save/Recall

TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' SaveRecall
'===================================
If Cells(9, 2).Value = "Save" Then

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":MMEM:STOR:STAT 1"
+ vbLf, 0)
Else
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1"
+ vbLf, 0)
End If
ErrorCheck viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*OPC?" + vbLf, "%t",
Result)
If Cells(9, 2).Value = "Save" Then

MsgBox ("State Save End")
Else
MsgBox ("State Recall End")
End If
Cells(15, 2).Value = Trim(Result)
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc

Sample Program
Save/Recall
'===================================
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

9- Sample Program
Read/Write correction data at specified frequency points.

This application program performs correction at user-specified frequencies and
reads/writes (uploads to E4980A/AL) the correction data.
Configuration Assigns variables and enables error handling
by the subroutine named ErrorHandler
Open Instrument Assigns a USB address or GPIB address to
the I/O bus. Also sets the time for timeout.
Setup Start Executes various setup steps to perform
data correction, such as displaying a
CORRECTION page, setting the correction
mode to SINGLE, and setting the correction
type to RX.
Exec Correction Performs OPEN/SHORT/LOAD correction.
Assigns the frequency of 1 kHz to
measurement point 1, 2 kHz to
measurement point 2, and 5 kHz to
measurement point 3 and then performs
correction.
Read Correction Reads the correction data, separates the
data, and displays them individually on a
sheet.
Correction data uploading Uploads the correction data. The string
parameters separated by commas are
generated from the displayed correction
data on the sheet and then sent to the
E4980A/AL.
ErrorProc Displays an error number when an error
occurs.
It is not possible to read/write the correction data in the correction based

on all frequency points.
Example 9-10 Read/Write correction data

Sub Example_5()
'===================================
' Configuration
'===================================

Sample Program

Manager
Dim Res1 As Variant
Dim SendCorr As String
Dim i As Integer, FreqPoint As Integer, Std As Integer,
Para As Integer, j As Integer, k As Integer
Dim Spot_Lop As Integer, Spot_Freq(10) As String
Dim CalData(200, 2, 1) As Variant
Const StdOpen As Integer = 0, StdShort As Integer = 1,
StdLoad As Integer = 2
Const PriPara As Integer = 0, SecondPara As Integer = 1
Dim err As Long
'===================================
' Open Instrument
'===================================
TimeOutTime)
'===================================
' Setup Start
'===================================

ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "DISP:PAGE CSET" +
vbLf, 0)

9- Sample Program
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:LOAD:TYPE RX" +

vbLf, 0)
0)
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:METH SING" +
vbLf, 0)
'===================================
' Exec Correction
'===================================
Spot_Freq(1) = "1E3"
MsgBox ("Connect Open Termination.")
For Spot_Lop = 1 To 3
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:SPOT" &
Trim(Str(Spot_Lop)) & ":FREQ " & Spot_Freq(Spot_Lop) + vbLf,
0)
Trim(Str(Spot_Lop)) & ":STAT ON" + vbLf, 0)
Trim(Str(Spot_Lop)) & ":OPEN" + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*OPC?" + vbLf,
"%t", Result)
Next Spot_Lop
MsgBox ("Connect Short Termination.")

Trim(Str(Spot_Lop)) & ":SHOR" + vbLf, 0)
"%t", Result)
Next Spot_Lop
MsgBox ("Connect Load Standard.")


Sample Program

Trim(Str(Spot_Lop)) & ":LOAD" + vbLf, 0)
"%t", Result)
Next Spot_Lop
MsgBox ("Calibration End.")
'===================================
' Read Correction
'===================================
ErrorCheck viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:USE:DATA:SING?" +

vbLf, "%t", Result)
Res1 = Split(Result, ",")
i = 0
For FreqPoint = 1 To 201
For Std = StdOpen To StdLoad
For Para = PriPara To SecondPara
CalData(FreqPoint - 1, Std, Para) = Res1(i)
j = i Mod 6
k = i \ 6
Cells(k + 13, j + 2).Value = Res1(i)
i = i + 1
Next Para
Next Std
Next FreqPoint
MsgBox ("Reading correction data completed.")
'===================================
' Correction data uploading
'===================================
SendCorr = ""

9- Sample Program
i = 0
For FreqPoint = 1 To 201
For Std = StdOpen To StdLoad
For Para = PriPara To SecondPara
j = i Mod 6
k = i \ 6
SendCorr = SendCorr & Cells(k + 13, j + 2).Value
i = i + 1
If i < 1206 Then
SendCorr = SendCorr & ","
End If
Next Para
Next Std
Next FreqPoint
ErrorCheck viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:USE:DATA:SING " +

SendCorr + vbLf, 0)
ErrorCheck viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, "*OPC?" + vbLf, "%t",
Result)
MsgBox ("Sending correction data completed.")
'===================================
' Setup End
'===================================
Call viClose(defrm)
End
'===================================
' ErrorProc
'===================================

Sample Program
ErrorHandler:
End
End Sub

9- Sample Program

User’s Guide
10 SCPI Command Reference
This chapter describes the SCPI command reference for the Keysight
E4980A/AL. It describes the commands using their abbreviated format in
alphabetical order. If you want to look up commands using their fully qualified
format, refer to the index for the desired SCPI command. If you want to look up
commands by their function, refer to SCPI command list by function.
319
10- SCPI Command Reference
Notational conventions in this command reference

This section describes the rules to read the description of the commands in this
chapter.
Syntax
A part with the heading “Syntax” describes the syntax to send a command from
the external controller to the E4980A/AL. A syntax consists of a command part
and a parameter part. A space is used to separate the command part and the
parameter part.
If there are several parameters, a comma is used instead as the separator
between adjacent parameters. Three periods (…) between commas indicate
that parameters in that part are omitted. For example,<numeric
1>,…,<numeric 4> indicates that four parameters,<numeric 1>,<numeric
2>,<numeric 3>, and <numeric 4>, are required.
String-type parameters,<string>,<string 1>, and so on, must be enclosed in
double quotation marks (“). Furthermore,<block> indicates block-format data.
You can omit the lowercase letters in syntax. For example,
“:BIAS:POLarity:CURRent” can be shortened to “BIAS:POL:CURR.”
The definitions of symbols used in the syntax are as follows.
<> Characters enclosed in this pair of symbols are necessary
parameters when sending a command.
[] A part enclosed in these parentheses can be omitted.
{} A part enclosed in these parentheses indicates that you must
select one of the items in this part. Individual items are
separated by a vertical bar (|).
For example, “BIAS:CURR 0.001,” “:BIAS:CURRENT:LEVEL 1E-3,” and so on
are valid for the syntax given below.
Syntax :BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel] <numeric>
Description
A part with the heading “Description” describes how to use the command or
the operation when executed.
Parameters
A part with heading “Parameters” describes parameters necessary for sending
the command. When a parameter is a value type or a string type enclosed with
<>, its description, allowable setup range, preset (factory-set) value, and so on
are given; when a parameter is a selection type enclosed by {}, the description
of each selection item is given.

SCPI Command Reference
Equivalent key
A part with the heading “Equivalent key” shows the operational procedure for
the front panel keys. An equivalent key has the same effect as a certain
command.
[Key] Indicates that you press the key named Key.
[Key] - Item Indicates a series of key operations in which you press [Key],
select the item called Item (softkey or field name) on the
displayed menu using the cursor keys, and then press the
softkey.

E4980A/AL commands
E4980A/AL commands
This section describes the commands specific to the E4980A/AL.
*CLS
Syntax *CLS
Description Clears the following:

• Error Queue
• Status Byte Register
• Standard Event Status Register
• Operation Status Event Register
• Questionable Status Event Register (No Query)
Equivalent key No equivalent key is available on the front panel.
*ESE
Syntax *ESE <numeric>

*ESE?
Description Sets the value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register. Refer to the
chapter on Remote Control.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 255
*ESR?
Syntax *ESR?
Description Reads out the value of the Standard Event Status Register. Executing this
command clears the register value. Refer to the chapter on Remote Control.
(Query Only)

E4980A/AL commands
*IDN?
Syntax *IDN?
Description Reads out the product information (manufacturer, model number, serial
number, and firmware version number) of the E4980A/AL. (Query Only)
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM INFO
*LRN?
Syntax *LRN?
Description Returns all the necessary commands to set the E4980A/AL at its present state.
The response can later be sent back to the E4980A/AL to place it in this state.
(Query Only)
*OPC
Syntax *OPC
Description When all the pending operations have ended, sets OPC bit (Bit 0) of the
Standard Event Status Register. (No Query)
*OPC?
Syntax *OPC?
Description 1 is read out at the completion of all pending operations. (Query Only)
*OPT?
Syntax *OPT?
Description Returns the installed option numbers on the E4980A/AL. (Query Only)
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM INFO
*RST
Syntax *RST

E4980A/AL commands
Description Resets the instrument settings. The preset state is different from that when
resetting is performed using the :SYSTem:PRESet. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Preset] - CLEAR SETTING - OK
*SRE
Syntax *SRE <numeric>

*SRE?
Description Sets the value of the Service Request Enable register. Refer to the chapter on
Remote Control.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 255
*STB?
Syntax *STB?
Description Returns the value of the Status Byte Register. Refer to the chapter on Remote
Control. (Query Only)
*TRG
Syntax *TRG
Description BUS triggers the unit and returns the result.
*TRG is not a query command, but returns the value. An error will occur when sending
the next command unless the value is read.
*TST?
Syntax *TST?
Description Does nothing. The self-test is not executed by this command in the case of the
E4980A/AL. Always returns 0. (Query Only)

E4980A/AL commands
*WAI
Syntax *WAI
Description Waits until all commands sent before this command have been executed. The
following commands are then executed. (No Query)
:ABORt
Syntax :ABORt
Description Resets the trigger system. The trigger state is then in the “Idle” state on the
state diagram. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - REF A - MEAS ABORT

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - B - MEAS ABORT
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN - MEAS OPEN - ABORT
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT - MEAS SHORT - ABORT
:AMPLitude:ALC
Syntax :AMPLitude:ALC {ON|OFF|1|0}

:AMPLitude:ALC?
Description Enables the Automatic Level Control (ALC).
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the Automatic Level Control

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the Automatic Level Control
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - ALC
:APERture
Syntax :APERture {SHORt|MEDium|LONG},<numeric>

:APERture?
Description Sets the measurement time mode and the averaging rate.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
SHORt Sets measurement time to Short

MEDium (Preset value) Sets measurement time to Medium
LONG Sets measurement time to Long
<Numeric>
Range 1 to 256
Preset value 1
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - MEAS TIME - SHORT

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - MEAS TIME - MED
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - MEAS TIME - LONG
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - AVE
:BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel]
Syntax :BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel] <numeric>

:BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel]?
Description Sets the DC bias current. Setting does not implicitly turn the DC bias ON. This
command is effective when option 001is installed. Without Option 001, this
command causes an error. If the bias is set by :BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel], the
query command returns error No. 230. The parameter resolution depends on
the current setting value.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range -100 m to 100 m1 (with option 001)

Unit A
1. Depending on signal level.
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - BIAS

[Meas Setup] > - MEAS SETUP - BIAS

E4980A/AL commands
:BIAS:POLarity:AUTO
Syntax :BIAS:POLarity:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}

:BIAS:POLarity:AUTO?
Description Enables the Automatic Polarity Control. This command is effective when option
001 is installed.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the Automatic Polarity Control

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the Automatic Polarity Control
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - BIAS POL - AUTO

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - BIAS POL - FIX
:BIAS:POLarity:CURRent[:LEVel]?
Syntax :BIAS:POLarity:CURRent[:LEVel]?
Description Returns the actual output level of the applied bias current. If the automatic
polarity control is turned ON, the inverse of the setting value may be returned
when the polarity is inverted. If the automatic polarity control is turned OFF,
the returned value is always the same as the one for :BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel].
(Query Only)
:BIAS:POLarity:VOLTage[:LEVel]?
Syntax :BIAS:POLarity:VOLTage[:LEVel]?
Description Returns the actual output level of the applied bias current’s voltage. If the
automatic polarity control is turned ON, the inverse of the setting value may be
returned when the polarity is inverted. If the automatic polarity control is
turned OFF, the returned value is always the same the as one for
:BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel]. (Query Only)
:BIAS:RANGe:AUTO
Syntax :BIAS:RANGe:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}

:BIAS:RANGe:AUTO?

E4980A/AL commands
Description Sets the DC bias range to AUTO (ON) or FIX (OFF).

When the DC bias range is FIX, ”#” is displayed in the BIAS field of the display.
When the DC bias range is set to FIX, resolution of the test signal voltage is
fixed, and accuracy is changed. For details, refer to “DC bias signal, Test signal
voltage” in data sheet.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Sets the DC bias range to ON

OFF or 0 Sets the DC bias range to OFF
:BIAS:STATe
Syntax :BIAS:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:BIAS:STATe?
Description Enables DC bias. DC bias is automatically turned off after recalling the state
from memory. When DC bias is set to ON, DC bias that has been set with
:BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel] or :BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel] is output.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the DC bias

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the DC bias
Equivalent key [DC Bias]
:BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel]
Syntax :BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel] <numeric>

:BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel]?
Description Sets the DC bias voltage. Setting does not implicitly turn the DC bias ON. If the
bias is set by :BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel], the query command returns error No.
230. The parameter resolution depends on the setting voltage value.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0,1.5,2 (without option 001)

-40 to 401 (with option 001)
Preset value 0
Unit V
1. Depending on signal level.
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - BIAS

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - BIAS
:COMParator:ABIN
Syntax :COMParator:ABIN {ON|OFF|1|0}

:COMParator:ABIN?
Description Enables the auxiliary BIN counting function of the comparator.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the auxiliary BIN counting function

OFF or 0(Preset value) Disables the auxiliary BIN counting function
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - AUX - ON

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - AUX - OFF
:COMParator:BEEPer
Syntax :COMParator:BEEPer {FAIL|PASS}

:COMParator:BEEPer?
Description Selects the condition for generating a beep sound: when sorting with the
comparator fails (sorts into OUT OF BIN) or passes (sorts into BINs 1 to 9 or
AUX BIN). The beep should be turned on by the :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
FAIL (Preset value) Sounds a beep when the test is failed

PASS Sounds a beep when the test is passed
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - BEEP - FAIL

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - BEEP - PASS
:COMParator:BIN:CLEar
Syntax :COMParator:BIN:CLEar
Description Clears all of the BIN limit value settings. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - BIN - CLEAR TABLE
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt:CLEar
Syntax :COMParator:BIN:COUNt:CLEar
Description Clears all BIN counts. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Display Format] - BIN COUNT - COUNT - RESET COUNT
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt:DATA?
Syntax :COMParator:BIN:COUNt:DATA?
Description Returns the comparator BIN count results (Query Only)
Query Response <Bin 1>,<Bin 2>,<Bin 3>,<Bin 4>,<Bin 5>,<Bin 6>,<Bin 7>,<Bin 8>,<Bin 9>,<Out
of Bin>,<Aux Bin><NLÊND>
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt[:STATe]
Syntax :COMParator:BIN:COUNt[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:COMParator:BIN:COUNt[:STATe]?
Description Enables the BIN count function.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the BIN count function

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the BIN count function
Equivalent key [Display Format] - BIN COUNT - COUNT - COUNT ON

[Display Format] - BIN COUNT - COUNT - COUNT OFF
:COMParator:MODE
Syntax :COMParator:MODE {ATOLerance|PTOLerance|SEQuence}

:COMParator:MODE?
Description Selects the limit mode of the comparator function. This command clears the
primary and secondary parameter limit values.
Parameter
Description
ATOLerance Sets the Comparator mode. This command clears the

limit table data and secondary limits at “ABS.”
PTOLerance (Preset value) Sets the Comparator mode. This command clears the
limit table data and secondary limits at “%.”
SEQuence Sets the Comparator mode. This command clears the
limit table data and secondary limits at “SEQ.”
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - MODE - ABS

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - MODE - %
[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - MODE - SEQ
:COMParator:SEQuence:BIN
Syntax :COMParator:SEQuence:BIN <Bin 1 Low>,<Bin 1 High>,... ,<Bin n High>

:COMParator:SEQuence:BIN?
Description Sets the low/high limit values of the BINs for the sequential mode of the
comparator function. These limits can be set only when the limit mode is set in
the sequential mode. Of course, the lower limit value must be lower than that
of the upper limit. If a BIN is not used, this command returns the values of
-9.9E37 and 9.9E37 for the lower and upper limits, respectively.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
<Bin 1 Low>
Unit Depends on :FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE]
<Bin n High>
Range of n 1 to 9
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "COMP:MODE SEQ" + vbLf, 0)

viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "FUNC:IMP RX" + vbLf, 0)
viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "COMP:SEQ:BIN -9.9e37,
100,110,120,130,140, 9.9e37,150" + vbLf, 0)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - Bin 1 LOW

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - Bin 1 - 9 HIGH
:COMParator:SLIMit
Syntax :COMParator:SLIMit <Low>,<High>

:COMParator:SLIMit?
Description Sets the lower/upper limit values for the comparator function’s secondary
parameter.
Parameter
<Low>,<High>
Preset value -9.9E+37, 9.9E+37

Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - 2nd LOW

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - 2nd HIGH
:COMParator[:STATe]
Syntax :COMParator[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:COMParator[:STATe]?
Description Enables the comparator function.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the comparator function

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the comparator function
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - COMP - ON

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - COMP - OFF
:COMParator:SWAP
Syntax :COMParator:SWAP {ON|OFF|1|0}

:COMParator:SWAP?
Description Enables the swap parameter function.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 9 BIN settings are used for the secondary parameter

OFF or 0 (Preset value) 9 BIN settings are used for the primary parameter
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - FUNC - SWAP PARAM
:COMParator:TOLerance:BIN[1-9]
Syntax :COMParator:TOLerance:BIN[1-9] <low>,<high>

:COMParator:TOLerance:BIN[1-9]?
Description Sets the lower/upper limit values of each BIN for the comparator function’s
tolerance mode. These limits can be set only when the limit mode is set to the
tolerance mode. When the lower limit or upper limit is not set, it returns
-9.9E37 and 9.9E37, respectively.
Parameter
<low>,<high>
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - LOW

[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - HIGH

E4980A/AL commands
:COMParator:TOLerance:NOMinal
Syntax :COMParator:TOLerance:NOMinal <numeric>

:COMParator:TOLerance:NOMinal?
Description Sets the nominal value for the comparator function’s tolerance mode. This can
be set only when the limit mode is set to the tolerance mode.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Preset value 0
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE - NOM
:CONTrol:CBIas:STATe
Syntax :CONTrol:CBIas:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CONTrol:CBIas:STATe?
Description Enables the current bias I/F. If the 42841A is connected, the preset status is
ON. This is available only for serial prefix number below:
MY464/SG464 and below for E4980A
MY542/SG542 and below for E4980AL
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the current bias I/F

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the current bias I/F
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM INFO - CURR BIAS I/F - ON

[System] - SYSTEM INFO - CURR BIAS I/F - OFF
:CONTrol:HANDler:STATe
Syntax :CONTrol:HANDler:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CONTrol:HANDler:STATe?
Description Enables the handler I/F.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the handler I/F

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the handler I/F
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM INFO - HANDLER I/F - ON

[System] - SYSTEM INFO - HANDLER I/F - OFF
:CONTrol:SCANner:STATe
Syntax :CONTrol:SCANner:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CONTrol:SCANner:STATe?
Description Enables the scanner I/F.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the scanner I/F

OFF or 0(Preset value) Disables the scanner I/F
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM INFO - SCANNER I/F - ON

[System] - SYSTEM INFO - SCANNER I/F - OFF
:CORRection:LENGth
Syntax :CORRection:LENGth <numeric>

:CORRection:LENGth?
Description Selects the cable length correction setting.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0|1|2|4
Preset value 0
Unit m
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - CABLE - 0 m

E4980A/AL commands
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - CABLE - 1 m

:CORRection:LOAD:STATe
Syntax :CORRection:LOAD:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CORRection:LOAD:STATe?
Description Enables LOAD correction.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables LOAD correction

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables LOAD correction
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - LOAD - ON

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - LOAD - OFF
:CORRection:LOAD:TYPE
Syntax :CORRection:LOAD:TYPE
{CPD|CPQ|CPG|CPRP|CSD|CSQ|CSRS|LPD|LPQ|LPG|LPRP|LSD|LSQ|LSRS|RX|Z
TD|ZTR|GB|YTD|YTR}
:CORRection:LOAD:TYPE?
Description Selects the measurement function of the reference values for load correction.
Parameter
Description
CPD (Preset value) Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cp-D”
CPQ Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cp-Q”
CPG Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cp-G”
CPRP Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cp-Rp”
CSD Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cs-D”
CSQ Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cs-Q”
CSRS Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Cs-Rs”

E4980A/AL commands
Description
LPD Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Lp-D”

LPQ Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Lp-Q”
LPG Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Lp-G”
LPRP Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Lp-Rp”
LSD Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Ls-D”
LSQ Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Ls-Q”
LSRS Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Ls-Rs”
RX Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “R-X”
ZTD Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Z-thd”
ZTR Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Z-thr”
GB Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “G-B”
YTD Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Y-thd”
YTR Sets the type of LOAD correction reference to “Y-thr”
Equivalent key The softkeys of [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FUNC field
:CORRection:METHod
Syntax :CORRection:METHod {SINGle|MULTiple}

:CORRection:METHod?
Description Selects the correction mode (Single or Multi). Scanner I/F should be installed
for the Multi mode.
Parameter
Description
SINGle (Preset value) Sets the correction mode to “SINGLE”

MULTiple Sets the correction mode to “MULTI”
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - MODE - SINGLE

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - MODE - MULTI

E4980A/AL commands
:CORRection:OPEN[:EXECute]
Syntax :CORRection:OPEN[:EXECute]
Description Executes OPEN correction based on all frequency points. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN - MEAS OPEN
:CORRection:OPEN:STATe
Syntax :CORRection:OPEN:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CORRection:OPEN:STATe?
Description Enables OPEN correction.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables OPEN correction.

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables OPEN correction.
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN - ON

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN - OFF
:CORRection:SHORt[:EXECute]
Syntax :CORRection:SHORt[:EXECute]
Description Executes SHORT correction based on all frequency points. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT - MEAS SHORT
:CORRection:SHORt:STATe
Syntax :CORRection:SHORt:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CORRection:SHORt:STATe?
Description Enables SHORT correction.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables SHORT correction

E4980A/AL commands
Description
OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables SHORT correction
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT - ON

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT - OFF
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:FREQuency
Syntax :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:FREQuency <numeric>

:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:FREQuency?
Description Sets the frequency for the specified measurement point. The mode selected by
:CORRection:METHod is chosen as the correction mode for the specified point.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 20 to 2M
Preset value 20
Unit Hz
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FREQ
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD[:EXECute]
Syntax :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD[:EXECute]
Description Executes LOAD correction at the specified measurement point. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FREQ - MEAS LOAD
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:STANdard
Syntax :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:STANdard <reference value for primary>,

<reference value for secondary>
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:STANdard?
Description Sets the standard reference values at the specified measurement point. The
measurement function for the reference values can be selected using
:CORRection:LOAD:TYPE.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
<reference value for primary>, <reference value for

secondary>
Preset value 0
Unit Depends on :CORRection:LOAD:TYPE
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - MODE - MULTI

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - REF A
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - REF B
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN[:EXECute]
Syntax :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN[:EXECute]
Description Executes OPEN correction at the specified measurement point. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FREQ - MEAS OPEN
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:SHORt[:EXECute]
Syntax :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:SHORt[:EXECute]
Description Executes SHORT correction at the specified measurement point. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FREQ - MEAS SHORT
:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:STATe
Syntax :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:STATe?
Description Enables the specified measurement point.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the specified measurement point

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the specified measurement point
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FREQ - ON

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - FREQ - OFF

E4980A/AL commands
:CORRection:USE[:CHANnel]
Syntax :CORRection:USE[:CHANnel] <channel>

:CORRection:USE[:CHANnel]?
Description Selects the channel number to be used for the Scanner I/F MULTI mode.
Parameter
<channel>
Range 0 to 127
Preset value 0
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - CH
:CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi]
Syntax :CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi] <channel>,<open1 A>,<open1 B>,<short1

A>,<short1 B>,<load1 A>,<load1 B>,<open2 A>,<open2 B>,<short2 A>,<short2
B>,<load2 A>,<load2 B>,.......,<open 201A>,<open201 B>,<short201
A>,<short201 B>,<load201 A>,<load201 B>
:CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi]? <channel>
Description Sets or returns the open/short/load data for the “Multi” correction mode. The
data for all 201 test points must be set. Any point with no correction data
should be set to 0. A query will return 1,206 data for 201 test points even if
there are some frequency points that were turned off. A value of 0 is returned
when there are the no correction data.
Parameter
<channel>
Range 0 to 127
<open(n) A>, <open(n) B>, <short(n) A>, <short(n)

B>, <load(n)A>, <load(n) B>
Preset value 0
Units OPEN: S; SHORT: ohms; LOAD: Depends on
Example of Use Dim Result As String * 50000

E4980A/AL commands
viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:USE:DATA? 0" + vbLf, "%t",

Result)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - MODE - MULTI

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - CH
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN A
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN B
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT A
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT B
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - LOAD A
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - LOAD B
:CORRection:USE:DATA:SINGle
Syntax :CORRection:USE:DATA:SINGle <open1 A>,<open1 B>,<short1 A>,<short1

B>,<load1 A>,<load1 B>,<open2 A>,<open2 B>,<short2 A>,<short2 B>,<load2
A>,<load2 B>,.......,<open201 A>,<open201 B>,<short201 A>,<short201
B>,<load201 A>,<load201 B>
:CORRection:USE:DATA:SINGle?
Description Sets or returns the open/short/load data for the “Single” correction mode. The
data for all 201 test must be set. Any point with no correction data should be
set to 0. A query will return 1,206 data for the 201 test points, even if there are
some frequency points that were turned off. A value of 0 is returned when there
are no correction data.
Parameter
<open(n) A>, <open(n) B>, <short(n) A>, <short(n)

B>, <load(n)A>, <load(n) B>
Preset value 0
Unit OPEN: S; SHORT: ohms; LOAD: Depends on

viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, "CORR:USE:DATA:SING?" + vbLf, "%t",
Result)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - MODE - SINGLE

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN A
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - OPEN B

E4980A/AL commands
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT A

[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - SHORT B
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - LOAD A
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION - LOAD B
:CURRent[:LEVel]
Syntax :CURRent[:LEVel] <numeric>

:CURRent[:LEVel]?
Description Sets the current level for the measurement signal. If the signal is set using
:VOLTage[:LEVel], the query command returns error No. 230.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 100m1
Unit A
Resolution 1
1. Depending on the DC Bias level.
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - LEVEL

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - LEVEL
:DISPlay:CCLear
Syntax :DISPlay:CCLear
Description Clears errors or caution messages from the display. (No Query)
:DISPlay:ENABle
Syntax :DISPlay:ENABle {ON|OFF|1|0}

:DISPlay:ENABle?
Description Enables display updates

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Enables display updates

OFF or 0 Disables display updates. The display will be blank.
Equivalent key [Display Format] - DISPLAY BLANK
:DISPlay:LINE
Syntax :DISPlay:LINE <String>

:DISPlay:LINE?
Description Enters arbitrary comments containing up to 30 ASCII characters in the

comment field. The string “USER COMMENT” is displayed if this is empty.
Parameter
<String>
Preset value “” (NULL)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - USER COMMENT - ADD CHAR
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - USER COMMENT - ENTER
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - USER COMMENT - NEXT
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - USER COMMENT - PREV
:DISPlay:PAGE
Syntax :DISPlay:PAGE
{MEASurement|BNUMber|BCOunt|LIST|MSETup|CSETup|LTABle|LSETup|CATAlo
g|SYSTem|SELF|MLARge|SCONfig|SERVice}
:DISPlay:PAGE?
Description Selects the page to be displayed.
Parameter
Description
MEASurement (Preset value) Sets displayed page to <MEAS DISPLAY>

BNUMber Sets displayed page to <BIN No. DISPLAY>

E4980A/AL commands
Description
BCOunt Sets displayed page to <BIN COUNT DISPLAY>

LIST Sets displayed page to <LIST SWEEP DISPLAY>
MSETup Sets displayed page to <MEAS SETUP>
CSETup Sets displayed page to <CORRECTION>
LTABle Sets displayed page to <LIMIT TABLE SETUP>
LSETup Sets displayed page to <LIST SWEEP SETUP>
CATAlog Sets displayed page to <CATALOG>
SYSTem Sets displayed page to <SYSTEM INFO>
SELF Sets display page to <SELF TEST>
MLARge Sets page to display measurement results in large
characters
SCONfig Sets displayed page to <SYSTEM CONFIG>
SERVice Sets displayed page to <SERVICE>
Equivalent key [Display Format] - DISPLAY FORMAT

[Display Format] - BIN No.
[Display Format] - BIN COUNT
[Display Format] - LIST SWEEP
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP
[Meas Setup] - CORRECTION
[Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE
[Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP
[Save/Recall]
[System] - SYSTEM INFO
[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG
[System] - SELF TEST
[System] - SERVICE
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD:DATA
Syntax :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD:DATA <most significant digit>

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD:DATA?

E4980A/AL commands
Description Selects the most significant digit in the fixed decimal point mode. If the
measurement function is set to D, Q, Td, %, this command does nothing.
Parameter
<most significant digit>
Range 1a|10a|100a|1f|10f|100f|1p|10p|100p|1n|10n|100n|1u|1
0u|100u|1m|10m|100m|1|10|100|1k|10k|100k|1M|10M|
100M|1G|10G|100G|1T|10T|100T|1P|10P|100P|1E|10E|
100E
Preset value 1n
Equivalent key [Display Format] - Fixed Decimal Point Menu - D.P. POS INCR +
[Display Format] - Fixed Decimal Point Menu - D.P. POS INCR -
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD[:STATe]
Syntax :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD[:STATe]?
Description Enables the fixed decimal point mode.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the fixed decimal point mode

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the fixed decimal point mode
Equivalent key [Display Format] - Fixed Decimal Point Menu - D.P. AUTO
[Display Format] - Fixed Decimal Point Menu - D.P. FIX
:FETCh[:IMPedance]:CORRected?
Syntax :FETCh[:IMPedance]:CORRected?
Description Returns a complex measurement result (R-X format) after correction. (Query
Only)
:FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]?
Syntax :FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]?

E4980A/AL commands
Description Returns a measurement result with the selected measurement function. See
the “Read Measurement Results” on page 290. (Query Only)
:FETCh:SMONitor:IAC?
Syntax :FETCh:SMONitor:IAC?
Description Returns the latest measured data for the AC current monitor. In case of
Vdc-Idc measurement, 0 is returned. (Query Only)
:FETCh:SMONitor:IDC?
Syntax :FETCh:SMONitor:IDC?
Description Returns the latest measured data for the DC current monitor. If the
current-level monitor is set to OFF, 0.0 is returned. (Query Only)
:FETCh:SMONitor:VAC?
Syntax :FETCh:SMONitor:VAC?
Description Returns the latest measured data for the AC voltage monitor. In case of
Vdc-Idc measurement, 0 is returned. (Query Only)
:FETCh:SMONitor:VDC?
Syntax :FETCh:SMONitor:VDC?
Description Returns the latest measured data for the DC voltage monitor. If the
voltage-level monitor is set to OFF, 0.0 is returned. (Query Only)
:FORMat:ASCii:LONG
Syntax :FORMat:ASCii:LONG {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FORMat:ASCii:LONG?
Description Enables the long format (+0.0000000000E+00). This is applied to the returned
values of :FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]?/:MEMory:READ?/*TRG.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Long format
OFF or 0 (Preset value) Short Format
:FORMat:BORDer
Syntax :FORMat:BORDer {NORMal|SWAPped}

:FORMat:BORDer?
Description When the data transfer format is set to the binary type, this command sets the
transfer order of each byte in data (byte order).
Parameter
Description
NORMal (Preset value) Specifies the byte order in which transfer starts from
the byte that includes the MSB (Most Significant Bit)
SWAPped Specifies the byte order in which transfer starts from
the byte that includes the LSB (Least Significant Bit)
:FORMat[:DATA]
Syntax :FORMat[:DATA] {ASCii|REAL[,64]}

:FORMat[:DATA]?
Description Selects the data transfer format (Binary or ASCII). This is applied to the
returned values of :FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]?/:MEMory:READ?/*TRG.
In the case of the binary mode, any value other than [,64] is acceptable but
ignored. A query returns REAL, 64 in case of using the binary format.
See the chapter on program examples for data transfer.
Parameter
Description
ASCii (Preset value) Sets the transfer mode to ASCII

E4980A/AL commands
Description
REAL Sets the transfer mode to Binary
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":FORM REAL" + vbLf, 0)
:FORMat:EXPonent:DIGit
Syntax :FORMat:EXPonet:DIGit {2|3}

:FORMat:EXPonet:DIGit?
Description Enables the three digit in exponent part. This is applied to the returned values
of :FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]?/:MEMory:READ?/*TRG. This setting is
remained even after preset/power off. This command is available at firmware
revision B.07.04 and above.
Parameter
Description
2 The digit of exponent part is set at 2 (Factory default)

3 The digit of exponent part is set at 3
:FREQuency[:CW]
Syntax :FREQuency[:CW] <numeric>

:FREQuency[:CW]?
Description Sets the frequency for normal measurement.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 20 to 2M1
Preset value 1k
Unit Hz
Resolution Depends on the setting frequency.
1. The range varys depending on the frequency option.

E4980A/AL commands
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - FREQ

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - FREQ
:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe:AUTO
Syntax :FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe:AUTO?
Description Enables the auto range function for DCR measurement.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) DCR measurement auto range ON

OFF or 0 DCR measurement auto range OFF
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCR RNG - AUTO

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCR RNG - HOLD
:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe[:VALue]
Syntax :FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe[:VALue] <numeric>

:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe[:VALue]?
Description Selects the DCR measurement range. This command turns the auto range
function OFF.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 10|100|1k|10k|100k
Preset value 100
Unit ohms
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCR RNG
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:MODE
Syntax :FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:MODE {ABSolute|PERCent|OFF}

:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:MODE?

E4980A/AL commands
Description Selects the deviation measurement mode.
Parameter
Description
ABSolute Sets the deviation measurement mode to “ABS”

PERCent Sets the deviation measurement mode to “%”
OFF(Preset value) Disables the deviation measurement mode
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DEV A - ABS

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DEV A - %
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DEV A - OFF
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DEV B - ABS
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DEV B - %
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DEV B - OFF
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence:FILL
Syntax :FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence:FILL
Description Executes a single measurement and enters two measured values (the primary
and secondary parameters) into each of the reference values for deviation
measurement. FUNC:DEV1:REF:FILL and FUNC:DEV2:REF:FILL are the
identical. (No Query)
The E4980A/AL operates in the same way with either DEV1 or DEV2.
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - REF A - MEASURE

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - REF B - MEASURE
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence[:VALue]
Syntax :FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence[:VALue] <numeric>

:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence[:VALue]?
Description Sets the reference value for deviation measurement.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Preset value 0

E4980A/AL commands
<Numeric>
Unit Depends on :FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE].
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - REF A

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - REF B
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe:AUTO
Syntax :FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe:AUTO?
Description Enables the auto-range function for impedance measurement.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Auto range ON

OFF or 0 Auto range OFF
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - RANGE - AUTO

[Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - RANGE - HOLD
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - RANGE - AUTO
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - RANGE - HOLD
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue]
Syntax :FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue] <numeric>

:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue]?
Description Selects the impedance measurement range. This command turns the auto
range function OFF.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 100m|1|10|100|300|1k|3k|10k|30k|100k
Preset value 100
Unit ohms

E4980A/AL commands
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - RANGE

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - RANGE
:FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE]
Syntax :FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE]
{CPD|CPQ|CPG|CPRP|CSD|CSQ|CSRS|LPD|LPQ|LPG|LPRP|LPRD|LSD|LSQ|LSRS
|LSRD|RX|ZTD|ZTR|GB|YTD|YTR|VDID}
:FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE]?
Description Selects the measurement function.
Parameter
Description
CPD(Preset value) Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cp-D”

CPQ Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cp-Q”
CPG Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cp-G”
CPRP Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cp-Rp”
CSD Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cs-D”
CSQ Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cs-Q”
CSRS Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Cs-Rs”
LPD Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Lp-D”
LPQ Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Lp-Q”
LPG Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Lp-G”
LPRP Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Lp-Rp”
LPRD1 Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Lp-Rdc”
LSD Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Ls-D

LSQ Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to 'Ls-Q'
LSRS Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Ls-Rs”
LSRD1 Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Ls-Rdc”
RX Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “R-X”

ZTD Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Z-thd”
ZTR Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Z-thr”

E4980A/AL commands
Description
GB Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “G-B”

YTD Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Y-thd”
YTR Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Y-thr”
VDID Sets the Impedance Parameter Type to “Vdc-Idc”
1. This can be set only when option 001, 030, 050, 100 or 200 is installed.
Equivalent key The softkeys of [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - FUNC field
The softkeys of [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - FUNC field
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IAC[:STATe]
Syntax :FUNCtion:SMONitor:IAC[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IAC[:STATe]?
Description Does nothing. The E4980A/AL always has the AC current-level monitor turned
ON. This function is provided because of its command compatibility with
4284A.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Does nothing

OFF or 0 Does nothing
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IDC[:STATe]
Syntax :FUNCtion:SMONitor:IDC[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IDC[:STATe]?
Description Enables the DC current-level monitor function.
This is available when option 001 is installed.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 DC current monitor function ON

OFF or 0 (Preset value) DC current monitor function OFF
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - IDC MON - ON

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - IDC MON - OFF
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VAC[:STATe]
Syntax :FUNCtion:SMONitor:VAC[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VAC[:STATe]?
Description Does nothing. The E4980A/AL always has its AC voltage-level monitor turned
ON. This function is provided because of its command compatibility with
4284A.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Does nothing

OFF or 0 Does nothing
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VDC[:STATe]
Syntax :FUNCtion:SMONitor:VDC[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VDC[:STATe]?
Description Enables the DC voltage-level monitor function.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 DC voltage monitor function ON

E4980A/AL commands
Description
OFF or 0 (Preset value) DC voltage monitor function OFF
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - VDC MON - ON

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - VDC MON - OFF
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA
Syntax :HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA
Description Outputs screen image to the controller. (Query Only)
Example of Use Dim Nop As Long

Dim GifData(10000) As Byte
Dim paramsArray(2) As Long
Dim i As Integer
Nop = UBound(GifData) - LBound(GifData) + 1
paramsArray(0) = VarPtr(Nop)
paramsArray(1) = VarPtr(GifData(0))
Call viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":HCOPY:SDUMP:DATA?" + vbLf, 0)
Call viVScanf(AgtE4980A/AL, "%#b", paramsArray(0))
Open "C:\TEST.gif" For Binary As #1
For i = 0 To Nop - 1
Put #1, , GifData(i)
Next i
Close
Pressing [Save/Recall] - SAVE DISPLAY key saves the current screen

image into the USB memory.
:INITiate:CONTinuous
Syntax :INITiate:CONTinuous {ON|OFF|1|0}

:INITiate:CONTinuous?
Description Enables the automatic trigger to change state from the “Idle” state to the “Wait
for Trigger” state. Refer to the chapter on Remote Control.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables automatic trigger state change

E4980A/AL commands
Description
OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables automatic trigger state change
:INITiate[:IMMediate]
Syntax :INITiate[:IMMediate]
Description Initiates the trigger to change from the Idle” state to the “Wait for Trigger”
state one time. Refer to the chapter on Remote Control. (No Query)
:LIST:BAND[1-201]
Syntax :LIST:BAND[1-201] {A|B|OFF},<low>,<high>
:LIST:BAND[1-201]?
Description Sets the limit values of the limit function for the list sweep measurement. When
A or B is the parameter, both lower and the upper limit should be input. If
either of them is not input, error No. 109 is returned. In the case of
OFF,<low>,<high> are optional.
Parameter
Description
A Sets limit test target to A (Primary parameter)

B Sets limit test target to B (Secondary parameter)
OFF (Preset value) Sets limit test target to OFF
<low>,<high>
Preset value Query returns -9.9E37, +9.9E37 for <low>, <high>,

respectively in the case of OFF.
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - LMT - A

[Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - LMT - B
[Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - LMT - 

E4980A/AL commands
[Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - LOW

[Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - HIGH
:LIST:BIAS:CURRent
Syntax :LIST:BIAS:CURRent <point 1>,<point 2>,.... ,<point n>

:LIST:BIAS:CURRent?
Description Clears the previous list sweep table, sets DC current sweep as the list sweep
parameter, and sets DC current points for the DC current list sweep. If the list
sweep is not set for DC current, the query command returns error No. 230. The
value 9.9E37 should be set for any empty points.
Parameter
<point n>
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit A
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - BIAS[A]
:LIST:BIAS:VOLTage
Syntax :LIST:BIAS:VOLTage <point 1>,<point 2>,.... ,<point n>

:LIST:BIAS:VOLTage?
Description Clears the previous list sweep table, sets DC voltage sweep as the list sweep
parameter, and sets DC voltage points for the DC voltage list sweep. If the list
sweep is not set for DC voltage, the query command returns error No. 230. The
Parameter
<point n>
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit V
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - BIAS[V]
:LIST:CLEar:ALL
Syntax :LIST:CLEar:ALL

E4980A/AL commands
Description Clears the list sweep setup. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - No. - CLEAR TABLE
:LIST:CURRent
Syntax :LIST:CURRent <point 1>,<point 2>,... ,<point n>

:LIST:CURRent?
Description Clears the previous list sweep table, sets AC current sweep as the list sweep
parameter, and sets AC current points for the AC current list sweep. If the list
sweep is not set for AC current, the query command returns error No. 230. The
Parameter
<point n>
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit A
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":LIST:CURR 0.01, 9.9e37, 0.02" +

vbLf, 0)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - LEVEL[A]
:LIST:DCSource:VOLTage
Syntax :LIST:DCSource:VOLTage <point 1>,<point 2>,... ,<point n>

:LIST:DCSource:VOLTage?
Description Clears the previous list sweep table, sets DC source voltage sweep as the list
sweep parameter, and sets DC source voltage points for the DC source voltage
list sweep. If the list sweep is not set for DC source voltage, the query
command returns error No. 230. The value 9.9E37 should be set for any empty
points.
Parameter
<point n>
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit A
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - DC SRC[V]

E4980A/AL commands
:LIST:FREQuency
Syntax :LIST:FREQuency <point 1>,<point 2>,... ,<point n>

:LIST:FREQuency?
Description Clears the previous list sweep table, sets frequency sweep as the list sweep
parameter, and sets frequency points for the frequency list sweep. If the list
sweep is not set for frequency, the query command returns error No. 230. The
value of 9.9E37 should be set for any empty points.
Parameter
<point n>
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit Hz
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":LIST:FREQ 1e2,2e2,5e2,9.9e37,1e3" +

vbLf, 0)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - FREQ[Hz]
:LIST:MODE
Syntax :LIST:MODE {SEQuence|STEPped}

:LIST:MODE?
Description Selects the sweep mode for the list sweep measurement function. In the case
of SEQ, one trigger makes all sweep point measurements. In the case of STEP,
one trigger makes single point-by-point measurements.
Parameter
Description
SEQuence (Preset value) Sets the list sweep mode to sequence mode
STEPped Sets the list sweep mode to step mode
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - MODE - SEQ

[Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - MODE - STEP
:LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:CLEar
Syntax :LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:CLEar

E4980A/AL commands
Description Clears the time stamp of the list sweep executed in sequential (SEQ) mode. (No
Query)
:LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:DATA
Syntax :LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:DATA
Description Returns the time stamp for each measurement point of the list sweep executed
in sequential (SEQ) mode. The time stamp indicates the measurement start
time at each point from trigger detection to each list point. If no time stamp
data exist, error No. 230 is returned. (Query Only)

viVQueryf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":LIST:SEQ:TST:DATA?" + vbLf, "%t",
Result)
:LIST:STIMulus:DATA
Syntax :LIST:STIMulus:DATA <Point 1 1stSTIM>,<Point 1 2ndSTIM>,<Point 2

1stSTIM>,<Point 2 2ndSTIM>,....,<point n 1stSTIM>,<point n 2ndSTIM>
:LIST:STIMulus:DATA?
Description Sets the list sweep with two parameters (first and secondary parameters). This
command allows you to sweep with two parameters. For example, you can
sweep at point no.1 with 1 kHz/1 V, point no. 2 with 2 kHz/1.1 V, and point no.
3 with 3 kHz/0.9 V. Both first and second parameters must be set unless the
second parameter of :LIST:STIMulus:TYPE command is set to NONE. The value
9.9E37 should be set for any empty points. When the IRANge is selected as the
secondary parameter in the :LIST:STIMulus:TYPE command, the value for
<Point n 2ndSTIM> can selected within the value of
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue].
Parameter
<Point n 1stSTIM>,<Point n 2ndSTIM>1
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit Depends on :LIST:STIMulus:TYPE
1. When the second parameter of :LIST:STIMulus:TYPEcommand is set to
NONE, this parameter is not needed.
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:STIM:TYPE FREQ, VOLT" + vbLf, 0)

E4980A/AL commands
viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:STIM:DATA 1E3, 1, 2E3, 1.1, 3E3,

0.9" + vbLf, 0)
:LIST:STIMulus:MDATa?
Syntax :LIST:STIMulus:MDATa?
Description Returns actual stimulus values for a list sweep with two parameters. This
command allows you to know the actual applied values after the auto polarity
function works. (Query Only)
:LIST:STIMulus:TYPE
Syntax :LIST:STIMulus:TYPE
{FREQuency|VOLTage|CURRent|BVOLtage|BCURrent|DCSVoltage},{NONE|IRA
Nge|FREQuency|VOLTage|CURRent|BVOLtage|BCURrent|DCSVoltage}
:LIST:STIMulus:TYPE?
Description Selects the parameter types for the list sweep with two parameters. If you do
not want to specify the second parameter, enter NONE for it. When you do
specify the second parameter, its measurement range can be set.
Parameter
First Parameter
FREQuency (Preset value) Selects frequency as the first stimulus parameter

VOLTage Selects voltage as the first stimulus parameter
CURRent Selects current as the first stimulus parameter
BVOLtage Selects bias voltage as the first stimulus parameter
BCURrent Selects bias current as the first stimulus parameter
DCSVoltage Selects DC source voltage as the first stimulus
parameter
Second Parameter
NONE (Preset value) Selects no second stimulus parameter. The same operation is
performed as the :LIST:FREQuency, :LIST:CURRent and
so on according to the first stimulus parameter.
IRANge Selects impedance range as the second stimulus parameter.

E4980A/AL commands
Second Parameter
FREQuency Selects frequency as the second stimulus parameter

VOLTage Selects voltage as the second stimulus parameter
CURRent Selects current as the second stimulus parameter
BVOLtage Selects bias voltage as the second stimulus parameter
BCURrent Selects bias current as the second stimulus parameter
DCSVoltage Selects DC source voltage as the second stimulus parameter
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:STIM:TYPE FREQ, VOLT" + vbLf, 0)

viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, "LIST:STIM:DATA 1E3, 1, 2E3, 1.1, 3E3,
0.9" + vbLf, 0)
:LIST:VOLTage
Syntax :LIST:VOLTage <point 1>,<point 2>,... ,<point n>

:LIST:VOLTage?
Description Clears the previous list sweep table, sets AC voltage sweep as the list sweep
parameter, and sets AC voltage points for the AC voltage list sweep. If the list
sweep is not set for AC voltage , the query command returns error No. 230. The
Parameter
<point n>
Range of n 1 to 201
Unit V
Example of Use viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":LIST:VOLT 0.5, 0.8, 1, 9.9e37, 1.5"

+ vbLf, 0)
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP - LEVEL[V]
:MEMory:CLEar
Syntax :MEMory:CLEar DBUF

E4980A/AL commands
Description Clears and disables the data buffer memory. After this command is executed,
measurement data will not be stored in the data buffer memory until execution
of the :FILL command. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Save/Recall] - SAVE DATA - SAVE & STOP

This key is a combination of both :MEMory:READ? and :MEMory:CLEar.
:MEMory:DIM
Syntax :MEMory:DIM DBUF,<numeric>

:MEMory:DIM?
Description Clears the data buffer memory, and sets the data buffer memory’s size. An
example of data buffer memory is shown in the chapter on program examples.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 1 to 201
Preset value 201
Resolution 1
:MEMory:FILL
Syntax :MEMory:FILL DBUF
Description Enables the data buffer memory to store measurement data. After execution of
this command, all measurement data will be stored in the data buffer memory.
If this has already been enabled, this command will do nothing. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Save/Recall] - SAVE DATA - START LOG
:MEMory:READ?
Syntax :MEMory:READ? DBUF
Description Places the data in the data buffer memory into the output buffer. The output
format of this command is the same as the one for FETC:IMP?. In the preset
state, “9.90000E+37,+9.90000E+37,-1,+0” is returned the number of times
specified by :MEMory:DIM. When the data buffer memory is not filled to the
specified size (specified by the :MEMory:DIM command),
“9.90000E+37,+9.90000E+37,-1,+0” remains for the rest of the data locations.
(Query Only)

E4980A/AL commands
Equivalent key [Save/Recall] - SAVE DATA - SAVE & STOP

This key is a combination of both :MEMory:READ? and :MEMory:CLEar.
:MMEMory:DELete[:REGister]
Syntax :MMEMory:DELete[:REGister] <numeric>
Description Deletes the state from the memories. Numbers 0 to 9 are located in the
internal memory, while Nos. 10 to 19 are situated in the external USB memory.
(No Query)
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 19
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [Save/Recall] - No. - DELETE
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe[:REGister]
Syntax :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe[:REGister] <numeric>
Description Loads the state from the memories. Numbers 0 to 9 are located in the internal
memory, while Nos. 10 to 19 are situated in the external USB memory. (No
Query)
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 19
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [Save/Recall] - No. - RECALL
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe[:REGister]
Syntax :MMEMory:STORe:STATe[:REGister] <numeric>
Description Stores the state to the memories. Numbers 0 to 9 are located in the internal
memory, while Nos. 10 to 19 are situated in the external USB memory. Number
10 is automatically recalled. (No Query)

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 19
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [Save/Recall] - No. - SAVE
:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:AUTO
Syntax :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}

:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:AUTO?
Description Enables the auto range function for DCI.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Enables the auto range function for DCI

OFF or 0 Disables the auto range function for DCI
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCI RNG - AUTO

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCI RNG - HOLD
:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:VALue
Syntax :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:VALue <numeric>

:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:VALue?
Description Selects DC isolation range. This command turns the auto range function OFF.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 20 |200 |2 m|20 m|100 m

Preset value 20 m
Unit A
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCI RNG

E4980A/AL commands
:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation[:STATe]
Syntax :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:OUTPut:DC:ISOLation[:STATe]?
Description Enables DC Isolation.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables DC Isolation
OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables DC Isolation
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCI ISO - ON

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DCI ISO - OFF
:OUTPut:HPOWer
Syntax :OUTPut:HPOWer {ON|OFF|1|0}

:OUTPut:HPOWer?
Description Does nothing. This function is provided because of its command compatibility
with 4284A.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Does nothing
OFF or 0 (Preset value) Does nothing
:SOURce:DCSource:STATe
Syntax :SOURce:DCSource:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:SOURce:DCSource:STATe?

E4980A/AL commands
Description Enables the DC Source. The DC source is automatically turned OFF after
recalling the state from memory. When DC Source is set to ON, DC Source
voltage that has been set with :SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel] is output.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the DC Source

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the DC Source
Equivalent key [DC Source]
:SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel]
Syntax :SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel] <numeric>

:SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel]?
Description Sets the DC source’s voltage level
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range -10 to 10
Preset value 0
Unit V
Resolution 1m
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - DC SRC
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Syntax :STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Description Returns the value of the Operation Status Condition register. (Query Only)

E4980A/AL commands
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle
Syntax :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <numeric>

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
Description Sets the value of the Operation Status Enable register.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range -32,768 to 32,767

Preset value 0
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]
Syntax :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]
Description Returns the value of the Operation Status Event register. (Query Only)
:SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
Syntax :SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
Description Produces a beep sound. Even if the beep sound is disabled by the
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe command, a beep sound is still produced. (No Query)
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe
Syntax :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe?
Description Enables a beep sound.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables a beep sound

E4980A/AL commands
Description
OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables a beep sound
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - BEEPER ENABLED - ON

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - BEEPER ENABLED - OFF
:SYSTem:BEEPer:TONE
Syntax :SYSTem:BEEPer:TONE <numeric>

:SYSTem:BEEPer:TONE?
Description Selects a beep sound tone.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 1 to 5
Preset value 3
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - BEEPER TONE - TONE 1

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - BEEPER TONE - TONE 2
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <numeric>

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess?
Description Sets the GPIB address.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 30
Preset value 17

E4980A/AL commands
<Numeric>
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - GPIB ADDR
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:ADDRess
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:ADDRess <String>

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:ADDRess?
Description Sets the static IP address.
Parameter
<String>
Preset value "192.168.1.101"
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - MANUAL IP ADDR - ENTER
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:AIP[:STATe]
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:AIP[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:AIP[:STATe]?
Description Enables automatic IP address setup. The E4980A/AL can obtain an available IP
address at 169.254.xxx.xxx.
This command works with the firmware revision 1.0x. Do not use this
command with the firmware revision 2.00 or later.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Enables automatic IP address setup

OFF or 0 Disables automatic IP address setup
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - AUTO-IP ENABLED - ON

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - AUTO-IP ENABLED - OFF

E4980A/AL commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFigure
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFigure {AUTO|MANual}

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFigure?
Description Selects automatic obtaining or manual setting for the IP address obtaining
method.
This command is available for the firmware revision 2.00 or later.
Parameter
Description
AUTO (Preset value) Sets the IP address obtaining method to AUTO

MANual Sets the IP address obtaining method to MAN
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - IP CONFIG - AUTO

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - IP CONFIG - MAN
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONTrol
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONTrol
Description Returns the SOCKET control port number. If the parser is a SOCKET, it will
return a number from 5000 to 5100. Otherwise, 0. (Query Only)
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:ADDRess?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:ADDRess?
Description Returns the current IP address. (Query Only)
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:DGATeway?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:DGATeway?
Description Returns the current Gateway address. (Query Only)

E4980A/AL commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:SMASk?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:SMASk?
Description Returns the current Subnet Mask. (Query Only)
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DGATeway
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DGATeway <String>

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DGATeway?
Description Sets the static Gateway address.
Parameter
<String>
Preset value "0.0.0.0"
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - MANUAL GATEWAY - ENTER
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DHCP[:STATe]
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DHCP[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DHCP[:STATe]?
Description Enables DHCP to obtain the IP address from a DHCP server.
This command works with Firmware version 1.0x. Do not use this
command with Firmware version 2.00 or later.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 (Preset value) Enables the DHCP function

OFF or 0 Disables the DHCP function
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DHCP ENABLED - ON

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DHCP ENABLED - OFF

E4980A/AL commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:MAC?
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:MAC?
Description Returns the MAC address. (Query Only)
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:PRESet
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:PRESet
Description Presets the network settings and restarts the network. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Preset} - LAN RESET - OK
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:RESTart
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:RESTart
Description Restarts the network (No Query)

This is available only for serial prefix number below:
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DHCP ENABLED - RESTART NETWORK1

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - AUTO-IP ENABLED - RESTART NETWORK1
[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - IP CONFIG - RESTART NETWORK2

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - MANUAL IP ADDR - RESTART NETWORK
[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - MANUAL SUBNET MASK - RESTART NETWORK
[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - MANUAL GATEWAY - RESTART NETWORK
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SMASk
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SMASk <String>

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SMASk?
Description Sets the static Subnet Mask.
1. This key is for the firmware revision1.0x

2. This key is for the firmware revision 2.00 or later.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
<String>
Preset value "255.255.255.0"
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - MANUAL SUBNET MASK - ENTER
:SYSTem:DATE
Syntax :SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>

:SYSTem:DATE?
Description Sets the time in the internal clock.
Parameter
<year>
Range 2000 to 2098

Unit years
Resolution 1
<month>
Range 1 to 12
Unit months
Resolution 1
<day>
Range 1 to 31
Unit days
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DATE/TIME - DATE - YEAR

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DATE/TIME - DATE - MONTH
[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DATE/TIME - DATE - DAY

E4980A/AL commands
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Syntax :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Description Returns an error message. (Query Only)
:SYSTem:KLOCk
Syntax :SYSTem:KLOCk {ON|OFF|1|0}

:SYSTem:KLOCk?
Description Enables the front panel key lock. If the key lock’s pin on the handle interface is
set to “LOCK,” touching the keys will have no effect.
Parameter
Description
ON or 1 Enables the Front panel key lock

OFF or 0 (Preset value) Disables the Front panel key lock
Equivalent key [Local/Lock]
:SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer[:NAME]
Syntax :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer[:NAME] <string>
Description This command only accepts two non-case sensitive strings “Agilent
Technologies” and “Keysight Technologies”. A power cycle or reboot is required
for the changes in the instrument’s manufacturer string to take effect and to be
recognized in the Keysight Connection Expert. The string will remain for the
subsequent power cycle or reboot.
:SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer:DEFault
Syntax :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer:DEFault
Description This command sets the instrument’s manufacturer to “Keysight Technologies”

which is the default manufacturer setting.

E4980A/AL commands
:SYSTem:PRESet
Syntax :SYSTem:PRESet
Description Resets the instrument settings and correction data. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Preset] - CLEAR SET&CORR - OK
:SYSTem:RESTart
Syntax :SYSTem:RESTart
Description Reboots the instrument immediately. (No Query)

This is available only for serial prefix number below:
:SYSTem:TIME
Syntax :SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>

:SYSTem:TIME?
Description Sets the date in the internal clock.
Parameter
<hour>
Range 0 to 23
Unit hours
Resolution 1
<minute>
Range 0 to 59
Unit minutes
Resolution 1
<second>
Range 0 to 59

E4980A/AL commands
<second>
Unit seconds
Resolution 1
Equivalent key [System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DATE/TIME - TIME - HOUR

[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DATE/TIME - TIME - MINUTE
[System] - SYSTEM CONFIG - DATE/TIME - TIME - SECOND
:TRIGger:DELay
Syntax :TRIGger:DELay <numeric>

:TRIGger:DELay?
Description Sets the step delay time.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 999
Preset value 0
Unit s
Resolution 100 
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - STEP DLY
:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Syntax :TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Description Triggers the unit. (No Query)
Equivalent key [Trigger]
:TRIGger:SOURce
Syntax :TRIGger:SOURce {INTernal|HOLD|EXTernal|BUS}

:TRIGger:SOURce?
Description Selects the trigger mode.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
Description
INTernal (Preset value) Sets trigger source to “internal”

HOLD Sets trigger source to “manual”
EXTernal Sets trigger source to “external connector on the rear
panel”
BUS Sets trigger source to “GPIB/LAN/USB”
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - TRIG - INT

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - TRIG - MAN
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - TRIG - EXT
[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - TRIG - BUS
:TRIGger:TDEL
Syntax :TRIGger:TDEL <numeric>

:TRIGger:TDEL?
Description Sets the trigger delay time.
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 999
Preset value 0
Unit s
Resolution 100 
Equivalent key [Meas Setup] - TRIG SETUP - TRIG DLY
:VOLTage[:LEVel]
Syntax :VOLTage[:LEVel] <numeric>

:VOLTage[:LEVel]?
Description Sets the voltage level for the measurement signal. If the signal is set by
:CURRent[:LEVel], the query command returns error No. 230.

E4980A/AL commands
Parameter
<Numeric>
Range 0 to 201
Preset value 1
Unit V
Resolution 100 
1. Depending on the DC bias level.
Equivalent key [Display Format] - MEAS DISPLAY - LEVEL

[Meas Setup] - MEAS SETUP - LEVEL

Command list
Command list
List by function
SCPI command list according to function
Function Setting/execution item Command
Abort Abort trigger :ABORt

Amplitude ALC On/Off :AMPLitude:ALC
Aperture Integ time and averaging setup :APERture
Comparator Auxiliary BIN counting function :COMParator:ABIN
On/Off
Beep Condition Selection :COMParator:BEEPer
Bin Limit value setting clear :COMParator:BIN:CLEar
BIN counts clear :COMParator:BIN:COUNt:CLEar
BIN count results readout :COMParator:BIN:COUNt:DATA
BIN count function On/Off :COMParator:BIN:COUNt[:STATe]
Limit mode setup :COMParator:MODE
Bin limit values setup for the :COMParator:SEQuence:BIN
sequential mode
BIN Limit values setup for the :COMParator:SLIMit
secondary parameter
Comparator function On/Off :COMParator[:STATe]
Swap parameter function On/Off :COMParator:SWAP
BIN limit values setup for the :COMParator:TOLerance:BIN[1-9]
tolerance mode
Nominal value setup for the :COMParator:TOLerance:NOMinal
tolerance mode
Control Handler I/F enable :CONTrol:HANDler:STATe
Scanner I/F enable :CONTrol:SCANner:STATe

Command list
Correction Cable length correction setup :CORRection:LENGth

LOAD correction On/Off :CORRection:LOAD:STATe
Measurement function selection for :CORRection:LOAD:TYPE
the load correction
Correction mode selection :CORRection:METHod
OPEN correction execution :CORRection:OPEN[:EXECute]
OPEN correction On/Off :CORRection:OPEN:STATe
SHORT correction execution :CORRection:SHORt[:EXECute]
SHORT correction On/Off :CORRection:SHORt:STATe
Frequency setup for a specified :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:FREQuency
measurement point
LOAD execution at a specified :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD[:EXECute]
measurement point
LOAD reference values setup at a :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:STANdard
specified measurement point
OPEN reference values setup at a :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN[:EXECute]
SHORT reference values setup at a :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:SHORt[:EXECute]
Specified measurement point enable :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:STATe
Channel selection for MULTI mode :CORRection:USE[:CHANnel]
MULTI mode correction data readout :CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi]
SINGLE mode correction data :CORRection:USE:DATA:SINGle
readout
Current Current level setup :CURRent[:LEVel]
Data buffer Data buffer memory clear and :MEMory:CLEar
memory disable
Data buffer memory size setup :MEMory:DIM
Data buffer memory enable :MEMory:FILL
Data buffer memory readout :MEMory:READ

Command list
DC bias DC bias current setup :BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel]

Automatic Polarity Control On/Off :BIAS:POLarity:AUTO
Actual applied bias current output :BIAS:POLarity:CURRent[:LEVel]
level readout
Actual applied bias voltage output :BIAS:POLarity:VOLTage[:LEVel]
level readout
DC Bias On/Off :BIAS:STATe
DC bias voltage setup :BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel]
DC Output DCI auto range enable :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:AUTO
DC isolation range selection :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:VALue
DC Isolation Enable :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation[:STATe]
Dummy command (for 4284A :OUTPut:HPOWer
compatibility)
DC Source DC Source enable :SOURce:DCSource:STATe
DC source voltage setup :SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel]
Display Error or caution messages on display :DISPlay:CCLear
clear
Display update enable :DISPlay:ENABle
Comment line entry :DISPlay:LINE
Displayed page selection :DISPlay:PAGE
Most siginificant digit selection :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD:DATA
Fixed decimal point mode enable :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD[:STATe]
Fetch Complex measurement result :FETCh[:IMPedance]:CORRected
readout
Measurement result return with the :FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted]
selected measurement function
AC current monitor data readout :FETCh:SMONitor:IAC
DC current monitor data readout :FETCh:SMONitor:IDC
AC voltage monitor data readout :FETCh:SMONitor:VAC
DC voltage monitor data readout :FETCh:SMONitor:VDC

Command list
Format Long format enable :FORMat:ASCii:LONG

Data transfer order selection in :FORMat:BORDer
binary format
Data transfer format selection :FORMat[:DATA]
Exponent part digit number :FORMat:EXPonent:DIGit
selection (ASCII format)
Frequency Frequency setup :FREQuency[:CW]
Function DCR measurement auto range :FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe:AUTO
function enable
DCR measurement range selection :FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe[:VALue]
Deviation measurement mode :FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:MODE
selection
Measurement execution for :FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence:FILL
reference values of the deviation
measurement
Reference value setup for deviation :FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence[:VALue]
measurement
Impedance measurement auto range :FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe:AUTO
enable
Impedance measurement range :FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue]
selection
Measurement function selection :FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE]
Dummy command (for 4284A :FUNCtion:SMONitor:IAC[:STATe]
compatibility)
DC current level monitor enable :FUNCtion:SMONitor:IDC[:STATe]
Dummy command (for 4284A :FUNCtion:SMONitor:VAC[:STATe]
compatibility)
DC voltage level monitor enable :FUNCtion:SMONitor:VDC[:STATe]
Hcopy Screen image output to the :HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA
controller

Command list
IEEE Error queue and register clear *CLS

Standard Event Status Enable *ESE
Register setup
Standard Event Status Register *ESR
readout
Product information readout *IDN
Setup record and play *LRN
Operation completes readout *OPC
Installed option numbers readout *OPT
Instrument setting reset *RST
Service Request Enable register *SRE
setup
Status Byte register readout *STB
Trigger *TRG
Dummy command (for 4284A *TST
compatibility)
Waits *WAI
Initiate Auto trigger state initiate enable :INITiate:CONTinuous
WAIT FOR TRIGGER initiate :INITiate[:IMMediate]

Command list
List Sweep Limit value setup for the list sweep :LIST:BAND[1-201]
measurement.
DC current list sweep setup :LIST:BIAS:CURRent
DC voltage list sweep setup :LIST:BIAS:VOLTage
List sweep setup clear :LIST:CLEar:ALL
AC current list sweep setup :LIST:CURRent
DC source list sweep setup :LIST:DCSource:VOLTage
Frequecy list sweep setup :LIST:FREQuency
Sweep mode selection for list sweep :LIST:MODE
Time stamp clear of the executed list :LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:CLEar
sweep
Time stamp readout of the list sweep :LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:DATA
List sweep setup parameter :LIST:STIMulus:DATA
Actual stimulus values readout for :LIST:STIMulus:MDATa
list sweep parameter
Parameter types selection for list :LIST:STIMulus:TYPE
sweep parameter
AC voltage list sweep setup :LIST:VOLTage
Save/Recall State delete from the memories :MMEMory:DELete[:REGister]
State Load from the memories :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe[:REGister]
State Store to the memories :MMEMory:STORe:STATe[:REGister]
Status Operation Status Condition register :STATus:OPERation:CONDition
register readout
Operation Status Enable register :STATus:OPERation:ENABle
setup
Operation Status Event register :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]
return

Command list
System Beeps :SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]

Beep sound enable :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe
Beep sound tone selection :SYSTem:BEEPer:TONE
GPIB address setup :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
Static IP address setup :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:ADDRess
IP address obtaining method :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFigure
SOCKET control port number :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONTrol
readout
Current IP address readout :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:ADDRess
Current Gateway address readout :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:DGATewa
y
Current Subnet Mask readout :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRent:SMASk
Static Gateway address setup :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DGATeway
MAC address readout :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:MAC
Network preset :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:PRESet
Static Subnet Mask setup :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SMASk
Clock time setup :SYSTem:DATE
Error message readout :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]
Front panel key lock enable :SYSTem:KLOCk
Instrument setting and correction :SYSTem:PRESet
data reset
Clock date setup :SYSTem:TIME
Trigger Step delay time setup :TRIGger:DELay
Trigger :TRIGger[:IMMediate]
Selects the trigger mode :TRIGger:SOURce
Trigger delay time setup :TRIGger:TDEL
Voltage Voltage level setup :VOLTage[:LEVel]

Command list
Command Tree
Command Parameter Note
*CLS [No Query]

*ESE < numeric>
*ESR < numeric> [Query only]
*IDN < string> [Query only]
*LRN < string> [Query only]
*OPC [No Query]
*OPT < string> [Query only]
*RST [No Query]
*SRE < numeric>
*STB < numeric> [Query only]
*TRG [No Query]
*TST < numeric> [Query only]
*WAI [No Query]
:ABORt [No Query]
:AMPLitude
:ALC {ON|OFF|1|0}
:APERture {SHORt|MEDium|LONG },< numeric>
:BIAS
:CURRent
[:LEVel] < numeric>
:POLarity
:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}
:CURRent
[:LEVel] < numeric> [Query only]
:VOLTage
[:LEVel] < numeric> [Query only]
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:VOLTage

Command list
[:LEVel] < numeric>

:COMParator
:ABIN {ON|OFF|1|0}
:BEEPer {FAIL|PASS}
:BIN
:CLEar [No Query]
:COUNt
:CLEar [No Query]
:DATA < numeric>,< numeric>,< numeric>,< [Query only]
numeric>,< numeric>,< numeric>,<
numeric>,< numeric>,< numeric>,<
numeric>,< numeric>
[:STATe] {ON|OFF|1|0}
:MODE {ATOLerance|PTOLerance|SEQuence}
:SEQuence
:BIN < array>
:SLIMit < numeric>,< numeric>
:SWAP {ON|OFF|1|0}
:TOLerance
:BIN[1-9] < numeric>,< numeric>
:NOMinal < numeric>
:CONTrol
:HANDler
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:SCANner
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:CORRection
:LENGth < numeric>
:LOAD

Command list
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:TYPE {CPD|CPQ|CPG|CPRP|CSD|CSQ|CSRS|LP
D|LPQ|LPG|LPRP|LSD|LSQ|LSRS|RX|ZTD|Z
TR|GB|YTD|YTR}
:METHod {SINGle|MULTiple}
:OPEN
[:EXECute] [No Query]
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:SHORt
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:SPOT[1-201]
:FREQuency < numeric>
:LOAD
:STANdard < numeric>,< numeric>
:OPEN
:SHORt
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:USE
[:CHANnel] < numeric>
:DATA
[:MULTi] < numeric>,< array>
:SINGle < array>
:CURRent
[:LEVel] < numeric>
:DISPlay
:CCLear [No Query]

Command list
:ENABle {ON|OFF|1|0}
:LINE < string>
:PAGE {MEASurement|BNUMber|BCOunt|LIST|M
SETup|CSETup|LTABle|LSETup|CATAlog|S
YSTem|SELF|MLARge|SCONfig|SERVice}
[:WINDow]
:TEXT[1-2]
[:DATA]
:FMSD
:DATA < numeric>
:FETCh
[:IMPedance]
:CORRected < numeric>,< numeric> [Query only]
[:FORMatted] < numeric>,< numeric>,< numeric> [Query only]
:SMONitor
:IAC < numeric> [Query only]
:IDC < numeric> [Query only]
:VAC < numeric> [Query only]
:VDC < numeric> [Query only]
:FORMat
:ASCii
:LONG {ON|OFF|1|0}
:BORDer {NORMal|SWAPped}
[:DATA] {ASCii|REAL },< numeric>
:EXPonent:DIGit {2|3}
:FREQuency
[:CW] < numeric>
:FUNCtion
:DCResistance

Command list
:RANGe
:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}
[:VALue] < numeric>
:DEV[1-2]
:MODE {ABSolute|PERCent|OFF}
:REFerence
:FILL [No Query]
[:VALue] < numeric>
:IMPedance
:RANGe
:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}
[:VALue] < numeric>
[:TYPE] {CPD|CPQ|CPG|CPRP|CSD|CSQ|CSRS|LP
D|LPQ|LPG|LPRP|LPRD|LSD|LSQ|LSRS|LS
RD|RX|ZTD|ZTR|GB|YTD|YTR|VDID}
:SMONitor
:IAC
:IDC
:VAC
:VDC
:HCOPy
:SDUMp
:DATA < block> [Query only]
:INITiate
:CONTinuous {ON|OFF|1|0}
[:IMMediate] [No Query]

Command list
:LIST
:BAND[1-201] {A|B|OFF },< numeric>,< numeric>
:BIAS
:CURRent < array>
:VOLTage < array>
:CLEar
:ALL [No Query]
:CURRent < array>
:DCSource
:VOLTage < array>
:FREQuency < array>
:MODE {SEQuence|STEPped}
:SEQuence
:TSTamp
:CLEar [No Query]
:DATA < array> [Query only]
:STIMulus
:DATA < array>
:MDATa < array> [Query only]
:TYPE {FREQuency|VOLTage|CURRent|BVOLtag
e|BCURrent|DCSVoltage
},{NONE|IRANge|FREQuency|VOLTage|CU
RRent|BVOLtage|BCURrent|DCSVoltage}
:VOLTage < array>
:MEMory
:CLEar {DBUF} [No Query]
:DIM {DBUF },< numeric>
:FILL {DBUF} [No Query]
:READ {DBUF },< block> [Query only]
:MMEMory

Command list
:DELete
[:REGister] < numeric> [No Query]
:LOAD
:STATe
:STORe
:STATe
:OUTPut
:DC
:ISOLation
:LEVel
:AUTO {ON|OFF|1|0}
:VALue < numeric>
:HPOWer {ON|OFF|1|0}
:SOURce
:DCSource
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:VOLTage
[:LEVel] < numeric>
:STATus
:OPERation
:CONDition < numeric> [Query only]
:ENABle < numeric>
[:EVENt] < numeric> [Query only]
:SYSTem
:BEEPer

Command list
:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}
:TONE < numeric>
:COMMunicate
:GPIB
[:SELF]
:ADDRess < numeric>
:LAN
[:SELF]
:ADDRess < string>
:CONFigre {AUTO|MANual}
:CONTrol < numeric> [Query only]
:CURRent
:ADDRess < string> [Query only]
:DGATeway < string> [Query only]
:SMASk < string> [Query only]
:DGATeway < string>
:MAC < string> [Query only]
:SMASk < string>
:DATE < numeric>,< numeric>,< numeric>
:ERRor
[:NEXT] < numeric>,< string> [Query only]
:KLOCk {ON|OFF|1|0}
:PERSona
:MANufacture
[:NAME] < string>
:DEFault
:PRESet [No Query]
:TIME < numeric>,< numeric>,< numeric>
:TRIGger

Command list
:DELay < numeric>

:SOURce {INTernal|HOLD|EXTernal|BUS}
:TDEL < numeric>
:VOLTage
[:LEVel] < numeric>

Command list
Softkey Functions
Key Operation Function SCPI Command
[DC Bias] Turns ON/OFF DC bias :BIAS:STAT

[DC Source] Turns ON/OFF DC Source :SOUR:DCS:STAT
[Display
Format]
BIN COUNT
COUNT
COUNT Turns ON/OFF the BIN count function :COMP:BIN:COUN:STAT
OFF OFF
COUNT Turns ON/OFF the BIN count function :COMP:BIN:COUN:STAT
ON ON
RESET Clears all BIN counts :COMP:BIN:COUN:CLE
COUNT
BIN No.
COMP
OFF Turns OFFthe comparator function COMP:STAT OFF
ON Turns ON the comparator function COMP:STAT ON
DISPLAY Enables display update :DISP:ENAB
BLANK
LIST SWEEP
BLANK
LIST TABLE
NEXT Displays next page
PAGE
PREV Displays previous page
PAGE
MODE
SEQ Selects the sweep mode for the list sweep measurement :LIST:MODE SEQ
function
STEP Selects the sweep mode for the list sweep measurement :LIST:MODE STEP
function

Command list
MEAS
DISPLAY
BIAS Sets the DC bias :BIAS:VOLT:LEV
:BIAS:CURR:LEV
BLANK
Fixed
Decimal
Point Menu
D.P. Enables the fixed decimal point mode :DISP:WIND:TEXT[1-2]:DAT
AUTO A:FMSD:STAT
D.P. FIX Enables the fixed decimal point mode :DISP:WIND:TEXT[1-2]:DAT
A:FMSD:STAT
D.P. POS Selects the most siginificant digit at the fixed decimal :DISP:WIND:TEXT[1-2]:DAT
DECL - point mode A:FMSD:DATA
D.P. POS Selects the most siginificant digit at the fixed decimal :DISP:WIND:TEXT[1-2]:DAT
INCR + point mode A:FMSD:DATA
FREQ Sets the measurenent frequency :FREQ:CW
FUNC
Cp- ...
Cp-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPD
Cp-G Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPG
Cp-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPQ
Cp-Rp Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPRP
RETUR Returns to the softkey display screen one level higher
N
Cs- ...
Cs-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CSD
Cs-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CSQ
Cs-Rs Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CSRS
N
Lp- ...

Command list
Lp-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPD

Lp-G Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPG
Lp-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPQ
Lp-Rdc Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPRD
Lp-Rp Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPRP
N
Ls- ...
Ls-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSD
Ls-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSQ
Ls-Rdc Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSRD
Ls-Rs Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSRS
N
MORE
G-B Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE GB
R-X Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE RX
Vdc-Id Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE VDID
c
Y- ...
Y-d Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE YTD
Y-r Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE YTR
RETU Returns to the softkey display screen one level higher
RN
Z- ...
Z-d Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE ZTD
Z-r Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE ZTR
N
LEVEL Returns the actual applied bias output level :VOLT:LEV
:CURR:LEV

Command list
MEAS TIME
LONG Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER LONG
MED Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER MED
SHORT Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER SHOR
RANGE Selects impedance measurement range :FUNC:IMP:RANG:VAL
AUTO Enables the auto range function for the impedance :FUNC:IMP:RANG:AUTO
measurement ON
HOLD Enables the auto range function for the impedance :FUNC:IMP:RANG:AUTO
measurement OFF
[Local/Lock] Enables the front panel key lock :SYST:KLOC
[Meas Setup]
CORRECTION
CABLE
0m Selects the cable length correction setting :CORR:LENG 0
CH Selects the channel number to be used for MULTI mode :CORR:USE:CHAN
FREQ Sets the frequency for the specified measurement point CORR:SPOT[1-201]:FREQ
MEAS Executes the LOAD correction at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:
LOAD measurement point EXEC
MEAS Executes the OPEN correction at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN
OPEN measurement point :EXEC
MEAS Executes the SHORT correction at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:SHOR
SHORT measurement point :EXEC
OFF Enables the specified measurement point :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:STAT
OFF
ON Enables the specified measurement point :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:STAT
ON
FUNC
Cp- ...

Command list
Cp-D Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CPD
for the LOAD correction
Cp-G Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CPG
Cp-Q Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CPQ
Cp-Rp Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CPRP
N
Cs- ...
Cs-D Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CSD
Cs-Q Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CSQ
Cs-Rs Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE CSRS
N
Lp- ...
Lp-D Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LPD
Lp-G Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LPG
Lp-Q Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LPQ
Lp-Rp Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LPRP
N
Ls- ...
Ls-D Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LSD
Ls-Q Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LSQ

Command list
Ls-Rs Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE LSRS
for the load correction
N
MORE
G-B Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE GB
N
R-X Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE RX
Y- ...
Y-d Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE YTD
Y-r Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE YTR
Z- ...
Z-d Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE ZTD
Z-r Selects the measurement function of the reference values :CORR:LOAD:TYPE ZTR
LOAD
OFF Turns OFF the LOAD correction :CORR:LOAD:STAT OFF
ON Turns ON the LOAD correction :CORR:LOAD:STAT ON
LOAD A Executes the LOAD corection at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:
measurement point STAN
LOAD B Executes the LOAD corection at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:
MODE
MULTI Selects the correction mode :CORR:METH MULT
SINGLE Selects the correction mode :CORR:METH SING
OPEN

Command list
MEAS Executes the OPEN correction CORR:OPEN:EXEC

OPEN
ABORT Resets the trigger system, putting the trigger state in the :ABOR
IDLE STATE on the state diagram
OFF Turns OFF the OPEN correction CORR:OPEN:STAT OFF
ON Turns ON the OPEN correction CORR:OPEN:STAT ON
OPEN A Executes the OPEN correction at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN
measurement point :SEL
OPEN B Executes the OPEN correction at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN
REF A Sets the reference values of the standard at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:
REF B Sets the reference values of the standard at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:
SHORT
MEAS
SHORT
ABORT Resets the trigger system, putting the trigger state in the :ABOR
IDLE STATE on the state diagram
OFF Turns OFF the SHORT correction CORR:SHOR:STAT OFF
ON Turns ON the SHORT correction CORR:SHOR:STAT ON
SHORT A Executes the SHORT correction at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:SHOR
SHORT B Executes the SHORT corection at the specified :CORR:SPOT[1-201]:SHOR
SPOT No. Selects the cable length correction setting
LIMIT TABLE
AUX
OFF Turns OFF the auxiliary BIN counting function :COMP:ABIN OFF
ON Turns ON the auxiliary BIN counting function :COMP:ABIN ON
BEEP
FAIL Selects the condition for generating a beep sound :COMP:BEEP FAIL
PASS Selects the condition for generating a beep sound :COMP:BEEP PASS

Command list
BIN
CLEAR Clears the list sweep setup :LIST:CLE:ALL
TABLE
COMP
OFF Turns OFF the comparator function :COMP:STAT OFF
ON Turns ON the comparator function :COMP:STAT ON
FUNC
SWAP Turns ON/OFF the swap parameter function :COMP:SWAP
PARAM
High
CLEAR Clears the high limit values for the comparator function
CLEAR Sets the lower/upper limit values of each BIN for the
LINE comparator function tolerance mode
LOW Sets the upper limit values for the comparator function :COMP:SLIM
x(-1) secondary parameter
LOW
CLEAR Clears the lower limit values for the comparator function
CLEAR Sets the lower/upper limit values of each BIN for the
LINE comparator function tolerance mode
HIGH Sets the lower limit values for the comparator function :COMP:SLIM
x(-1) secondary parameter
MODE
% Selects the limit mode of the comparator function :COMP:MODE PTOL
ABS Selects the limit mode of the comparator function :COMP:MODE ATOL
SEQ Selects the limit mode of the comparator function :COMP:MODE SEQ
NOM Sets the nominal value for the tolerance mode of the :COMP:TOL:NOM
comparator function
LIST SETUP
FREQ[Hz]
FREQ Clears the previous list sweep table, sets frequency :LIST:FREQ
[Hz] sweep as the list sweep parameter, and sets frequency
points for the frequency list sweep

Command list
LEVEL [A] Clears the previous list sweep table, sets AC current :LIST:CURR
sweep as the list sweep parameter, and sets AC current
points for the AC current list sweep
LEVEL [V] Clears the previous list sweep table, sets AC current :LIST:VOLT
sweep as the list sweep parameter, and sets AC current
points for the AC current list sweep
MORE
BIAS Clears the previous list sweep table, sets DC current :LIST:BIAS:CURR
[A] sweep as the list sweep parameter, and sets DC current
points for the DC current list sweep
BIAS Clears the previous list sweep table, sets DC current :LIST:BIAS:VOLT
[V] sweep as the list sweep parameter, and sets DC current
points for the DC current list sweep
DC SRC Clears the previous list sweep table, sets the DC source :LIST:DCS:VOLT
[V] sweep as the list sweep parameter, and sets DC source
points for the DC source list sweep
N
FREQ[Hz]1
CLEAR Clears the sweep point that has been selected
LINE
FILL Fill the sweep points between selected two points with
LINEAR linear
FILL LOG Fill the sweep points between selected two points with
log
NEXT Displays the next page
PAGE
PREV Displays the previous page
PAGE
HIGH
CLEAR Clears the sweep point that has been selected
LINE
PAGE
PAGE

Command list
LMT
- Sets the limit values of the limit function for the list sweep :LIST:BAND OFF
measurement
A Sets the limit values of the limit function for the list sweep :LIST:BAND A
measurement
B Sets the limit values of the limit function for the list sweep :LIST:BAND B
measurement
LOW
CLEAR
LINE
PAGE
PAGE
MODE
SEQ Selects the sweep mode for the list sweep measurement :LIST:MODE SEQ
function
STEP Selects the sweep mode for the list sweep measurement :LIST:MODE STEP
function
No.
CLEAR Clears the list sweep setup :LIST:CLE:ALL
TABLE
PAGE
PAGE
MEAS SETUP
ALC
OFF Turns OFF the Automatic Level Control (ALC) :AMPL:ALC OFF
ON Turns ON the Automatic Level Control (ALC) :AMPL:ALC ON
AVG Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER
BIAS Sets the DC bias. :BIAS:VOLT:LEV
:BIAS:CURR:LEV

Command list
BIAS POL
AUTO Turns ON the Automatic Polarity Control :BIAS:POL:AUTO ON
FIX Turns OFF the Automatic Polarity Control :BIAS:POL:AUTO OFF
DC SRC Sets the voltage level of DC source :SOUR:DCS:VOLT:LEV
DCI ISO Sets the DC Isolation :OUTP:DC:ISOL:LEV:VAL
OFF Disables DC Isolation :OUTP:DC:ISOL:STAT OFF
ON Enables DC Isolation :OUTP:DC:ISOL:STAT ON
DCI RNG Selects DCI range :OUTP:DC:ISOL:LEV:VAL
AUTO Enables the auto range function for DCI :OUTP:DC:ISOL:LEV:AUTO
ON
HOLD Disables the auto range function for DCI :OUTP:DC:ISOL:LEV:AUTO
OFF
DCR RNG Selects DCR measurement range :FUNC:DCR:RANG:VAL
AUTO Enables the auto range function for the DCR :FUNC:DCR:RANG:AUTO
measurement ON
HOLD Disables the auto range function for the DCR :FUNC:DCR:RANG:AUTO
measurement OFF
DEV A
% Selects the deviation measurement mode :FUNC:DEV1:MODE PERC
ABS Selects the deviation measurement mode :FUNC:DEV1:MODE ABS
OFF Selects the deviation measurement mode :FUNC:DEV1:MODE OFF
DEV B
FREQ Sets the measurement frequency :FREQ:CW
FUNC

Command list
Cp- ...
Cp-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPD
Cp-G Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPG
Cp-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPQ
Cp-Rp Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CPRP
N
Cs- ...
Cs-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CSD
Cs-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CSQ
Cs-Rs Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE CSRS
N
Lp- ...
Lp-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPD
Lp-G Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPG
Lp-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPQ
Lp-Rdc Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPRD
Lp-Rp Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LPRP
N
Ls- ...
Ls-D Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSD
Ls-Q Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSQ
Ls-Rdc Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSRD
Ls-Rs Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE LSRS
N
MORE
G-B Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE GB

Command list
R-X Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE RX

Vdc-Id Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE VDID
c
Y- ...
Y-d Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE YTD
Y-r Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE YTR
RN
Z- ...
Z-d Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE ZTD
Z-r Selects the measurement function :FUNC:IMP:TYPE ZTR
RN
N
IDC MON
OFF Disables the DC current level monitor function :FUNC:SMON:IDC:STAT
OFF
ON Enables the DC current level monitor function :FUNC:SMON:IDC:STAT ON
LEVEL Sets the voltage level for the measurement signal :VOLT:LEV
:CURR:LEV
MEAS TIME
LONG Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER LONG
MED Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER MED
SHORT Sets the integration time and the averaging rate :APER SHOR
RANGE Selects impedance measurement range :FUNC:IMP:RANG:VAL
AUTO Enables the auto range function for the impedance :FUNC:IMP:RANG:AUTO
measurement ON
HOLD Enables the auto range function for the impedance :FUNC:IMP:RANG:AUTO
measurement OFF
REF A Sets the reference value for deviation measurement :FUNC:DEV1:REF:VAL

Command list
MEAS Resets the trigger system, putting the trigger in the IDLE
ABORT STATE on the state diagram
MEASUR Executes a single measurement and enters two measured :FUNC:DEV1:REF:FILL
E values into each of the reference values for the deviation
measurement
REF B Sets the reference value for deviation measurement :FUNC:DEV2:REF:VAL
MEAS Resets the trigger system, putting the trigger in the IDLE
ABORT STATE on the state diagram
MEASUR Executes a single measurement and enters two measured :FUNC:DEV2:REF:FILL
E values into each of the reference values for the deviation
measurement
STEP DLY Sets the step delay time :TRIG:DEL
TRIG
BUS Selects the trigger mode :TRIG:SOUR BUS
EXT Selects the trigger mode :TRIG:SOUR EXT
INT Selects the trigger mode :TRIG:SOUR INT
MAN Selects the trigger mode :TRIG:SOUR HOLD
TRIG DLY Sets the trigger delay time :TRIG:TDEL
USER
COMMENT2
ADD Inputs the comments
CHAR
ENTER Enters arbitrary comments into the comment line :DISP:LINE
VDC MON
OFF Disables the DC voltage level monitor function :FUNC:SMON:VDC:STAT
OFF
ON Enables the DC voltage level monitor function :FUNC:SMON:VDC:STAT
ON
[Preset]
CLEAR
SET&CORR

Command list
CANCEL Returns to the softkey display screen one level higher

OK Resets the instrument setting and correction data :SYST:PRES
RETURN Returns to the softkey display screen one level higher
CLEAR
SETTING
OK Resets the instrument settings *RST
FACTORY
DEFAULT
OK Reverts to factory default settings with all
user-configurable data cleared.
LAN RESET
OK Resets the LAN settings. :SYST:COMM:LAN:PRES
[Recall A] Loads the state 0 from the memories :MMEM:LOAD:STAT:REG 0
[Recall B] Loads the state 1 from the memories :MMEM:LOAD:STAT:REG 1
[Save/Recall]
MEDIA
EXT Deletes the state from the memories :MMEM EXT
INT Deletes the state from the memories :MMEM INT
SAVE DATA
SAVE & Stores the state from the memories :MMEM:STOR
STOP
:MEM:CLE
START LOG Enables the data buffer memory to store the :MEM:FILL
measurement data

Command list
SAVE Stores the state from the memories

DISPLAY
No.
DELETE Deletes the state from the memories :MMEM:DEL:REG
RECALL Loads the state from the memories :MMEM:LOAD:STAT:REG
SAVE Stores the state from the memories :MMEM:STOR:STAT:REG
[System]
SELF TEST
TEST NO. Selects the self-test number
EXECUTE
N
TEST Starts the self-test from the test number
START
TEST Stops the self-test from the test number
STOP
SERVICE
MORE
SAVE Stores the state from the memories
SYS INFO
SYSTEM
CONFIG
BEEPER
ENABLED
OFF Disables a beep sound. :SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF
ON Enables a beep sound. :SYST:BEEP:STAT ON
BEEPER
TONE
TONE 1 Selects beep tone 1 :SYST:BEEP:TONE 1

Command list

DATE/TIME
DATE
DAY Sets the date of the internal clock :SYST:DATE
MONTH Sets the date of the internal clock :SYST:DATE
N
YEAR Sets the date of the internal clock :SYST:DATE
TIME
HOUR Sets the time of the internal clock :SYST:TIME
MINUT Sets the time of the internal clock :SYST:TIME
E
N
SECON Sets the time of the internal clock :SYST:TIME
D
GPIB ADDR Sets the GPIB address :SYST:COMM:GPIB:SELF:A
DDR
IP CONFIG
AUTO Sets the IP address to AUTO :SYST:COMM:LAN:SELF:C
ONF AUTO
MANUAL Sets the IP address to MANUAL :SYST:COMM:LAN:SELF:C
ONF MAN
FACTORY Sets the IP address at the default
DEFAULT
MANUAL
GATEWAY
ENTER Sets the static Gateway address :SYST:COMM:LAN:SELF:D
GAT
DEFAULT

Command list
MANUAL IP
ADDR
ENTER Sets the static IP address :SYST:COMM:LAN:SELF:AD
DR
DEFAULT
MANUAL
SUBNET
MASK
ENTER Sets the static Subnet Mask. :SYST:COMM:LAN:SELF:S
MAS
DEFAULT
SYSTEM INFO
HANDLER
I/F
OFF Disables the handler I/F :CONT:HAND:STAT OFF
ON Enables the handler I/F :CONT:HAND:STAT ON
SCANNER
I/F
OFF Disables the scanner I/F :CONT:SCAN:STAT OFF
ON Enables the scanner I/F :CONT:SCAN:STAT ON
[Trigger] Triggers the unit :TRIG:IMM
1. The field name changes depending on the list sweep parameter.
2. The field name changes when entering a comment.

Data Processing
Data Processing
The internal data processing flowchart for the E4980A/AL is shown in Figure
10-1.
Figure 10-1 Data Processing Flowchart
㪣㪼㪾㪼㫅㪻
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫏㪧㫉㫆㪺㪼㫊㫊㫀㫅㪾㪛㪸㫋㪸㪛㪸㫋㪸㪛㪸㫋㪸
㪭㪸㫃㫌㪼
㪘㪺㪺㪼㫊㫊
㪩㪼㪸㪻㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㪩㪼㪸㪻㪆㫎㫉㫀㫋㪼
㫅㫆㫋㩷㪸㫃㫃㫆㫎㪼㪻
㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪘㫍㪼㫉㪸㪾㫀㫅㪾㪭㩷㫉㪼㪸㫃㪱㪔㪭㪆㪠
㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪛㪸㫋㪸
㪩㪻㪺㪔㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄
㪘㫍㪼㫉㪸㪾㫀㫅㪾㪭㩷㫀㫄㪸㪾㪭㩷㫉㪼㪸㫃㩷㪆㩷㪠㩷㫉㪼㪸㫃㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄
㪘㫍㪼㫉㪸㪾㫀㫅㪾㪠㩷㫉㪼㪸㫃㪭㪸㪺㪔䌼㪭䌼
㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄
㪘㫍㪼㫉㪸㪾㫀㫅㪾㪠㩷㫀㫄㪸㪾㪠㪸㪺㪔䌼㪠䌼
㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄
㪘㫍㪼㫉㪸㪾㫀㫅㪾㪭㪻㪺㪔㪭㫄㪭㩷㪻㪺
㪠㪻㪺㪔㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪑㪪㪤㪦㪥㪑㪭㪛㪚㪖
㪘㫍㪼㫉㪸㪾㫀㫅㪾
㪭㫄㪆㪩㫉㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪠㩷㪻㪺
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪑㪪㪤㪦㪥㪑㪠㪛㪚㪖
㪠㩷㪸㪺
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪑㪪㪤㪦㪥㪑㪠㪘㪚㪖
㪭㩷㪸㪺
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪑㪪㪤㪦㪥㪑㪭㪘㪚㪖
㪧㫉㫀㫄㪸㫉㫐㪚㪸㫃㪺㫌㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪬㫊㪼㫉
㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫉㫌㫊㫀㫅㪾㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪛㪼㫍㫀㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㫊
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪖㫄㫆㪻㪼
㪪㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㪼㫉㫃㫐㪦㫇㪼㫅
㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㪪㪿㫆㫉㫋
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪖
㪚㫆㫅㫍㪼㫉㫊㫀㫆㫅㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㪬㫊㪼㫉
㪧㪸㫊㫊㪆㪝㪸㫀㫃㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋㩷㪫㪼㫊㫋㫋㫆㪩㪼㫊㫌㫃㫋㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪡㫌㪻㪾㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪧㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉㫊
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪖㫌㫊㫀㫅㪾㪑㪝㪜㪫㪑㪚㪦㪩㪩㪖
㪚㫆㫄㫇㪸㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉
㪤㫌㫃㫋㫀
㪙㫀㫅㩷㪥㫆㪅
㪚㪿㪸㫅㫅㪼㫃
㪑㪝㪜㪫㪚㪖㪪㫆㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㪑㪚㪦㪩㪩㪑㪬㪪㪜㪑㪛㪘㪫㪘㪑㪤㪬㪣㪫㪦㫇㪼㫅
㪡㫌㪻㪾㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪪㪿㫆㫉㫋
㫌㫊㫀㫅㪾㪪㫀㫅㪾㫃㪼
㪙㫀㫅㩷㪚㫆㫌㫅㫋㪚㫆㫄㫇㪸㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉㪚㪿㪸㫅㫅㪼㫃
㪑㪚㪦㪤㪧㪑㪙㪠㪥㪑㪚㪦㪬㪥㪑㪛㪘㪫㪘㪖㪑㪚㪦㪩㪩㪑㪬㪪㪜㪑㪛㪘㪫㪘㪑㪪㪠㪥㪞
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪎㪏

Data Processing

User’s Guide
11 Specifications and Supplemental Information
For the specifications and supplemental information of the E4980A/AL

Precision LCR meter, refer to the datasheet at
http://literature.cdn.keysight.com/litweb/pdf/5989-4435EN.pdf
417
11- Specifications and Supplemental Information

User’s Guide
12 Precautions for Use and Daily Checks
This chapter describes precautions to take when using the E4980A/AL and
explains how to perform regular maintenance on the device.
Precautions for Use

This section describes the precautions to take in using the E4980A/AL.
Avoiding improper input from the front panel (key lock function)
When you do not need to operate the keys on the front panel, you can disable
entry from the front panel keys (key lock function) to avoid improper input
caused by touching the front panel keys accidentally.
The ON/OFF state of the key lock function is indicated by whether LOCK is
displayed in the status display area. When LOCK is displayed, as indicated by 1
in Figure 12-1, the function is ON.
Figure 12-1 ON/OFF display of the key lock function (when ON)
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪊㪐
419
12- Precautions for Use and Daily Checks
Precautions for Use
Setup procedure
Step 1. Press the [Local/Lock] key on the front panel.
Step 2. Confirm that LOCK is displayed in the status display area in the lower-right
corner of the LCD display.

Precautions for Use and Daily Checks
Daily Checks (Executing the self-test)

This section describes the daily checks required for the E4980A/AL.
Self-test at power on
The E4980A/AL provides a function that executes a self-test automatically at
power-on. When the self-test detects any malfunction at power-on, an error
message “Power on test failed” is displayed in the system message area. If this
happens, refer to “Check Items When Trouble Occurs” on page 427.
Executing the self-test from the front panel

The self-test of the E4980A/AL can be executed from the front panel. The steps
are given below.
Self-test procedure
Step 3. Press [SYSTEM] - SELF TEST
Step 4. Use the cursor key to highlight the selection item to the right of “TEST No.” (1
in Figure 12-2)
Step 5. Select the number corresponding to the test that you want to perform by
using the INCR+ and DECR- softkeys.
Step 6. Press EXECUTE - TEST START (2 in Figure 12-2) to execute the selected test
item.
Figure 12-2 Self-test screen and procedure
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪇㪋㪇
The following test items can be checked by using the self-test.

Self-test items
1 SYSTEM Checks the system, A1/A2/A3 boards, and
system correction data.
2 USER DATA Checks the settings of GPIB and LAN,
instrument setup information, correction
data, and scanner’s correction data.
3 BATTERY Checks the internal batteries.
4 KEY Checks the front panel keys. (Visual
confirmation only; no pass/fail result shown
on screen.)
5 DISPLAY Checks the LED/LCD on the front panel.
(Visual confirmation only; no pass/fail result
shown on screen.)
6 HANDLER INTERFACE Checks the handler interface. (Visual
on screen.)
7 SCANNER INTERFACE Checks the scanner interface. (Visual
on screen.)

Precautions for Use and Daily Checks
Cleaning this Instrument
Cleaning this Instrument

This section explains how to clean the instrument.
To protect yourself from electrical shock, be sure to unplug the power

cable from the outlet before cleaning the instrument.
Never clean the internal components of the instrument.
Unknown Terminals/DC Source Ports

Unknown terminals and DC source ports (option 001) on the front panel of the
E4980A are fitted with BNC Type connectors (m).Stains or other damage to
these connectors would significantly affect the measurement accuracy. Please
give attention to the following precautions.
• Always keep the connectors free from stains or dust.
• Do not touch the contact surface on the connectors.
• Do not plug damaged or scratched connectors into the test ports.
• Use compressed air to clean connectors. Do not use abrasives under any
circumstance.
Cleaning Parts Other than Unknown Terminals and DC Source Ports

To remove stains on parts other than the unknown terminals and DC source
ports, wipe them gently with a soft cloth that is dry or one that is wetted with a
small amount of water and wrung tightly.

Cautions Applicable to Requesting Repair, Replacement, Regular Calibration, etc.
Cautions Applicable to Requesting Repair, Replacement, Regular

Calibration, etc.
Caution when Sending the Unit

If it is necessary to send the unit to a Service Center of Keysight Technologies,
please follow the instructions below.
Equipment to be Sent
When requesting repair or regular calibration of the unit at our Service Center,
send only the E4980A/AL main unit without any installed option. Unless
specifically instructed, it is not necessary to send accessories.
Packing
Use the original package and shock absorbers, or equivalent anti-static
packing materials, when sending the unit.
Shipping Address
For the address of the nearest Keysight Technologies Service Center, direct
inquiries to the Customer Contact shown at the end of this manual.
Recommended Calibration Period

The recommended interval between calibrations of this instrument is one year.
Keysight recommends that you request our Service Center to perform regular
calibration every year.

User’s Guide
13 Troubleshooting
This chapter lists items to check if you encounter a problem while using the
Keysight E4980A/AL. All of these items should be carefully investigated before
you determine that your E4980A/AL is faulty.
Primary Trouble Isolation

This primary trouble isolation procedure can be performed without
disassembling the E4980A/AL. Figure 13-1 shows the trouble isolation flow
chart.
Retry OPEN/SHORT/LOAD correction, check cabling/fixturing or restart from
Factory Reset, before contacting Keysight Technologies’ Sales and Service
Office or the company from which you bought the device. Either or them may
solve your trouble.
When you contact to Keysight Technologies’ Sales and Services Office or the
company from which you bought the device, provide the screen shot which you
encounters and the detailed symptoms for Keysight to isolate your trouble.
425
13- Troubleshooting
Primary Trouble Isolation
Figure 13-1 Trouble Isolation Flow Chart
Start
Go to The system does not start up

Power On? troubleshooting
No
Yes
Go to The system starts up, but the
Normal measurement normal measurement screen does not
screen appears? No appear troubleshooting
Yes
Go to Clearly abnormal measured value

Measured value is troubleshooting
expected? No Note: Correction data might set incorrectly
Yes
Overload message is Go to An overload message is displayed

displayed? Yes troubleshooting
No
Go to Beeping persists when turning on

Beeping persists?
Yes the comparator function troubleshooting
No
Able to input from Go to The front panel keys are unavailable

front keys? No troubleshooting
Yes
Able to write into Go to Saving to USB memory fails

USB memory? No troubleshooting
Yes
Error messages or Follow the suggestions on Error

Warning messages Messages / Warning Messages
solves the trouble? No
Yes
Contact Keysight Technology’ s Sales
Restart from Factory
Reset solves the and Service Office or the company from
trouble? No which you bought the device.
Yes
End
e4980aue1181

Troubleshooting
Check Items When Trouble Occurs
The system does not start up (Nothing is displayed)

o Confirm that the power cable is properly plugged in.
o Confirm that the fuse is not blown.

If normal operation does not resume after taking the above measures, there is
the possibility of a failure. Unplug the power cable immediately and contact
Keysight Technologies’s Customer Contact, listed at the end of this guide, or
the company from which you bought the device.
Occasionally, there are missing pixels or constantly lit pixels, but this is not
a malfunction and does not affect measurement results.
The system starts up, but the normal measurement screen does not appear
(Service Mode)
The Service Mode is a state that occurs when the power-on test fails. Here, the
characters on the display turn yellow and all of the front panel keys are
unavailable.
o Confirm that the power-on test or a self test has failed.
When the power-on test at start-up fails, the error message “Power on test
failed” is displayed in the system message area.
For details on the Service Mode, refer to the Service Guide.
o When the power is turned on with the interface board of the E4980A/AL
rear panel removed, the E4980A/AL enters the service mode. In this case,
reset the interface board and then turn the power on.
The E4980A/AL also enters the service mode when the interface board isn’t
set properly.
When the normal measurement screen does not appear, there is the possibility
of a failure. Contact Keysight Technologies’s Customer Contact, listed at the
end of this guide, or the company from which you bought the device.
An overload message is displayed

An overload is often detected by the E4980A/AL when nothing is connected to
the UNKNOWN terminal.
For conditions where overload occurs, refer to “Displaying Errors instead of
Measurement Results” on page 71.
If the measurement/DCR/DCI ranges are set at Hold, enable the auto to select
the optimum range. Then set the range at Hold. This may solve a overload.

13- Troubleshooting
Beeping persists when turning on the comparator function

o Confirm that the limit range is set up properly.
When the beep is set up to sound when the comparator function is on, the
beep sounds on every completion of measurement if the limit range is set
up improperly.
The front panel keys are unavailable

o Check if the keys are locked.
When the keys are locked, LOCK is displayed in the status display area in
the lower-right corner of the screen.
Press the [Local/Lock] key to unlock the keys.
o Check if the instrument is in the remote mode.
If the E4980A/AL is in the remote mode, RMT is displayed in the status

display area in the lower-right corner of the screen.
Press the [Local/Lock] key to clear the remote mode.
When the E4980A/AL enters a local lockout state by sending the LOCAL
LOCK BUS command from the controller, you cannot unlock the remote
mode even if you press the [Local/Lock] key. (Only RMT is displayed in the
status display area, so you cannot distinguish the local lockout state from
a normal remote mode.)
Send the LOCAL BUS command from the controller to cancel this state,
which enables control of the E4980A/AL on the front panel.
Clearly abnormal measured value

o Measurement of compensation data may have failed.
Measure the compensation data again. For how to measure correction data,
refer to“CORRECTION page” on page 112.
For example,
— setting up the OPEN state and SHORT state inversely.
— the OPEN/SHORT/LOAD is connected incompletely.
— previous correction data is used.
— after correction, different length cable/different fixture is connected or
For those cases, connect OPEN/SHORT/LOAD properly or fixture/cable
properly and then perform the correction with new conditions.
o If the measured value is still abnormal even after taking the above measure,
turn off the correction function.

Troubleshooting
Perform resistance measurement of 100 to 1 k DUT by using the

E4980A/AL’s fixture after turning off OPEN/SHORT/LOAD on the
CORRECTION page and setting cable length to zero. If a measured value
close to the DUT’s value is displayed, there is the possibility of correction
failure or inappropriate cable length.
For those cases, perform the correction with proper OPEN/SHORT/LOAD or
with proper fixture/cable.
o When the MULTI compensation is ON, check that the channel and the
definition method of the LOAD standard value are selected correctly.
Saving to USB memory fails

Some USB memory does not work on the E4980A/AL with firmware A.xx.xx.
See the section on “USB interface port” in data sheet.
An error message or warning message is displayed

For information on error messages and warning messages, refer to “Error
Messages” on page 435.

13- Troubleshooting
Check Items When Trouble Occurs During Remote Control
Check Items When Trouble Occurs During Remote Control
The instrument does not respond to the external controller or malfunctions

o Confirm that the connection setting is correct.
Check that the GPIB address for a GPIB connection or the IP address for a
LAN connection is set up correctly on the SYSTEM CONFIG screen of the
E4980A/AL or the connection setting screen of the external controller.
o Confirm that connection cables such as the GPIB cable, USB cable, and
LAN cable are connected and in good condition.
o Check whether another instrument connected by the GPIB or LAN cable
has the same GPIB address or IP address.
o Check that the GPIB cable is not looped.
You cannot read out the measured value.

o Confirm that the data transfer format is set up correctly.
An error message is displayed

o Check that the program is correct.
For details on error messages, refer to “Error Messages” on page 435.

Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
A Manual Changes
This appendix shows manual changes that need to be made to an earlier

revision according to firmware or serial number.
Manual Changes
If your E4980A/AL has the firmware or serial number shown in Table A-1 and
Table A-2, see the corresponding manual changes.
Table A-1 Manual Changes by Firmware Number
Firmware Number Make Manual Changes
A.02.00 and later Change 1

Table A-2 Manual Changes by Serial Number
Serial Number Make Manual Changes
MY464/SG464 and below for E4980A Change 5

The ten-character serial number is stamped on the serial number plate (Figure
A-1) on the rear panel.
Figure A-1 Example of Serial Number Plate
Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide -431

- Manual Changes
Manual Changes
Change 5
The following function and SCPI commands are supported.
o Current Bias Interface is supported.
o :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:RESTart command is available to

restart the network.
o :SYSTem:RESTart command is available to reboot the instrument
immediately.
Change 4
The following options are newly added to the firmware revision A.03.00.
o Option 030, 050, 100 and 200
Change 3
The following functions are newly added to the firmware revision A.02.11.
o Change the resolution to 20mA from 1A to 2A of the DC bias signal current
level at the connection of two 42841A devices.
Change 2
o Command to set the DC bias range has been added.
The firmware revision A.02.00 and below does not support the following SCPI
command. Please delete the descriptions about this command from this
manual.
— “:BIAS:RANGe:AUTO” on page 327
Change 1
o New softkey which has LAN reset function.
o Compliant with LXI (Lan eXtensions for Instrumentation) standard Class C
o DHCP ON/OFF function and AUTO IP address ON/OFF function integrated

(IP CONFIG field).
o “Status” which displays the LAN connection status changed (CURRENT
LAN STATUS monitor).
-432 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

Manual Changes
Manual Changes
For “Status” of the firmware revision A.02.00 or lower, which displays the LAN
connection status, refer to the following table.
Status Description
OK LAN connection is OK
DISCONNECTED Disconnected from the LAN
INITIALIZING LAN connection is being initialized
FAILED LAN connection has failed.
The firmware revision A.01.0x does not support the following SCPI command.
Please delete the descriptions about this command from this manual.
— “:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFigure” on page 372
The firmware revision A.02.00 or later does not support the following SCPI
commands.
— “:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:AIP[:STATe]” on page 371
— “:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DHCP[:STATe]” on page 373

- Manual Changes
Manual Changes

Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
B Error Messages
The Keysight E4980A/AL provides error messages to indicate its operating

status. This appendix describes the error messages of the E4980A/AL in
numeric order.
Error Messages
An error message is displayed in the instrument status display area in the
lower-left part of the screen. Pressing any of the front keys other than the
[Local/Lock] key or executing the :DISP:CCL command clears the error
message. Moreover, when a sweep is started again, the display of a particular
error message may disappear. Errors caused by operation of a front panel key
simply appear on the display; with a few exceptions, these are not stored in the
error queue.
In the log of an error message, a maximum 100 pieces are recorded, and it is
possible to go back and check from the oldest error. Executing the :SYST:ERR?
command checks error logs. This operation can be performed only by the
“SCPI” command. It cannot be operated from the front panel.
An error with a positive error number is one uniquely defined for this
instrument. On the other hand, an error with a negative error number is
basically one defined for common GPIB devices in IEEE488.2.
When the error code is displayed on the screen of the instrument, there will be
a letter “E” with error code and error description are displayed.
E1103 A1 EEPROM write error
Error Messages Category

— -440 to -100: GPIB devices in IEEE488.2
— 10 to 90: Setup
— 1000 to 1201: Hardware

- Error Messages
Error Messages
GPIB devices in IEEE488.2

-440 Query UNTERMINATED error after indefinite response
A query that requests arbitrary data response (*IDN? and *OPT? queries) is
sent before normal queries in a program message (for example, FREQ?;*IDN?
is expected, but *IDN?;FREQ? is received).
-430 Query DEADLOCKED
Input buffer and output buffer are full; cannot continue.
-420 Query UNTERMINATED
Addressed to talk, incomplete program message received.
-410 Query INTERRUPTED
Query is followed by DAB or GET before the response is completed.
-400 Query error
Query is improper.
-350 Queue overflow
There is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded.
Suggestion:
Clear the error queue.

-250 Mass storage error
An error occurred while accessing the USB memory. A USB memory-related
error other than -257 error (File Name Error) occurred.
-230 Data corrupt or stale
The setting file or correction data to be read cannot be read out with the
current firmware version because the setting file or correction data is corrupt
or old.
-224 Illegal parameter value
The parameter value is not properly set. This error occurs, for example, when
the :FUNC:IMP command is used to specify an Impedance-parameter that
does not exist (as CPRS).
-223 Too many digits
The received numeric value is too long (exceeds 255 digits).
-223 Too much data
The block-, expression-, or character-string-type program data that are
received conform with the standard but exceed the amount that can be
processed under the condition of the memory or conditions specific to
memory-related devices. In this instrument, this error occurs when the number
of characters exceeds 254 in a character-string parameter.

Error Messages
Error Messages
-222 Data out of range

A data element (not violating the standard) outside the range defined by this
instrument has been received. This error occurs, for example, when an
integer-based command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the
range of -2147483648 to +2147483647 or when a real-number-based
command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the range of
-9.9e37 to +9.9e37. This error also occurs when a numeric value other than a
specified one is entered into a command in which the “BIN number” and “list
table number” are specified as parameters and thus the parameters are not
rounded.
-220 Parameter error
When a parameter-related error other than Errors -221 through -229 occur,
this error message is displayed.
-211 Trigger ignored
The instrument receives and detects a trigger command (“:TRIG”) or an
external trigger signal, but it is ignored due to the timing condition (the
instrument is not in the wait-for- trigger state, for example).
Suggestion:
Change the setup so that a trigger command or an external trigger signal can
be sent after the instrument has entered the wait-for- trigger state.
-200 Execution error
An error associated with execution has been generated for which this
instrument cannot specify the error message. This code indicates that an error
associated with execution defined in 11.5.1.1.5, IEEE488.2 has occurred.
-178 Expression data not allowed
Expression data is not allowed.
-171 Invalid expression
Invalid expression was received (for example, illegal character in expression).
-170 Expression error
Expression is improper.
-168 Block data not allowed
Block data is not allowed.
-161 Invalid block data
Invalid block data was received (for example, END received before length
satisfied).
-160 Block data error
Block data is improper.

- Error Messages
Error Messages
-158 String data not allowed

String data is not allowed.
-151 Invalid string data
Invalid string data was received (for example, END received before close
quote).
-150 String data error
String data is improper.
-148 Character data not allowed
Character data not allowed for this operation.
-144 Character data too long
Character data is too long (maximum length is 12 characters).
-141 Invalid character data
Bad character data or unrecognized character data was received.
-140 Character data error
Character data is improper.
-138 Suffix not allowed
A suffix is not allowed for this operation.
-131 Invalid suffix
Units are unrecognized, or the units are not appropriate.
-128 Numeric data error
Numeric data is improper.
-128 Numeric data not allowed
Numeric data not allowed for this operation.
-123 Exponent too long
The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000.
-121 Invalid character in number
Invalid character in numeric data.
-114 Header Suffix out of Range
The header suffix is out of range.
-113 Undefined header
A command not defined in this instrument, though not illegal in the syntactic
structure, has been received. For example, when the message
“:OUTP:DC:ISOL:FREQ:AUTO ON” is sent instead of the correct program

Error Messages
Error Messages
message “:OUTP:DC:ISOL:LEV:AUTO ON” the message sent is received as an

undefined command by this instrument. See the command reference and use
the correct command.
-112 Program mnemonic too long
Program mnemonic is too long (maximum length is 12 characters).
-109 Missing parameter
The number of parameters is less than that required for the command, or the
parameter has not been entered. For example, the command “:CORR:USE”
requires one more parameter. Therefore, when a message “:CORR:USE” is sent
to a correct program message “:CORR:USE 11,” this instrument receives the
former message as an invalid one because all parameters have not been
entered.
Suggestion:
Enter command parameters correctly.

-108 Parameter not allowed
The number of parameters exceeds that required for the command. For
instance, when a program message “:FORM:BORD NORM, ASC” is sent instead
of a correct program message with a command “:FORM:BORD NORM”, which
requires a parameter, the instrument receives the message that the number of
parameters is invalid.
Suggestion:
See the command reference to confirm the required number of parameters.

-105 GET not allowed
GET is not allowed inside a program message.
-104 Data type error
Improper data type used (for example, string data was expected, but numeric
data was received).
-103 Invalid separator
The message unit separator (for example, “;”, “,”) is improper.
-102 Syntax error
Unrecognized command or data type was received.
-101 Invalid character
Invalid character was received.
-100 Command Error
Improper command.

- Error Messages
Error Messages
Setup
10 Exceeded AC+DC limit
The amount of the voltage level exceeds 42V peak.
Suggestion:
Lower the DC voltage or AC voltage setting.

14 V bias disabled
The DC voltage bias is set when the 42841A is connected.
Suggestion:
Set the DC current bias or disconnect the 42841A.

16 Reference Measurement aborted
Reference data measurement is aborted.
18 DC bias opt not installed
Operation that requires option 001 is performed in a model not having the
power amp/DC bias option (option 001).
Suggestion:
Press System button in the front panel and check the OPTION.
19 DC bias not available
DC bias cannot be turned on in Rdc measurement.
20 DC bias unit powered down
The 42841A is switched off.
Suggestion:
Turn on the switch.

21 Fixture circuit defective
A fault has occurred in a circuit to absorb back-emf of the 42842A/B.
Suggestion:
Confirm the connection to the 42842A/B.

22 Fixture over temperature
The temperature inside the 42842A/B bias test fixture exceeds the limit.
Suggestion:
Turn off the DC bias and cool down the equipment.

Error Messages
Error Messages
23 Fixture OPEN det. defective

The opening and closing detection sensor of the 42842A/B protective cover
detects an error.
Suggestion:
When this error occurs, contact Keysight Technology’s Sales and Service Office
or the company from which you bought the device.
24 Fixture cover open
The protective cover of the 42842A/B is open.
Suggestion:
Close the cover.

25 DC bias I source overload
DC bias source current is overloaded.
Suggestion:
When this error occurs, lower the value of the current setting.
26 DC bias I sink overload
DC bias sink current is overloaded.
Suggestion:
When this error occurs, lower the value of the current setting.
27 DC bias unit disconnected
The 42841A is not connected.
Suggestion:
Confirm the connection to the 42841A.

28 DC bias unit connection changed
The connection with the 42841A has been changed.
Suggestion:
Cycle the power of the 42841A, then preset the E4980A/AL.

29 Cycle power of 42841A and Preset
The connection was not established with the 42841A.
Suggestion:
Cycle the power of the 42841A, then preset the E4980A/AL.

- Error Messages
Error Messages
30 Function type not available

The Ls-Rdc, Lp-Rdc and Vdc-Idc are not available when the 42841A is
connected.
Suggestion:
Confirm 42841A is disconnected.

35 I BIAS I/F disabled
This error occurs when DC bias current is selected when the DC bias interface
board (option 002) is not available in a model that does not have the Power/DC
bias enhance option (option 001).
Suggestion:
41 Correction measurement aborted
Correction data measurement is aborted.
43 Measurement failed
A measurement error occurred during correction data measurement. The OPEN
or SHORT state connected to the UNKNOWN terminals may be inappropriate.
Suggestion:
See “Clearly abnormal measured value” on page 428.

45 Valid in single mode only
SINGLE channel correction data is measured when the MULTI channel
correction mode is set.
51 Inconsistent limit setting
For the comparator function, user attempts to set the threshold in the
sequential mode by sending the COMP:SEQ:BIN command, although the
tolerance mode is now selected.
Suggestion:
Select the sequential mode using COMP:MODE.

60 No values in sweep list
List sweep measurement is performed when the measurement point is not set
on the LIST SWEEP SETUP screen.
Suggestion:
Set the measurement point on the LIST SWEEP SETUP screen.

Error Messages
Error Messages
62 Bias off, Turn bias on

DC bias sweep is performed with the DC BIAS function OFF.
Suggestion:
Set the DC BIAS function to ON.

63 DC source off, Turn DC source on
DC source sweep is performed with the DC source function OFF.
Suggestion:
Set the DC source function to ON.

70 Handler I/F not installed
The handler interface function is set to ON in a model that does not have a
handler interface board (option 201).
Suggestion:
71 Scanner I/F not installed
Operation that requires option 301 is performed in a model that does not have
a scanner interface board (option 301).
Suggestion:
73 I BIAS I/F not installed
The DC bias interface function is set to ON in a model that does not have the
DC bias interface board (option 002).
Suggestion:
82 Store failed
User attempts to save data into the USB memory when a USB memory device
is not inserted. This error may appear when you attempt to save data
immediately after inserting the USB memory into the E4980A/AL. You need to
wait for a few seconds after inserting the USB.
Suggestion:
Prepare the USB memory device or save data into number 0 to 9.

- Error Messages
Error Messages
82 Store failed
This error may appear when you attempt to save data immediately after
inserting the USB memory into the E4980A/AL.
Suggestion:
You need to wait for a few seconds after inserting the USB.
83 No data to load
There is no setup data for the selected number. Or the USB memory is not
inserted. The checksum has failed.
Suggestion:
Check the USB memory is properly inserted or set proper settings.

83 Out of Memory
The E4980A/AL has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation.
90 Data buffer overflow
This error occurs when the amount of data exceeds the defined data buffer
memory size.
Suggestion:
If this error occurs during the measurement after pressing [Save/Recall] - SAVE
DATA - START LOG, press SAVE & STOP.
Hardware
1000 Power on test failed
An error occurs during the power-on test at start-up or a self test. An interface
board is removed or not connected properly or the E4980A/AL may be faulty.
Suggestion:
Check the connection with a cable when you change the setting of the
interface board. When the interface board connected properly, contact
Keysight Technology’s Sales and Service Office or the company from which you
bought the device.
1070 Fan failed
Cooling fan hardware failure is detected.
Suggestion:

Error Messages
Error Messages
1080 Power failed

Power unit hardware failure is detected.
Suggestion:
1103 A1 EEPROM write error
An error is generated while writing data to A1 EEPROM.
Suggestion:
1200 CPU Bd FLASH ROM write error
An error is generated while writing data to FLASH.
Suggestion:
1201 CPU Bd EEPROM write error
An error is generated while writing data to EEPROM.
Suggestion:

- Error Messages
Warning Messages
Warning Messages
A warning message is displayed in the instrument status display area in the
lower-left part of the display. Pressing any of the front keys other than the
[Local/Lock] key or executing the :DISP:CCL command clears the message.
This message simply appears on the display since it is not known to remote
environments such as GPIB. This message is not displayed when another error
message is already displayed in the instrument message/warning area.
The warning messages for this instrument are as follows.
Numeric
1 I bias unit
The E4980A finds one current bias unit (42841A) connected.
2 I bias units
The E4980A/AL finds two current bias units (42841A) connected.
A
ALC unable to regulate
The voltage level setting is inappropriate for using the ALC function. The ALC
function does not work and the operation will be the same as when the ALC
function is turned off. The measurement data status is set to 4.
Suggestions:
Turn off ALC. For more details, refer to “Automatic level control” on page 93.
C
Can't change while DCI Isolation OFF
This message appears when the DCI measurement range (DCI RND) is
changed when the bias current isolation function is OFF.
Suggestions:
Turn on the Bias current isolation function.

Can't change while 2nd sweep param exists
This message appears when attempting to change or delete the list sweep
parameter from the E4980A/AL’s screen after setting the sweep point for the
second parameter with the GPIB command.
Suggestions:
Use the GPIB command to change the list sweep parameter.

Error Messages
Warning Messages
Clear the table first

This error occurs when the value of MODE has been changed when the LIMIT
TABLE SETUP screen is moved to another screen or the sweep parameter on
the LIST SWEEP SETUP screen is changed even though a sweep list for
another measurement parameter exists.
Suggestions:
Clear the table first and then change the Limit mode.
Correction, not effective
The correction function does not work because the MULTI correction mode is
used but the test frequency is not equal to the spot frequency.
I
Improper high/low limits
The upper limit value is less than the lower limit value. Or the lower limit value
is larger than the upper limit value.
Suggestions:
Set the lower limit value to less than the upper limit value. Or set the upper
limit value to larger than the lower limit value.
Incompatible state file
The setting file recalled from a USB memory device has been saved using an
E4980A/AL with a different firmware version or different options. There may be
some parameters set up incorrectly. This message may appear when the
connection status of the 42841A is different from the one when it has been
saved.
Suggestions:
Check the firmware revision and options of the setting file.
S
Signal source overload
The test signal current exceeds a value shown in Table 11-6. The measurement
data is not guaranteed to be valid. The measurement result data status of the
measurement result output is set to 3.
Suggestions:
Reduce the test signal level so that the test signal current doesn’t exceed a
value shown in Table 11-6.

- Error Messages
Warning Messages
Signal source overvoltage

The signal source voltage exceeds its limit.
Suggestions:
Lower the voltage setting of the signal source.

Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
C List of Default Values
This appendix gives the default values, settings for Save/Recall of an object,
and settings for backing up an object when using the Keysight E4980A/AL.

- List of Default Values
List of Default Values, Save/Recall Settings, and Backup Settings
List of Default Values, Save/Recall Settings, and Backup Settings

The table below shows the following settings for the Keysight E4980A/AL. For
the factory default settings of the LAN, refer to “List of LAN Factory Default
Settings” on page 455.
— Factory-shipped settings (when you press [Preset] - FACTORY DEFAULT)

All data that the user can set are cleared. The system date and time,
however, are not cleared.
— Preset settings (the status when you press [Preset] - CLEAR SET & CORR
key or execute the :SYST:PRES command)

Calibration data and items that are backed up in the List of Default Values
are cleared.
— *RST Settings (the status when you press [Preset] - CLEAR SETTING key or
execute the *RST command)

Basic setting parameters which can be set from the front panel or the SCPI
commands are cleared.
— Settings that permit Save/Recall of a setup state
In the table, states that can be saved/recalled are denoted in the following
manner:
* : Save/Recall can be performed
Blank: Save/Recall cannot be performed
— Settings that are backed up (set state not affected by turning power
ON/OFF)
In the table, a setting that is automatically backed up is denoted in the
following manner:
* : Backup operation performed
Blank: Backup operation not performed
— Available means of defining a setting
In the table, the following symbols are used to denote the method(s) that
can be used to define a setting.
K: Using the front panel key
C: Using the SCPI command
In the table, the “<<” symbol shows that the setup is the same as that in
the box to the left.

List of Default Values

Table C-1
Key Operation Factory-shipped Setting Default Value Save/ Backup Available

Recall Means of
Preset *RST Defining a
Setting
[DC Bias] OFF << << K/C
[DC Source] OFF << << K/C
[Display Format]
BIN COUNT
COUNT OFF << << * K/C
BIN No.
COMP OFF << << * K/C
LIST SWEEP
MODE SEQ << << * K/C
MEAS
DISPLAY
BIAS 0V << << * K/C
FREQ 1 kHz << << * K/C
FUNC Cp-D << << * K/C
LEVEL 1V << << * K/C
MEAS TIME MED << << * K/C
RANGE AUTO(ON) << << * K/C
[Local/Lock] OFF << << K/C
[Meas Setup]
CORRECTION
CABLE 0m << * K/C
CH 0 << << K/C
FREQ OFF << * K/C
FUNC Cp-D << * K/C
LOAD OFF << * K/C
LOAD A --- << * K/C

Table C-1

Recall Means of
Setting
LOAD B --- << * K/C
OPEN OFF << * K/C
OPEN A --- << * K/C
OPEN B --- << * K/C
SHORT OFF << * K/C
SHORT A --- << * K/C
SHORT B --- << * K/C
REF A --- << * K/C
REF B --- << * K/C
SPOT No. 1 << << * K/C
LIMIT TABLE
AUX OFF << << * K/C
BEEP FAIL << << * K/C
COMP OFF << << * K/C
FUNC Cp-D(OFF) << << * K/C
MODE % << << * K/C
NOM 0F << << * K/C
LIST SETUP
MODE SEQ << << * K/C
MEAS SETUP
ALC OFF << << * K/C
AVG 1 << << * K/C
BIAS 0V << << * K/C
BIAS POL FIX(OFF) << << * K/C
DC SRC 0V << << * K/C
DCI ISO OFF << << * K/C
DCI RNG 20 mA << << * K/C

Table C-1

Recall Means of
Setting
DCR RNG AUTO << << * K/C
DEV A OFF << << * K/C
DEV B OFF << << * K/C
FREQ 1 kHz << << * K/C
FUNC Cp-D << << * K/C
IDC MON OFF << << * K/C
LEVEL 1V << << * K/C
MEAS TIME MED << << * K/C
RANGE AUTO << << * K/C
REF A 0F << << * K/C
REF B 0 << << * K/C
STEP DLY 0s << << * K/C
TRIG INT << << * K/C
TRIG DLY 0s << << * K/C
USER ““ << << * K/C

COMMENT
VDC MON OFF << << * K/C
[Recall A] - K/C
[Recall B] - K/C
[Save/Recall]
MEDIA INT << << K/C
[System]
SYSTEM
CONFIG
BEEPER OFF * K/C
ENABLE
BEEPER 3 * K/C
TONE

Table C-1

Recall Means of
Setting
DATE/TIME - K/C
GPIB ADDR 17 * K/C
IP CONFIG AUTO * K/C
MANUAL “0.0.0.0” K/C

GATEWAY
MANUAL IP “192.168.1.101” K/C
ADDR
MANUAL “255.255.255.0” K/C
SUBNET
MASK
SYSTEM INFO
HANDLER - K/C
I/F
SCANNER - K/C
I/F

List of LAN Factory Default Settings

The following settings return to the factory default settings when you press
[Preset] - LAN RESET or execute :SYST:COMM:LAN:PRES command.
This can also be executed by using the Factory Defaults button on the View &
Modify Configuration page of the web server.
Setting Items Control from Control via Reconne Preset Value

the E4980A/AL Web Server ction1
IP Configuration Available Available Required AUTO
IP Address Available Available Required 192.168.1.101
Subnet Mask Available Available Required 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway Available Available Required 0.0.0.0
Dynamic DNS Not available Available Required ON
DNS Servers Not available Available Required USE DHCP
DNS Server Not available Available Required 0.0.0.0
DNS Server Not available Available Required 0.0.0.0
Hostname Not available Available Required a-E4980A/AL-xxxxx2
Domain Name Not available Available Required
NetBIOS Not available Available Not ON

required
Ethernet Connection Monitoring Not available Available Not ON

required
Description Not available Available Not E4980A/AL

required
TCP Keep Alive Not available Available Not ON

required
TCP Keep Alive Time Not available Available Not 1800

required
1. If you change the item which requires reconnection of the network, a message “Click ‘Renew LAN Settings’ to make saved
chantes effective” will appear.
2. xxxxx indicates the serial number of the E4980A/AL.


Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
D Bias Current Interface
This chapter explains how to use Option 002 Bias Current Interface, which adds
a digital interface to allow the E4980A to control the Keysight E4980A Precision
LCR Meter’s bias current source.
This information is only for serial prefix number below:

- Bias Current Interface
Product Overview
Product Overview
42841A Bias Current Source

The 42841A is a DC bias current source for use with the E4980A (with Option
002 Bias Current Interface). All measurement setups, including the DC current
bias, can be set from the E4980A front panel.
Operation Limitations
Some E4980A functions have the following limitations when used with the
42841A and the 42842A/B.
o Option 001, Internal DC Bias is disabled.
o DC Bias test signal voltage (V) is disabled.
o Test signal voltage monitor (VDC MON) is disabled.
o Test signal current monitor (IDC MON) is disabled.
o Auto bias polarity control function (BIAS POL) cannot be set to AUTO.
o Measurement range is only 10  and 100 .
o Cable length setting applies only to the 1 m setting.
Turn off all the power switches of the 42841A and E4980A when
connecting or disconnecting any connection involving 42841A and
E4980A.
The 42842C bias current test fixture cannot be used with the E4980A/AL.

Bias Current Interface
Specifications when Measuring with the 42841A
Specifications when Measuring with the 42841A

Table D-1 shows the DC bias signal current level when the 42841A is
connected.
The measurement accuracy (typical) when connecting the E4980A to the
42841A is the same as that when connecting the 4284A to the 42841A,
described in the Specifications of the 42841A manual. When test frequency
exceeds 1 MHz (the highest value in the 42841A manual), we assume an
accuracy that is double the accuracy at 1 MHz test frequency.
Table D-1 DC bias signal current level
Range E4980A only -100 mA to 100 mA

Connected with 0 A to 20 A (connect 42841A x 1 unit)
42841A
0 A to 40 A (connect 42841A x 2 units)
Resolution E4980A only 1 A (0 A to 50 mA)
10 A (50 mA to 100 mA)
Connected with 10 mA (0 A to 1 A)
42841A 100 mA (1 A to 20 A)
(connect 42841A x 1 unit)
20 mA (0 A to 2 A)
200 mA (2 A to 40 A)
(connect 42841A x 2 units)

Preparation
Preparation
Equipment Requirements
The 42841A supplies 20 A (1 unit) and 40 A (2 units) DC current bias when
combining the E4980A (test frequency: 20 Hz to 2 MHz) and the 42842A/B test
fixture.
The following equipment is necessary for a system that uses the E4980A and
the bias current source.
— E4980A Precision LCR Meter (with Option 002 Bias Current Interface)
— 42841A Bias Current Source (two units are necessary for 40 A system)
— 42842B Bias Current Test Fixture (only 42842B for 40 A system)
— 16048A Test Lead (with BNC connector)
— Bias Current Interface Cable (furnished with the 42841A)
— 42843A Bias Current Cable (required only for 40 A system)
Confirm that Option 002 Bias Current Interface is installed in the option
slot of the E4980A’s rear panel. When option 002 is installed, the 50-pin
connector marked “Option 002: Bias Current Interface” is attached to
either of the two option slots of the rear panel.
Cable Connection
Each instrument needs to be connected using the bias current interface cable,
16048A test lead, and 42843A bias current cable (only for 40 A system). The
cable connection varies depending on the system configuration.
20A System
Connect the E4980A to the 42841A and 42842A as shown in Figure D-1 on
page 461 using the following procedure.
1. Connect the UNKNOWN terminal of the E4980A to the TO UNKNOWN
terminal of the 42842A using the 16048A test lead.
2. Connect the Bias Current Interface connector of the E4980A to the Bias
Current Control Input A connector of the 42841A using the cable and the
adapter. The cable is furnished with the 42841A and the adapter is
furnished with the E4980A.
3. Connect the 42842A test fixture directly to the front panel of the 42841A.

Preparation
Figure D-1 Cable connection for an E4980A (20 A) system
E4980A
E4980A 20 Hz - 2 MHz
7 8 9
DC DC
Source Bias USB
Trigger 4 5 6
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
DC
DC Source
Return
(Option 001/101)
r10VDC Max
Save/ Local/
Recall Lock
16048A
42842A
42841A
Front View
Adapter

E4980A
Serial Label
USB
E4980A
LAN Trigger
GPIB
LINE
115V
-230V
50/60Hz
150VA MAX
Fuse Option 710: No Interface

T3A , 250V
Bias Current
Interface Cable
42841A
Rear View
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪉

Preparation
40 A System
Connect the E4980A to the 42841A and the 42842B as shown in Figure D-2 on
page 463 using the following procedure.
1. Connect the UNKNOWN terminal of the E4980A to the TO UNKNOWN

terminal of the 42842B using the 16048A test lead.
2. Connect the 42842B test fixture directly to the front panel of the 42841A.
3. Connect the DC Bias Current Output Connector of the 42841A (that is not
connected to the 42842B and DC Bias Current Input Connector of the
42842B side panel) using a 42843A Bias Current Cable.
4. Connect the E4980A Bias Current Interface connector to the Bias Current
Control Input A connector of the 42841A using the furnished Bias Current
Interface Cable (1) and the adapter. The cable is furnished with the
42841A and the adapter is furnished with the E4980A.
5. Connect the 42841A Bias Current Control Input B connector connected to
the 42842B to the Bias Current Control Input A connector of the other
42841A using the furnished Bias Current Interface Cable (2).

Preparation
Figure D-2 Cable connection for an E4980A(40 A) system
E4980A
E4980A 20 Hz - 2 MHz
7 8 9
DC DC
Source Bias USB
Trigger 4 5 6
1 2 3
UNKNOWN
DC Bias 0 .
16048A
DC
DC Source
Return
(Option 001/101)
r10VDC Max
Save/ Local/
Recall Lock
42841A 42841A
42842B
42843A
Front View
Adapter

E4980A
GPIB
Serial Label
E4980A
USB
LAN Trigger
Bias Current Interface Cable (1)
LINE
115V
-230V
50/60Hz
Bias Current Interface Cable (2)

150VA MAX
Fuse Option 710: No Interface

T3A , 250V
42841A 42841A
Rear View
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪎㪍

Measurement Procedures
Measurement Procedures
For measurement procedures when using the 42841A Bias Current Source, see
“Basic Measurement Procedure” of the Chapter, “Operation Procedure and
Examples” in the 42841A manual. The measurement procedure is the same as
that of the 4284A.

Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
E Handler Interface
This chapter provides information necessary to use Option 201 Handler

Interface for the Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter.
Overview
The Keysight E4980A/AL Option 201 Handler Interface outputs signals that
indicate the end of a measurement cycle, the result of bin sorting by the
comparator, and the result of Go/No-Go test by the list sweep comparator. In
addition, the instrument accepts input of external trigger and key-lock signals.
You can use these signals to easily integrate the E4980A/AL with a component
handler or system controller. This means that you can fully automate such
tasks as component inspection, component sorting, and processing of quality
management data for higher manufacturing efficiency.

- Handler Interface
Specifications
Specifications
Output Signals
Active low, open collector, photo isolation
Table E-1 Output Signals
Signal Overview
Result output — Comparator

Bin number, OUT OF BINS, status signal
— List sweep comparator
Results of sweep-by-sweep IN/OUT test and
continuous comparison
/INDEX “End of analog measurement” signal
/EOM “End of all measurement” signal
/ALARM Provides an alarm when an instantaneous power failure has
been detected or the handler interface board has been
reset.
/READY_FOR_TRIGGER “Ready for trigger” signal
Input Signals
Photo isolation
Table E-2 Input Signals
Signal Overview
/KEY_LOCK Key lock (locks out the front panel keyboard)

/EXT_TRIG External trigger signal, pulse width ≥ 1 s

Handler Interface
Signal Line Definitions

The instrument uses three types of signals: test result output, control output,
and control input. The definitions of test result output and control input signals
differ depending on whether they are used for the comparator or the list sweep
comparator.
This section explains the signal definitions that apply when using the handler
interface with the comparator and with the list sweep comparator.
Signal Line Definitions for the Comparator

When the handler interface is used with the comparator, the following signal
definitions apply:
— Test result output signals
/BIN1 to /BIN9, /AUX_BIN, /OUT_OF_BINS, /PHI (“primary parameter
beyond upper limit” signal), /PLO (“primary parameter below lower limit”
signal), /SREJ (“secondary parameter out of limits” signal), /OVLD
(measurement failure” signal)
— Control output signals
/INDEX (“end of analog measurement” signal), /EOM (“end of measurement
cycle” and “result data available” signal), /READY_FOR_TRIGGER (“ready
for trigger” signal)
— Control input signals
/EXT_TRIG (“external trigger” signal), /KEY_LOCK (“key lock” signal)
Connector pin layouts and comparator signal descriptions are shown in Table
E-13, Figure E-1, and Figure E-2. Also, Figure E-3 shows a signal timing chart.
A signal prefixed with a slash (/) indicates that the signal is negative logic
(active low).
Table E-3 Pin layouts for the comparator
Pin Signal name Signal Description

number direction
1 /BIN1 Output These signals indicate the result of sorting. They show into which bin the DUT has
2 /BIN2 been sorted. 
3 /BIN3 All of these output signals are open-collector based.
4 /BIN4
5 /BIN5
6 /BIN6
7 /BIN7
8 /BIN8
9 /BIN9
10 /OUT_OF_BINS
11 /AUX_BIN

- Handler Interface

number direction
12 /EXT_TRIG Input An external trigger signal.

13 /EXT_TRIG These signals are used in the external trigger mode. Triggering occurs when the pulse
reaches a rising edge.
14 EXT.DCV2 Input External DC voltage.

15 EXT.DCV2 Supplies voltage for DC isolation input signals (/EXT_TRIG, /KEY_LOCK) and DC
isolation output signals (/ALARM, /INDEX, /EOM). 
To use the internal DC voltage, switch the settings with the jumper on the handler
interface board.
16 +5V Output Internal DC voltage.

17 +5V
18 +5V
19 /PHI Output “Primary parameter beyond upper limit” signal. 

This signal is output when the primary parameter has exceeded the upper limit for
bins 1 to 9.
20 /PLO Output “Primary parameter below lower limit” signal. 

This signal is output when the primary parameter is below the lower limit for bins 1 to
9.
21 /SREJ Output “Secondary parameter out of limits” signal. 

This signal is output when the secondary parameter is out the limits.
22 /READY_FOR_TRIGGER Output “Ready for trigger” signal. This signal is output while the instrument is ready to accept
trigger signals.
This means that it is output while the measurement screen is in the “trigger wait”
state. It is not output under any other conditions. Also, the signal is never output when
the trigger source is set to Internal Trigger.
23 RESERVED -- Not used.
24 /OVLD Output “Measurement failed” signal. This signal is output when the analog measurement
mechanism has failed to perform measurement (due to an overload). It is equivalent to
the /UNBAL signal of the 4284A.
25 /KEY_LOCK Input “Key lock” signal.

When this signal is input, the E4980A/AL's front panel keys are all disabled.
26 RESERVED -- Not used.
27 EXT.DCV1 Input External DC voltage.

28 EXT.DCV1 Supplies voltage for DC isolation signals (/BIN1 to /BIN9, /OUT_OF_BINS, /AUX_BIN,
/PHI, /PLO, /SREJ, /OVLD). 
To use the internal DC voltage, switch the settings with the jumper on the handler
interface board.
29 /ALARM Output “Error detected” signal. 

This signal is output when an instantaneous power failure has been detected. It is also
output when the handler interface board has been reset.
30 /INDEX Output “End of analog measurement” signal. 

This signal is output when analog measurement is complete. This means that once the
handler has received this signal, the next DUT can be connected to the UNKNOWN
terminal. However, measurement data are not available until the /EOM signal is
output.
31 /EOM Output “End of measurement cycle” signal. 

When this signal is output, the measurement data and sorting results are available.

Handler Interface

number direction
32 COM2 -- Common signals for external DC current EXT.DCV2.

33 COM2
34 COM1 -- Common signals for external DC current EXT.DCV1.

35 COM1
36 COM1

- Handler Interface
Figure E-1 Example of /PHI, /PLO, and /SREJ signal areas (for the comparator)
㪧㪟㪠㩿㪦㪬㪫㪶㪦㪝㩷㪙㪠㪥㪪㪀
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪈
㪧㫉㫀㫄㪸㫉㫐
㫇㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪉
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪊
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪋
㪪㪩㪜㪡㪪㪩㪜㪡
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪌
㩿㪘㪬㪯㪶㪙㪠㪥㪀㩿㪘㪬㪯㪶㪙㪠㪥㪀
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪍
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪎
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪏
㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪐
㪧㪣㪦㩿㪦㪬㪫㪶㪦㪝㩷㪙㪠㪥㪪㪀
㪪㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㪸㫉㫐㩷㫇㪸㫉㪸㫄㪼㫋㪼㫉
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪌

Handler Interface
Figure E-2 Handler interface connector pin layout
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪈㪈㪈㪐㪆㪧㪟㪠
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪉㪉㪉㪇㪆㪧㪣㪦
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪊㪊㪉㪈㪆㪪㪩㪜㪡
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪋㪋㪉㪉㪆㪩㪜㪘㪛㪰㪶㪝㪦㪩㪶㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪌㪌㪉㪊㪩㪜㪪㪜㪩㪭㪜㪛
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪍㪍㪉㪋㪆㪦㪭㪣㪛
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪎㪎㪉㪌㪆㪢㪜㪰㪶㪣㪦㪚㪢
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪏㪏㪉㪍㪩㪜㪪㪜㪩㪭㪜㪛
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪐㪐㪉㪎
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭㪈
㪆㪦㪬㪫㪶㪦㪝㪶㪙㪠㪥㪪㪈㪇㪉㪏
㪆㪘㪬㪯㪶㪙㪠㪥㪈㪈㪉㪐㪆㪘㪣㪘㪩㪤
㪈㪉㪊㪇㪆㪠㪥㪛㪜㪯
㪆㪜㪯㪫㪶㪫㪩㪠㪞
㪈㪊㪊㪈㪆㪜㪦㪤
㪈㪋㪊㪉
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭㪉㪚㪦㪤㩷㪉
㪈㪌㪊㪊
㪈㪍㪊㪋
㪂㪌㪭㪈㪎㪊㪌㪚㪦㪤㩷㪈
㪈㪏㪊㪍
㪑㪪㫀㪾㫅㪸㫃㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫌㫊㪼㪻㩷㪽㫆㫉
㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫀㫊㫋㩷㫊㫎㪼㪼㫇㩷㪺㫆㫄㫇㪸㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉
㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫀㫊㩷㪻㫀㪽㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㫋㩷㪽㫉㫆㫄
㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫌㫊㪼㪻㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫄㫇㪸㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉
㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪍

- Handler Interface
Figure E-3 Timing chart (for the comparator)
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
/EXT_TRIG
/INDEX
/EOM,
/READY_FOR_TRIG
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪈㪇
Table E-4 Time segments in the time chart
Time segment Minimum value Typical1
T1 Trigger pulse width 1 sec -

T2 Measurement /INDEX and /EOM response 0 Sec 350 msec
cycle time
T3 Analog measurement time Depends on settings -
T4 Digital math time 0 Sec
T5 Trigger wait time after the output of /EOM, 0 Sec -
/READY_FOR_TRIGGER
1. The measurement time is affected by the GPIB/USB/Network and Front panel processes.

Handler Interface
Signal Line Definitions for the List Sweep Comparator

The signal definitions for the list sweep comparator differ from those for the
comparator.
When the handler interface is used with the list sweep comparator, the
following signal definitions apply:
— Test result output signals
Signals /BIN1 to /BIN9 and /AUX_BIN represent the results of IN/OUT tests
at sweep points 1 to 10, respectively. /OUT_OF_BINS indicates whether the
DUT has passed or failed the test (a DUT fails the test if it generates an OUT
result in any of steps 1 to 201 during one cycle of sweep measurement).
These signals are output at the end of the sweep cycle.
The output timings of /INDEX (“end of analog measurement”) and /EOM
(“end of measurement cycle”) signals differ depending on the sweep mode
for list sweep (these signals behave differently than when used for the
comparator).
1. SEQ sweep mode
/INDEX is output when the last analog measurement in the sweep
cycle is complete. /EOM is output when all the comparator test
results become available after the end of the sweep cycle.
2. STEP sweep mode
/INDEX is output when the analog measurement step in each step of
the sweep cycle is complete. /EOM is output when the all the
measurements in each step of the sweep cycle are complete
(including the measurement time).
Connector pin layouts and comparator signal descriptions for the list sweep
comparator are shown in Table E-13, Figure E-4, and Figure E-2. (the pin
layouts for the list sweep comparator are the same as those for the
comparator). Also, Figure E-5 shows a signal timing chart.
A signal prefixed with a slash (/) indicates that the signal is negative logic
(active low).

- Handler Interface
Table E-5 Pin layouts for the list sweep comparator

number direction
1 /BIN1 Output Failure at sweep point 1 (outside limits)

2 /BIN2 Failure at sweep point 2 (outside limits)
10 /OUT_OF_BINS This signal is output when the DUT fails at any of points 1 to 201 during one
sweep cycle.
11 /AUX_BIN Output Failure at sweep point 10 (outside limits)
19-21 N.U. -- Not used (always off at high level)
30 /INDEX Output SEQ sweep mode: 

This signal is output when the last analog measurement in the sweep cycle is
complete. This means that once the handler has received this signal, the
next DUT can be connected to the UNKNOWN terminal. However,
measurement data are not available until the /EOM signal is output.
STEP sweep mode: 
This signal is output when the analog measurement at each point in the
sweep cycle is complete. This means that once the handler has received this
signal, the instrument can proceed to the next sweep point. However,
measurement data are not available until the /EOM signal is output.
31 /EOM Output “End of measurement cycle” signal

SEQ sweep mode: 
This signal is output at the end of the sweep cycle. Therefore, when this
signal is output, the measurement data and sorting results are available.
STEP sweep mode: This signal is output when the measurement at each
point is complete (including the comparator test time) and the
corresponding measurement data are available. The comparator test result
is available after the /EOM signal for the last sweep point is output.
12-18 Same assignments as for the comparator.

22-29
32-36

Handler Interface
Figure E-4 Example of signal areas (for the list sweep comparator)
㪆㪙㪠㪥㪊㪆㪙㪠㪥㪍㪆㪙㪠㪥㪐

㪆㪙㪠㪥㪉㪆㪙㪠㪥㪌㪆㪙㪠㪥㪏㪆㪘㪬㪯㪶㪙㪠㪥
㪆㪙㪠㪥㪈㩷㪆㪙㪠㪥㪋㪆㪙㪠㪥㪎
㩷㩷㩷㫍㪸㫃㫌㪼
㪧㪸㫊㫊㩷㪸㫉㪼㪸
㪟㫀㪾㪿㪼㫉㩷㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋
㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪣㫀㫄㫀㫋
㪈㪉㪊㪋㪌㪍㪎㪏㪐㪈㪇
㪪㫎㪼㪼㫇㩷㫇㫆㫀㫅㫋
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪊

- Handler Interface
Figure E-5 Timing chart (for the list sweep comparator)
SEQ Sweep Mode: T2 T3

T1
/EXT_TRIG
/INDEX
/EOM
Data Previous Sweep's Data Valid Data Valid
a sweep
a measurement a measurement
Measurement
Timing
Comparison and
Settling Delay Measurement Display Time
Time Time Time
STEP Sweep Mode: T2 T3

T1
/EXT_TRIG
/INDEX
/EOM
Data Previous Sweep's Data Valid Data Valid
a sweep
Measurement
Timing
Comparison and
Settling Delay Measurement Display Time
Time Time Time
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪍㪐
T1 Trigger pulse width 1 sec -

T2 /INDEX and /EOM response time of measurement time 0 Sec 350 msec

Handler Interface
T3 Trigger wait time after the output of /EOM 0 Sec -

For settling and display times, refer to Chapter 11, “Specifications and
Supplemental Information”, on page 417.

- Handler Interface
Electrical Characteristics
As described in the previous section, some signals have different meanings
depending on whether they are used for the comparator or the list sweep
comparator. However, all the signals always retain the same electric
characteristics regardless of how they are used. The following descriptions
apply both when the handler interface is used with the comparator and when it
is used with the list sweep comparator.
DC Isolation Output Signals

DC isolation output signals (pins 1 to 11, 19 to 24, and 29 to 31) are output
from an open collector photocoupler. This output signal is obtained as a
voltage over a pull-up resistor that is mounted on the handler interface board.
The output voltage is jumper-switchable between the internal power supply
(+5 V, +12 V) and the external power supply (+5 to +24 V for EXT.DCV1 or +5 to
+24 V for EXT.DCV2).
The DC isolation output signals use their dedicated electrical system
independently of the control output signals. Therefore, the handler board has
two separate circuit common lines: COM1 and COM2.
Table E-13 shows the electrical characteristics of the DC isolation output
signals.
Table E-7 Electrical characteristics of the DC isolation output signals
Output Signals Voltage output rating Maximum Circuit common

current
LOW HIGH
Test result output signals 0 to 0.5 V DCV11 6 mA When internal pull-up

/BIN1 to /BIN9 voltage is used: 
/AUX_BIN Circuit common of
/OUT_OF_BINS E4980A/AL
/PHI When external voltage
/PLO (EXT.DCV1) is used: 
/SREJ COM1
/OVLD
Control output signals 0 to 0.5 V DCV22 6 mA When internal pull-up
/INDEX voltage is used: 
/EOM Circuit common of
/ALARM E4980A/AL
/READY_FOR_TRIGGER When external voltage
(EXT.DCV2) is used: 
COM1
1. +5 V or +12 V when internal power supply is used. 
+5 V to +24 V (EXT.DCV1) when external power supply is used.

Handler Interface
2. +5 V or +12 V when internal power supply is used. 

+5 V to +24 V (EXT.DCV2) when external power supply is used.
Figure E-6 shows the output circuit configuration for the test result output
signals, and Figure E-7 shows that for the control output signals.
Figure E-6 Output circuit configuration for the test result output signals
㪟㪘㪥㪛㪣㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪟㪘㪥㪛㪣㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜
㪚㪦㪥㪥㪜㪚㪫㪦㪩
㪂㪌㪭㪂㪈㪉㪭㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭㪈
㪡㪧㪈㪄㪈㪡㪧㪈㪄㪉㪡㪧㪈㪄㪊
㪧㪬㪣㪣㪄㪬㪧
㪩㪜㪪㪠㪪㪫㪦㪩
㪆㪦㪬㪫㪶㪦㪝㪶㪙㪠㪥㪪
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪈
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪏
㪆㪙㪠㪥㩷㩷㪐
㪆㪘㪬㪯㪶㪙㪠㪥
㪆㪧㪟㪠
㪆㪧㪣㪦
㪆㪪㪩㪜㪡
㪆㪦㪭㪣㪛
㪚㪦㪤㩷㪈
㪪㪈㪄㪌
㪜㪋㪐㪏㪇㪘㩷㪚㫆㫄㫄㫆㫅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪎

- Handler Interface
Figure E-7 Output circuit configuration for the control output signals
㪟㪘㪥㪛㪣㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪟㪘㪥㪛㪣㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜
㪂㪌㪭㪂㪈㪉㪭㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭㪉
㪡㪧㪉㪄㪈㪡㪧㪉㪄㪉㪡㪧㪉㪄㪊
㪧㪬㪣㪣㪄㪬㪧
㪩㪜㪪㪠㪪㪫㪦㪩
㪆㪘㪣㪘㪩㪤
㪆㪠㪥㪛㪜㪯
㪆㪜㪦㪤
㪆㪩㪜㪘㪛㪰㪶㪝㪦㪩㪶㪫㪩㪠㪞㪞㪜㪩
㪚㪦㪤㩷㪉
㪪㪈㪄㪍
㪜㪋㪐㪏㪇㪘㩷㪚㫆㫄㫄㫆㫅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪏
DC isolation input signals (photo-coupled)

DC isolation input signals include /EXT_TRIG and /KEY_LOCK signals.
1. /EXT_TRIG signal
The /EXT_TRIG signal (pins 12 and 13) is input to the photocoupler LED
(on the cathode side). When the signal rises from LOW to HIGH, the
instrument is triggered. The photocoupler LED (on the anode side) is
driven by either internal pull-up voltage (+5 V,+12 V) or external voltage
(EXT.DCV2).
The trigger input limiting resistor should be set via jumper J6 depending
on the magnitude of the photocoupler anode voltage. For more
information, see “Setting Up the Handler Interface Board” on page 483.

Handler Interface
2. /KEY_LOCK signal
The /KEY_LOCK signal (pin 25) is input to the photocoupler LED (on the
cathode side). As long as this signal is Low, the instrument’s front panel
keys are all locked. The photocoupler LED (on the anode side) is driven by
either internal supply voltage (+5 V,+12 V) or external supply voltage
(EXT.DCV2). This voltage is applied to pin 15 or 16 of the instrument’s
connector.
The pull-up voltage, selected using jumper J4, determines the voltage of
/KEY_LOCK (pin 25) in its OFF state as well as the /EXT_TRIG (pins 12 and
13) signal.
Table E-13 shows the electrical characteristics of the DC isolation input
signals.
Table E-8 Electrical characteristics of the DC isolation input signals (typical)
Signal Input voltage Input current (at Low) Circuit common

name
Pull-up voltage
LOW HIGH 5V 12 V 15 V 24 V
/EXT_TRIG 1V 5 V to 24 V 11.1 mA 10.5 mA 13.5 mA 10.6 mA When internal pull-up

voltage is used: 
Circuit common of 
E4980A/AL
When external
voltage is used:
COM2
/KEY_LOCK 1V 5 V to 24 V 2.4 mA 6.6 mA 9.1 mA 14.6 mA When internal pull-up
voltage is used: 
Circuit common of 
E4980A/AL
When external
voltage is used:
COM2
Figure E-8 shows the circuit configuration for the input signals.

- Handler Interface
Figure E-8 Circuit configuration for the input signals
㪟㪘㪥㪛㪣㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪟㪘㪥㪛㪣㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭㪉㪂㪈㪉㪭㪂㪌㪭
㪡㪧㪉㪄㪊㪡㪧㪉㪄㪉㪡㪧㪉㪄㪈
㪪㪈㪄㪋㪪㪈㪄㪊㪪㪈㪄㪉㪪㪈㪄㪈
㪈㪅㪍㪋㫂㱅㪉㪅㪉㪎㫂㱅㪈㫂㱅㪌㪍㪉㱅㪊㪈㪍㱅
㪆㪢㪜㪰㪶㪣㪦㪚㪢
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪊㪐

Handler Interface
Setting Up the Handler Interface Board

The handler interface board has two jumpers (JP1 and JP2) and one bit switch.
They should be set depending on how the signals should be output from the
handler interface connector (whether to make them open-collector based;
whether to use the internal or external voltage output).
Table E-9 lists available jumper positions and their respective effects. It also
shows available bitwise settings of the bit switch along with their respective
results.
Table E-9 Internal jumper settings
Jumper Jumper Description Affected signals

number position1
JP1 1 Sets the pull-up voltage for output signals to +5 V (internal). /BIN1to /BIN9
/AUX_BIN
2 Sets the pull-up voltage for output signals to +12 V (internal). /OUT_OF_BIN
3(N) Sets the pull-up voltage for output signals to external voltage /PHI to /OVLD
(EXT.DCV1).
4 Not used.
JP2 1 Sets the pull-up voltage for output signals and the drive voltage for /INDEX
input signals to +5 V (internal). /EOM
/ALARM
2 Sets the pull-up voltage for output signals and the drive voltage for /EXT_TRIG
input signals to +12 V (internal). /KEY_LOCK
3(N) Sets the pull-up voltage for output signals and the drive voltage for /READY_FOR_TRIGGER
input signals to +5 V through +15V (EXT.DCV2).
4 Not used.
1. The factory default setting is position (N) shown in the table above.
The handler interface board has labels “JP1” and “JP2” that indicate
where jumpers JP1 and JP2 are located.
Both jumpers JP1 and JP2 have a circle mark indicating their #1 side.

- Handler Interface
Table E-10 Bit switch (S1) settings
Bit Factory Description Affected signals

number 1 default
settings
1 Off When you set JP2 to 1 or JP2 to 3 and set EXT.DCV2 to 5 V through /EXT_TRIG
6 V, set this bit to ON as well. 
As a result, the input current limiting resistor for the /EXT_TRIG
signal is set to 316 .
2 Off When you set JP2 to 3 and set EXT.DCV2 to 6 V through 9 V, set
this bit to ON as well. 
signal is set to 562 .
3 On When you set JP2 to 2 or 3 and set EXT.DCV2 to 9 V through 15 V,

set this bit to ON as well. 
signal is set to 1 k.
4 Off When you set JP2 to 3 and set EXT.DCV2 to 15 V through 24 V, set
this bit to ON as well. 
signal is set to 2.27 k.
5 Off DC isolation switch for COM1. /BIN1to /BIN9

/AUX_BIN
When this switch is ON, COM1 is connected to the instrument's
/OUT_OF_BIN
circuit common line; therefore, the DC isolation output is not
/PHI to /OVLD
isolated.
When this switch is OFF, the DC isolation output for COM1 is
isolated.
6 Off DC isolation switch for COM2. /INDEX

/EOM
When this switch is ON, COM2 is connected to the instrument's
/ALARM
circuit common line; therefore, the DC isolation output is not
/EXT_TRIG
isolated.
/KEY_LOCK
When this switch is OFF, the DC isolation output for COM2 is /READY_FOR_TRIGGER
isolated.
7 - Not used. -
8 - Not used. -
1. The bit numbers referenced in this table are the numbers printed on the bit switch (S1) of the handler interface board.

Handler Interface
The handler interface board has a label “S1” that indicates where bit
switch S1 is located.
Only one of bits 1 through 4 can be ON at a time. You cannot turn ON any
more than one bit at a time.
When you use the +5-V output of the handler interface connector (pins 16
to 18), set up the circuit common line by turning ON bit 5 or 6 of bit switch
S1 and use COM1 or COM 2 connected with the instrument's circuit
common line as a +5-V common line.
Follow these steps to properly set up the jumpers and bit switch as well as the
pull-up resistor.
Setting up the jumpers, bit switch, and pull-up resistor
Step 1. Turn off the power to the E4980A/AL, unplug the power cable, and wait for a
few minutes until the internal capacitors are completely discharged.
Do not disconnect the handler interface board from the instrument

immediately after turning on or off the power to the E4980A/AL. Doing so
could damage the handler interface board and the E4980A/AL itself.
Step 2. Remove the two screws that secure the handler interface board to the
Step 3. Draw out the handler interface board and unplug the flat cable that is
connected to it.
Step 4. Remove the handler interface board.
Step 5. Go through the following flow chart to determine the jumper and bit switch
settings for the test result output signals:

- Handler Interface
Figure E-9 Flow chart for determining the jumper and bit switch settings
㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫
䋨㪈䋩㪫㪿㪼㩷㫇㫌㫃㫃㪄㫌㫇㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫆㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㫊㫀㪾㫅㪸㫃㫊㩷㪑䋨㪉䋩

㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿㪈㪀㩷㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㫅㪸㫃㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿㪉㪀㩷㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪼㫏㫋㪼㫉㫅㪸㫃㩷㫍㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼
㪧㫌㫃㫃㪄㫌㫇㩷㪭㫆㫃㫋㪸㪾㪼㩷㪑㩷㩷㪧㫌㫃㫃㪄㫌㫇㩷㪩㪼㫊㫀㫊㫋㫆㫉㫊㩷㪑
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿㪈㪀㩷㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪂㪌㪭㩿㪈㪀㩷㩷㪤㫆㫌㫅㫋㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪿㪸㫅㪻㫃㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪠㪆㪝㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿㪉㪀㩷㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪂㪈㪉㪭㩿㪉㪀㩷㩷㪤㫆㫌㫅㫋㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪿㪸㫅㪻㫃㪼㫉
䋨㪈䋩䋨㪉䋩䋨㪈䋩䋨㪉䋩
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪈㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪉㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪊㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪋
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪋㪉
Step 6. Set up the jumpers as instructed in Table E-11.

Table E-11 Jumper and bit switch settings for test result output signals
Setting # JP1 Bit 5 of Circuit common Pull-up resistor Pull-up voltage

S1 mounting
Setting 1 1 On Instrument’s circuit Required +5 V, internal

common
common
Setting 3 3 Off COM1 Required +5 V through +24 V,
external
(EXT.DCV1)
Setting 4 - Off COM1 Not required -

Handler Interface
Step 7. If Table E-11 shows “Required” in the “Pull-up resistor mounting” column for
the setting you want to use, mount the pull-up resistor for the comparator
test result output signals. The pull-up resistor for DCV1 uses J1 and J2,
whose locations are indicated as J1 and J2 on the handler interface board.
The pull-up resistor must be a resistor array of which the characteristics
satisfy the following formula:
Vp
Equation E-1 R  -------
3
where:
— Vp [V]: pull-up voltage
— R [k]: pull-up resistance
For the typical pull-up resistor values, refer to Table E-14 on page 488.
Step 8. Go through the flow chart in Step 5 to determine the jumper and bit switch
settings for the control output signals:
Step 9. Set up the jumpers as instructed in Table E-12.
Table E-12 Jumper and bit switch settings for control output signals
Setting # JP2 Bit 6 of Circuit common Pull-up resistor Pull-up voltage

S1 mounting

common
common
Setting 3 3 Off COM2 Required +5 V through +24 V,
external
(EXT.DCV2)
Setting 4 -1 Off COM2 Not required -
1. Set to 3 when using input signals (it is not necessary to mount the pull-up resistor).
Step 10. If Table E-12 shows “Required” in the “Pull-up resistor mounting” column for
the setting you want to use, mount the pull-up resistor for the control output
signals. The pull-up resistor for DCV2 uses J3, whose location is indicated as
J3 on the handler interface board.
The pull-up resistor must be a resistor array of which the characteristics
satisfy the following formula:
Vp
Equation E-2 R  -------
3

- Handler Interface
where:
— Vp [V]: pull-up voltage
— R [k]: pull-up resistance
For the typical pull-up resistor values, refer to Table E-14 on page 488.
Step 11. Set up the bit switch for input signals as instructed in Table E-13.
Table E-13 Bit switch settings for input signals
Drive voltage Bits 1 through 4 of Circuit common

S11
+5 V, internal Turn ON bit 1. Instrument’s circuit

common
+12 V, internal Turn ON bit 3. Instrument’s circuit
common
+5 V through +6 V, Turn ON bit 1. COM2
external
(EXT.DCV2)
external
(EXT.DCV2)
external
(EXT.DCV2)
external
(EXT.DCV2)
1. Only one of bits 1 through 4 of the bit switch can be ON at a time.
Step 12. Connect the flat cable to the handler interface board. Reinstall the handler
interface board to its original position and secure it with the two screws.
When tightening each screw, take care not to apply excessive force
because doing so can break the tapped hole. (0.98 N-Em, 0.1 kgf-m Max).
The typical pull-up resistor values are:
Table E-14 The typical pull-up resistor vaules
Pull-Up Voltage Pull-Up Resistor Keysight Part Number
5V 1.7 k ( = 5 V / 3 mA) 1810-0276 (1.5 k)

Handler Interface
Table E-14 The typical pull-up resistor vaules
Pull-Up Voltage Pull-Up Resistor Keysight Part Number
9V 3.0 k ( = 9 V / 3 mA) 1810-0278 (3.3 k)

12 V 4.0 k ( = 12 V / 3 mA) 1810-0279 (4.7 k)
15 V 5.0 k ( = 15 V / 3 mA) 1810-0279 (4.7 k)
24 V 8.0 k ( = 24 V / 3 mA) 1810-0280 (10.0 k)

- Handler Interface
Using the Handler Interface

Before you can use the handler interface, you need to set up the handler
interface board. Then, set up the limit table for the comparator or the list
sweep table for the list sweep comparator. Finally, enable the handler interface
for signal input/output.
This section provides the handler interface setup procedures for the
comparator and the list sweep comparator.
Setting Up the Handler Interface for Use with the Comparator

To set up the handler interface for the comparator, follow these steps:
Step 1. Press [Meas Setup] - LIMIT TABLE to open the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page.
Step 2. Set up the limit table for bin sorting. For more information, see the chapter on
“Configuring Measurement Conditions.”
Step 3. Using the cursor movement keys on the front panel, move the cursor to the
COMP field. The following softkeys appear on the softkey label area.
— ON
— OFF
Step 4. Press the ON softkey. The comparator is enabled.
Step 5. Press the [System] key to open the SYSTEM INFO page.
HANDLER I/F field. The following softkeys appear on the softkey label area.
— ON
— OFF
Step 7. Press the ON softkey. The handler interface is enabled for signal
input/output.
Step 8. Press the [Display Format] key to open the MEAS DISPLAY page. Prepare for
measurement by pressing one of the following softkeys: MEAS DISPLAY, BIN
No., and BIN COUNT.
You can also use the BIN No. DISPLAY page to enable or disable the
comparator.

Handler Interface
Setting Up the Handler Interface Board for Use with the List Sweep
Comparator
Follow these steps to set up the handler interface for the list sweep
comparator:
Step 1. [Meas Setup] - LIST SETUP to open the LIST SWEEP SETUP page.
Step 2. Set up the list table (by defining the sweep points and upper/lower limits) so
that you can conduct list sweep measurement. For more information, see the
chapter on “Configuring Measurement Conditions.”
Step 3. Press the [System] key to open the SYSTEM INFO page.
HANDLER I/F field. The following softkeys appear on the softkey label area.
— ON
— OFF
Step 5. Press the ON softkey. The handler interface is enabled for signal
input/output.
Step 6. Press the [Display Format] key to open the MEAS DISPLAY page. Press the
LIST SWEEP softkey so that you can begin list sweep measurement.

- Handler Interface
Signals Activated when Overload Occurs

Signals activated when overload occurs are as follows. For conditions where
overload occurs, refer to “Displaying Errors instead of Measurement Results”
on page 71.
Table E-15 Signals activated when Overload Occurs
Measurement Parameter that overload occured Handler output

(active signal)
Impedance measurement (except for Ls/Lp-Rdc) /OUT_OF_BINS

/OVLD
Impedance measurement (Ls/Lp-Rdc) /OUT_OF_BINS
/OVLD
DCR measurement (Ls/Lp-Rdc) /OUT_OF_BINS
/OVLD
Vdc measurement (primary) /OUT_OF_BINS
/OVLD
Idc measurement (primary) /OUT_OF_BINS
/OVLD
Vdc measurement (secondary) normal
Idc measurement (secondary) normal
Signals are not output when the limit parameter (LMT field) is OFF during
the list sweep measurement. Signals are not output when the comparator
function (COMP field) is OFF during the measurement other than list
sweep.

Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
F Scanner Interface
This chapter provides electrical characteristics of the interface signal line

necessary to use the Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR meter option 301.

- Scanner Interface
Overview
Overview
When the Keysight E4980A/AL is used with the option 301 Scanner Interface,
it is possible to store and use up to 128 sets of correction data (OPEN, SHORT,
and LOAD) for up to 201 user-defined test frequencies. These 128 sets of
correction data can be used for each measurement using the multi-channel
correction function.
The E4980A/AL can correct stray admittance, residual impedance, and other
errors for each channel from the calibration plane to the connection contacts
at the device. Therefore, option 301 of the E4980A/AL can accurately measure
impedance values without any degradation of repeatability, or differences
between channels. Timing synchronization is also provided.
An amphenol 14-pin connector is used to interface between the E4980A/AL

and the scanner.
Figure F-1 Multi-channel Correction Data Memory Model
㪬㪧㩷㫋㫆㩷㪈㪉㪏㩷㫊㪼㫋㫊
㪪㪧㪦㪫㩷㪥㫆㪅㪈
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪈㪉㪎
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪈㪉㪍
㪪㪧㪦㪫㩷㪥㫆㪅㪉
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪊
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪉
㪪㪧㪦㪫㩷㪥㫆㪅㪉㪇㪈
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪈
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪇
㪦㪧㪜㪥㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㪣㪦㪘㪛

㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪌㪉

Scanner Interface
Specifications
Specifications
Specifications
Table F-1 Scanner Interface Specifications
Interface Connector Amphenol 14-pin connector

Maximum Number of Channels 128 (CH0 to CH127)
Output /INDEX Analog measurement complete (1 bit)
Signal
/EOM Full measurement complete (1 bit)
Input Signal /CH0 to /CH7 8-bit parallel input signals for selecting the channel
/CH_VALID Signal valid or invalid for /CH0 to /CH7
EXT_TRIG External trigger signal
Multi-channel Correction The multi-channel correction function can store OPEN, SHORT, and
LOAD correction data for each channel independently and
compensate each channel. The correction data at 201 test
frequencies can be stored in a flash memory.
Supplemental Performance Characteristics

Table F-2 Input Signal Characteristics: Opto-isolated, negative true
Signal Name Input Voltage Rate External Pull-up Input Current

Voltage
High Low
/CH0 to /CH7 Pull-up 1V 5 to 15 V 5 to 20 mA

/CH_VALID Voltage
EXT_TRIG Pull-up 1V 5 to 15 V 6.3 to15 mA
Voltage
Table F-3 Output Signal Characteristics: Opto-isolated, negative true
Signal Name External Pull-Up Voltage Maximum Current
/INDEX Max. 15 V 6 mA
/EOM

- Scanner Interface
Signal Input/Output Connector

The scanner interface I/O connector, a 14-pin amphenol connector, is
mounted in the option slot of the E4980A/AL’s rear panel for interconnection
between the E4980A/AL and the scanner.
Scanner Interface Input/Output Signals

The scanner interface I/O signals are divided into the following three types:
— Channel selection input signals
— Control input signals
Each signal is described in detail below.
Channel selection input signals

These signals are used to select the correction data that correspond to the
channel number of the scanner.
/CH0 to /CH7 Channel selection signals (8-bit, binary input). Select
the correction data corresponding to the channel of
the scanner. The most significant bit is /CH7 and the
least significant bit is /CH0.
/CH_VALID Channel valid signals. This signal makes the channel
number set by the channel selection signals valid or
invalid.
Since there are 128 channels, the /CH0 to /CH6 bits are manipulated.
Control output signals

These signals are used to control the timing between the E4980A/AL and the
scanner.
/INDEX Analog measurement complete. Since this signal is
asserted when an analog measurement is completed,
the channel can be switched to the next one.
Measurement data, however, cannot be obtained until
/EOM is asserted.
/EOM End of measurement. Since this signal is asserted
when a series of measurement is completed, the
E4980A/AL moves to the next measurement. When
this signal is asserted, the measurement data and the
comparison results are valid.

Scanner Interface
Assertion timing for /INDEX and /EOM is different for normal measurements
and list sweep measurements.
Table F-4 Control output signal assertion timing (normal measurement)
Signal Name Timing
/INDEX /INDEX is asserted when an analog measurement is completed

and the E4980A/AL is ready for the next DUT to be connected to
the UNKNOWN terminals.
/EOM /EOM is asserted when the measurement data and the
comparison results are valid.
Table F-5 Control output signal assertion timing (list sweep measurement, SEQ mode)
Signal Name Timing
/INDEX /INDEX is asserted when the last analog measurement of a list

sweep measurement is completed.
/EOM /EOM is asserted when all list sweep measurements are
completed and the measurement results are valid.
Table F-6 Control output signal assertion timing (list sweep measurement, STEP mode)
Signal Name Timing
/INDEX /INDEX is asserted when each analog measurement of a sweep

measurement is completed.
/EOM /EOM is asserted when each step measurement, including
comparison and display time, is completed.
Control Input Signal

Trigger signal to start measurement.
EXT_TRIG External trigger. This signal triggers the E4980A/AL on
the rising edge of a pulse when the trigger mode is set
to EXT_TRIG.
The / (slash) in the signal name means that the signal is asserted when
low.

- Scanner Interface
Scanner Interface I/O Connector Pin Assignments

The pin assignments for the scanner interface I/O connector are shown in
Figure F-2 and Table F-7.
Figure F-2 Scanner interface I/O connector pin assignments
㪆㪚㪟㪇㪈㪏㪆㪚㪟㪈
㪆㪚㪟㪉㪉㪐㪆㪚㪟㪊
㪆㪚㪟㪋㪊㪈㪇㪆㪚㪟㪌
㪆㪚㪟㪍㪋㪈㪈㪆㪚㪟㪎
㪆㪚㪟㪶㪭㪘㪣㪠㪛㪌㪈㪉㪜㪯㪫㪶㪫㪩㪠㪞
㪆㪠㪥㪛㪜㪯㪍㪈㪊㪆㪜㪦㪤
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭㪎㪈㪋㪚㪦㪤㪤㪦㪥
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㫁㪈㪈㪌㪊
Table F-7 Scanner interface I/O connector pin assignments
Pin No. Signal Name Input/Output Description
1 /CH0 Input Channel Selection Signal

2 /CH2
3 /CH4
4 /CH6
5 /CH_VALID Input Channel Valid Signal
6 /INDEX Output Analog Measurement Complete Signal.
7 EXT.DCV Input External DC Voltage.
Used as pull-up voltage of input/output signals.
The setting range is from 5 V to 15 V.

Scanner Interface
Table F-7 Scanner interface I/O connector pin assignments
Pin No. Signal Name Input/Output Description
8 /CH1 Input Channel Selection Signal

9 /CH3
10 /CH5
11 /CH7
12 EXT_TRIG Input External Trigger Signal
13 /EOM Output End-of-Measurement Signal
14 COMMON - Common for EXT. DCV
Assertion timing for these signals is different from normal measurements

and list sweep measurements.
The scanner system will operate more efficiently when the following
input/output control signals are used:
Step 1. Set the scanner channel to CHANNEL 0, the first scanner channel.
Step 2. Set the channel selection signals (/CH0 to /CH7) and the channel valid signal
(/CH_VALID) to compensate CHANNEL 0.
Step 3. Trigger the E4980A/AL with a trigger pulse input through the scanner
input/output connector on the rear panel The E4980A/AL will acknowledge
the channel number as CHANNEL0 and then measure the device connected
to scanner channel 0 using the correction data for it.
Step 4. Disassert /CH_VALID after disasserting /INDEX.
Step 5. Set the scanner channel, channel selection signals, and the channel valid
signal to the next channel to be measured when /INDEX is asserted.
Step 6. After /EOM is asserted, the E4980A/AL is ready to make the next
measurement.
Step 7. Repeat Step 4 through Step 6.

- Scanner Interface
Timing Chart
The timing chart is shown in Figure F-3.
Figure F-3 Timing chart (Normal measurement)
T2 T3 T4
T5
T1
/EXT_TRIG
3
6
/INDEX
2
5
/EOM
4
CH No. CH N CH N+1
/CH_VALID
Measurement
Timing
Correction Display
Data Switching Measurement Time
Time Time
Step Delay Comparison
Time Time
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪎㪇
Correction Data Switching Time 0 nsec

Measurement Time Refer to Chapter 11, “Specifications and
Supplemental Information”, on page 417.
Comparison Time approx. 1 msec (typical)
Display Time MEAS DISPLAY page approx. 10 msec
BIN No. DISPLAY page approx. 10 msec
BIN COUNT DISPLA page approx. 10 msec
Table F-8 Each time of the timing chart
Time Minimum Typical1
T1 Trigger Pulse Width 1 sec -

T2 Measurement Start Delay Time - 350 sec
T3 /CH_VALID Wait Time after Measurement 0 nsec -
Start
T4 Wait Time after /EOM Output 0 sec -

Scanner Interface
Table F-8 Each time of the timing chart
Time Minimum Typical1
T5 /CH_VALID Setup Time 0 sec -


- Scanner Interface
Figure F-4 Timing Chart (List sweep measurement)
SEQ Sweep Mode: T2 T3 T4

T5
T1
/EXT_TRIG
/INDEX
/EOM
CH No. CH N CH N+1
/CH_VALID
a sweep
Measurement
Timing
Comparison and
Settling Measurement Display Time
Time Step Time
Delay Time
STEP Sweep Mode: T2 T3 T4
T5
T1
/EXT_TRIG
/INDEX
/EOM
CH No. CH N CH N+1
/CH_VALID
a sweep
Measurement
Timing
Comparison and
Settling Measurement Display Time
Time Step Time
Delay Time
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪎㪈
Settling time includes switching time for correction data. Comparison and
display time is approx. 4.5 ms. Refer to Table F-8 for information on T1, T2,
T3, T4, and T5.
Figure F-5 shows a sample of the system configuration using the input/output
signals described above.

Scanner Interface
Figure F-5 Sample of system configuration of scanner interface
㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
㪆㪚㪟㪇㩷㩷㪆㪚㪟㪎㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㪚㪿㪸㫅㫅㪼㫃
㪆㪚㪟㪶㪭㪘㪣㪠㪛㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪚㪿㪸㫅㫅㪼㫃㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉
㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㪆㪠㪥㪛㪜㪯
㪆㪜㪦㪤
㪠㪆㪝
㪜㪋㪐㪏㪇㪘㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃㩷㪫㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪫㪩㪠㪞
㪬㪥㪢㪥㪦㪮㪥㪫㫉㫀㪾㪾㪼㫉㩷㪞㪼㫅㪼㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉
㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪚㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪌㪋

- Scanner Interface
Electrical Characteristics of the Input/Output Signals

The electrical characteristics of the scanner interface I/O signals are described
below.
Channel Selection Input Signals

The /CH0 to /CH7 and /CH_VALID signals are optocoupled to isolate DC
inputs. Each signal is connected to the cathode of an LED in the optocoupler,
which is current driven, requiring 5 mA to 20 mA for proper operation. The
OFF-state voltage (high level) of each signal depends on the pull-up voltage
(EXT. DCV) used. EXT. DCV can be set from 5 V to 15 V. The selector switches
must be set according to the value of EXT. DCV used (Refer to Table F-9).
External Trigger Input Signals

The EXT_TRIG signal is optocoupled to dc isolate the input. This signal is
connected to the cathode of an LED in an optocoupler which is current driven,
requiring 6.3 mA to 15 mA for proper operation. The OFF state voltage (high
level) of each signal depends on the pull-up voltage (EXT. DCV) used. EXT.
DCV can be set from 5 V to 15 V. The bit selector switches must be set
according to the value of EXT. DCV used (Refer to Table F-9).
Table F-9 DC isolate input signal electrical characteristics
Signal Name Input Voltage Input Voltage (when low) (reference value)
Pull-up Supply Voltage EXT. DCV
Low High 5V 12 V 15 V
/CH0 to /CH7 0 to 1 V EXT.DCV 9.0 mA 12.7 mA 16.2 mA

/CH_VALID
EXT_TRIG 0 to 1 V EXT.DCV 11.1 mA 10.5 mA 13.5 mA
Figure F-6 shows a diagram of channel selection input signals, and Figure F-7
shows a diagram of external trigger input signals.

Scanner Interface
Figure F-6 Diagram of channel selection input signal circuits
㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㩷㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜
㪚㪦㪥㪥㪜㪚㪫㪦㪩㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭
㪪㪈㪄㪋㪪㪉㪄㪏㪪㪉㪄㪈
㪏㪉㪇㱅㪏㪉㪇㱅㪏㪉㪇㱅㪏㪉㪇㱅㪏㪉㪇㱅㪏㪉㪇㱅
㪆㪚㪟㪇
㪆㪚㪟㪎
㪆㪚㪟㪶㪭㪘㪣㪠㪛
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪍㪎

- Scanner Interface
Figure F-7 Diagram of external trigger input signal circuits
㪚㪦㪥㪥㪜㪚㪫㪦㪩㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪜㪯㪫㪅㪛㪚㪭
㪪㪈㪄㪊㪪㪈㪄㪉㪪㪈㪄㪈
㪈㫂㱅㪌㪍㪉㱅㪊㪈㪍㱅
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪍㪍

Scanner Interface
Control Output Signals

The /INDEX and /EOM signals have optocoupled open collector outputs. The
combination of pull-up resistor and pull-up voltage must result in a current
through the optocoupler of less than 6 mA (Refer to Table F-10).
Figure F-8 shows a schematic of the /INDEX and /EOM output circuits.
Table F-10 Output signal electrical characteristics
Signal Name External Pull-up Voltage Maximum Current
/INDEX 15 V max. 6 mA
/EOM
Figure F-8 Simplified diagram of the output circuits
㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪚㪦㪥㪥㪜㪚㪫㪦㪩
㪆㪠㪥㪛㪜㪯
㪆㪜㪦㪤
㪚㪦㪤㪤㪦㪥
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪍㪏

- Scanner Interface
Setting Up the Scanner Interface Board

When you use the scanner interface I/O signals, you must set the pull-up
resistor according to the external DC voltage (EXT. DCV) used with two
switches on the scanner interface board.
The bit switch setting procedure for the pull-up resistor setting is described
below.
Switch setting procedures
Step 1. Disconnect the power cable from the E4980A/AL and allow enough time (a
few minutes) for the internal capacitors to discharge.
Disconnecting the scanner interface board from the unit while power is
supplied or immediately after turning off the power may damage the
scanner interface board and the E4980A/AL
Step 2. Remove the two screws that fix the scanner interface board to the
Step 3. Pull off the scanner interface board and disconnect the connected flat cable.
Step 4. Remove the scanner interface board.
Step 5. Set two bit switches (S1, S2) referring to Table F-11 and Table F-12.
Table F-11 Setting Bit Switch (S1)
Bit Default Pull-up EXT. DCV Function

Resistor
11 On 316  5 V  EXT.DCV  6 V Switch for setting EXT_TRIG

input resistance
21 Off 562  6 V < EXT.DCV  9 V
31 Off 1 k 9 V < EXT.DCV  15 V
4 On 410  5 V  EXT.DCV  8 V Switch for setting /CH_VALID

(when on) input resistance
820  8 V < EXT.DCV  15 V
(when off)
1. For bits 1 to 3 of bit switch S1, only one bit can be turned on at one time.

Scanner Interface
Table F-12 Setting Bit Switch (S2)
Bit Default Pull-up EXT. DCV Function

Resistor
1-8 On 410  5 V  EXT.DCV  8 V /CH0 to /CH7

(When on) SW for input resistance
820  8 V < EXT.DCV  15 V
(When off)
Bit switches S1 and S2 can be identified by the labels “S1” and “S2” on the
scanner interface board.
Step 6. Connect the flat cable to the scanner interface board, replace the scanner
interface board, and fix it onto place with the two screws.
Applying excessive force to the screws may break the tapped hole (less
than 0.98 N-m, 0.1 kgf-m).

- Scanner Interface
How to Use the Scanner Interface Board

This section provides information necessary for the E4980A/AL to operate
using the scanner interface.
Basic Procedure
Figure F-9 shows a sample procedure for using the scanner interface. Follow
this flow chart while referring to the following detailed descriptions.

Scanner Interface
Figure F-9 Basic Procedure
㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㩷㪧㪸㫉㪸㪾㫉㪸㫇㪿
㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪺㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㫊
㪤㪸㫂㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪺㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㪽㪸㪺㪼㩷㫍㪸㫃㫀㪻䃂㩷㪘㪚㪫㪠㪭㪘㪫㪠㪥㪞㩷㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜
㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪤㪬㪣㪫㪠䃂㩷㪚㪦㪩㪩㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜
㪛㪼㪽㫀㫅㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪽㫉㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㪺㫐㩿㫀㪼㫊㪀䃂㩷㪫㪜㪪㪫㩷㪝㪩㪜㪨㪬㪜㪥㪚㪰
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪘㪥㪛㩷㪩㪜㪝㪜㪩㪜㪥㪚㪜
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪭㪘㪣㪬㪜㩷㪜㪥㪫㪩㪰
㪛㪼㪽㫀㫅㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㫍㪸㫃㫌㪼㫊
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㫅㪼㫃㩷㫅㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉䃂㩷㪚㪦㪩㪩㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪪㪜㪣㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪧㪼㫉㪽㫆㫉㫄㩷㪦㪧㪜㪥㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㫊
㪸㫋㩷㪪㪧㪦㪫㫊㩷㪥㫆㪅㪈㩷㫋㫆㩷㪉㪇㪈
㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㪧㪼㫉㪽㫆㫉㫄㩷㪪㪟㪦㪩㪫㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㫊䃂㩷㪚㪦㪩㪩㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘
㪸㫋㩷㪪㪧㪦㪫㫊㩷㪥㫆㪅㪈㩷㫋㫆㩷㪉㪇㪈㩷㩷㩷㩷㪤㪜㪘㪪㪬㪩㪜㪤㪜㪥㪫㪪
㪧㪼㫉㪽㫆㫉㫄㩷㪣㪦㪘㪛㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㫊
㪸㫋㩷㪪㪧㪦㪫㫊㩷㪥㫆㪅㪈㩷㫋㫆㩷㪉㪇㪈
㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅䃂㩷㪫㪬㪩㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㪦㪥㩷㪚㪦㪩㪩㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㫅㪼㫃㩷㫅㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉䃂㩷㪚㪦㪩㪩㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪪㪜㪣㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼
㪧㪼㫉㪽㫆㫉㫄㩷㫄㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㫊
㪜㪥㪛
㪼㪋㪐㪏㪇㪸㫌㪼㪈㪈㪌㪐

- Scanner Interface
Activating Scanner Interface

Make the scanner interface valid to perform multi-channel correction and to
input/output signals through the interface connector on the E4980A/AL’s rear
panel.
Even when multi-channel correction is used without the interface

connector (for example, controlling a scanner and the E4980A/AL via
GPIB), the following procedure must be performed.
Step 1. Press the [System] key to display the SYSTEM INFO page.
Step 2. Use the cursor arrow keys to move the cursor to the SCANNER I/F field. The
following softkeys are displayed in the softkey label area.
— ON
— OFF
Step 3. Press the ON softkey. The scanner interface is now valid for output/input
signals.
Correction Mode
Set the correction mode to MULTI to use the multi-channel correction function.
Before setting the correction mode to MULTI, you need to set the scanner
interface to ON.
Step 1. Press the [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION to display the CORRECTION page.
Step 2. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the MODE
field. The following softkeys are displayed in the softkey label area.
— SINGLE
— MULTI
Step 3. Press the MULTI softkey to use the multi-channel correction function.
Test Frequency and Reference Value Entry

It is possible to store the correction data for 201 test frequencies. These test
frequencies are defined and monitored on the CORRECTION page.
On this page, the reference values (REF A and REF B) of the standards used for
LOAD correction are defined at 201 test frequencies. The reference values can
be stored with an appropriate function (FUNC). For example, to use the

Scanner Interface
standard capacitor that has reference parallel capacitance and D values, the
reference values should be stored with the Cp-D function. The reference values
are also stored on the CORRECTION page.
The function of the standard on the CORRECTION page can be defined

independently of the measurement function set on the MEAS SETUP page.
For example, if the reference values are defined as the Cp-D function
(entered with capacitance value and D value), the Z- parameter can be
measured while performing the correction.
The setting procedure is given below.

Step 2. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the FUNC
field.
Step 3. Use the softkeys to select the function to be used for entering the reference
values.
Step 4. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the SPOT
No. field.
Step 5. Use the numeric entry keys or softkeys on the front panel to enter a
measurement point number for entering the reference value.
Step 6. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the FREQ
field.
Step 7. When the FREQ field is OFF, press the ON softkey to use the correction data
of the measurement point number.
Step 8. Use the numeric entry keys and softkeys on the front panel to enter a test
frequency at a specific measurement point.
Step 9. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the REF A
field.
Step 10. Use the numeric entry keys and softkeys on the front panel to enter the
reference value of the primary parameter at the specified measurement point.
Step 11. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the REF B
field.
Step 12. Use the numeric entry keys and softkeys on the front panel to enter the
reference value of the secondary parameter at the specified measurement
point.

- Scanner Interface
Step 13. If necessary, move the cursor to the SPOT No. field and repeat steps 4 to 12
for other measurement points (frequency points).
If a test frequency is not equal to any of the correction frequencies,

correction (including OPEN, SHORT and LOAD) is not performed. In this
case, the E4980A/AL displays the raw measurement value including
additional error due to the test fixture’s residuals.
Correction Data Selection

Up to 128 sets of correction data for each scanner channel can be stored in the
flash memory. Each set of correction data can be arbitrarily assigned a channel
number for selection of correction data. You can set the channel number using
the /CHO to /CH7 signals, and the /CH_VALID signals, or the :CORR:USE
command via GPIB.
Channel Selection using Front Panel

Enter the channel number in the CH field on the CORRECTION page to set the
channel number. Steps are shown below.
Step 2. Use the cursor arrow keys to move the cursor to the CH field.
Step 3. Use the numeric entry keys or softkeys on the front panel to enter the channel
number.
Channel Selection using Interface Connector

You can set the channel number with the channel selection signals (/CH0 to
/CH7) and the channel valid signal (/CH_VALID). The /CH0 to /CH7 signals are
8-bit binary signals. /CH0 is the LSB (least significant bit) and /CH7 is the MSB
(most significant bit). An example is given below in Table F-13
Table F-13 Example of Channel Selection
/CH0 /CH1 /CH2 /CH3 /CH4 /CH5 /CH6 /CH7 Channel

Number
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 16
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 32
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 64

Scanner Interface
Table F-13 Example of Channel Selection
/CH0 /CH1 /CH2 /CH3 /CH4 /CH5 /CH6 /CH7 Channel

Number
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 127
/CH0 to /CH7 are negative true, so 1 indicates LOW and 0 indicates HIGH
in the above table.
/CH_VALID makes the E4980A/AL acknowledge that the channel number is

valid. The /CH_VALID signal must be set to LOW for the E4980A/AL to set the
channel number set with /CH0 to /CH7 signals.
In the case of channel number selection using the interface connector,

when the E4980A/AL is triggered, or when the E4980A/AL starts a
correction data measurement (for example, when the MEAS OPEN softkey
is pressed), the E4980A/AL acknowledges the channel number. Therefore,
even if the /CH0 to /CH7 signals and the /CH_VALID signal are sent, the
E4980A/AL will not set the channel number until it is triggered or until it
starts a correction data measurement.
Channel Selection using GPIB

The channel number used to select the correction data can be set using the
:CORR:USE command. The syntax of this command is:
:CORRection:USE[:CHANnel] <channel number>
Where,
<channel number>: 0 to 127 (integer)
For example, the sample code to set the channel number to 20 is as follows.
rtn = viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":CORR:METH MULT" + vbLf, 0)
rtn = viVPrintf(AgtE4980A/AL, ":CORR:USE 20" + vbLf, 0)
In case of the channel number selection using the :CORR:USE command,

the E4980A/AL acknowledges the channel number when it receives this
command. Therefore, if the “:CORR:USE 10” command is sent via GPIB, the
E4980A/AL will set the channel number to 10 when it receives the
command.
Monitoring Current Channel

You can monitor the current channel number selected for correction on the
CORRECTION page and the MEAS DISPLAY page. The “CH” field on these
pages indicates the current channel selected for correction.

- Scanner Interface
Correction Data Measurements

For correction data measurements, it is necessary to perform OPEN, SHORT,
and LOAD data measurements at 201 test frequencies for each channel.
The following is a sample procedure for performing correction data
measurements for a channel. Repeat the following procedure for each scanner
channel to be used.
Step 1. Select the scanner channel.
Step 2. Press the [Meas Setup] - CORRECTION key to display the CORRECTION page.
Step 3. Set the E4980A/AL’s channel number equal to that selected in Step 1.
Step 4. [OPEN correction]
Open the measurement contacts of the selected scanner channel.
No. field.
Step 6. Use the numeric entry keys or softkeys on the front panel to enter the
measurement point number to perform an OPEN measurement.
field.
Step 8. Press the MEAS OPEN softkey to measure OPEN condition at a specified test
frequency.
Step 9. If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 8 for other measurement points (other
frequencies).
Step 10. [SHORT correction]
Short the measurement contacts of the selected scanner channel.
No. field.
Step 12. Use the numeric entry keys or softkeys to enter the measurement point
number to perform a SHORT measurement.
field.
Step 14. Press the MEAS SHORT softkey to measure SHORT condition at a specified
test frequency.
frequencies).
Step 16. [LOAD correction]
Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the SPOT
No. field.

Scanner Interface
Step 17. Use the numeric entry keys or softkeys on the front panel to enter the
measurement point number to perform a LOAD measurement.
Step 18. Connect the standard for test frequency correction of a specified
measurement point number to the measurement contacts of the selected
scanner channel.
field.
Step 20. Press the MEAS LOAD softkey to measure the standard at a specified
frequency.
frequencies).
Step 22. Change the scanner’s and the E4980A/AL’s channel number and repeat steps
4 to 21 until this procedure has been performed for all scanner channels.
Activating the Correction Function

Set the correction function to ON in the following procedure in order to perform
the correction using the correction data.
No. field.
Step 3. Use the numeric entry keys or the softkeys on the front panel to enter the
measurement point number, and confirm that the correction frequencies to
be used (test frequencies of the measurement point number entered) are set
to ON (test frequency and reference values are displayed and OFF is not
displayed).
Step 4. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the OPEN
field.
Step 5. Press the “ON” softkey to set the OPEN correction function to ON.
Step 6. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the SHORT
field.
Step 7. Press the “ON” softkey to set the SHORT correction function to ON.
Step 8. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the LOAD
field.
Step 9. Press the “ON” softkey to set the LOAD correction function to ON.
Correction Data Confirmation

There are two ways to confirm the measurement data for each channel
correction: Use the front panel, and read the data using a query via GPIB.

- Scanner Interface
Confirm measurement data for correction on the front panel

Enter the channel number in the CH field on the CORRECTION page, and enter
the measurement point number in the SPOT No. field to confirm that the
measurement data for correction that have been already measured. Follow the
steps below.
Step 2. Use the cursor arrow keys on the front panel to move the cursor to the CH
field.
channel number of the measurement data for correction that you want to
confirm.
No. field.
measurement point number of the measurement data for correction that you
want to confirm (the number corresponding to the test frequency you want to
confirm).
Step 6. Correction data of the primary (secondary) parameter for OPEN correction are
displayed in the OPEN A (OPEN B) field. Correction data of the primary
(secondary) parameter for SHORT correction in the SHORT A (SHORT B) field,
and correction data of the primary (secondary) parameter for LOAD correction
are shown in the LOAD A (LOAD B) field.
Confirm measurement data for correction using GPIB

To confirm the measurement data for each channel correction, use the
following query to read the data via GPIB.
:CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi]? <channel number>
<channel number> 0 to 127 (integer)
The query response is as follows.
<open1 A>,<open1 B>,<short1 A>,<short1 B>,<load1 A>,<load1 B>,

:
:
<open200 A>,<open200 B>,<short200 A>,<short200 B>,<load200 A>,<load200
B>,
<open201 A>,<open201 B>,<short201 A>,<short201 B>,<load201 A>,<load201
B>,
<NLÊND>

Scanner Interface
Where,
<openXXX A> Primary parameter measurement data of OPEN correction at a

frequency of measurement point XXX.
<openXXX B> Secondary parameter measurement data of OPEN correction at a
<shortXXX A> Primary parameter measurement data of SHORT correction at a
<shortXXX B> Secondary parameter measurement data of SHORT correction at
a frequency of measurement point XXX.
<loadXXX A> Primary parameter measurement data of LOAD correction at a
<loadXXX B> Secondary parameter measurement data of LOAD correction at a
<NLÊND> Terminators (the EOI line is asserted while the New Line or Line
Feed character is being sent on the bus).
XXX in the above table indicates the measurement point number entered
in the field.

- Scanner Interface

Keysight E4980A/AL
Precision LCR Meter
User’s Guide
G Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A and

E4980A/AL
This appendix provides a functional comparison between 4284A, 4279A, and

E4980A/AL.
Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A, and E4980A/AL

The Migration Guide has been provided for a functional comparison between
4284A, 4279A, and E4980A/AL. Refer to the following website.
http://www.keysight.com/find/E4980A/AL/

- Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A and E4980A/AL
Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A, and E4980A/AL

Index
Numerics Configuration Save, 176

Correction, 115, 212
4279A, 546 All Frequency Points, 118
4284A, 546 Specified Frequency Points, 123
Correction Mode, 131
A Cp, 198
Cs, 198
ALC, 96
All Frequency Points, 115
D
ASCII Format, 261, 267
Attention of USB Memory, 177 Data Buffer Memory, 259
Auto Recall, 185 Data Format, 267
Automatic Bias Polarity Control, 111 Data Processing Flowchart, 399
Automatic Level Control, 96 Data Save, 176
AUX BIN, 140 DC Bias, 41
Auxiliary BIN, 140 DC Bias Current Isolation, 100
Averaging, 101 DC Bias Current Monitor, 107
DC Bias Voltage Monitor, 106
B DC Source, 41, 110
Terminal, 42
Basic Specification, 403 DCI ISO, 100
Beep, 142, 161 DCI Measurement, 109
Beep Mode, 142 DCR Measurement, 108
Beep Tone, 162, 163 Deviation, 113
Bias Current Interface, 157, 486 Deviation Measurement, 113
Bias Current Source, 486 Device Selector, 230
Bias Polarity, 111 DHCP, 168
BIN, 140
Binary Format, 261, 270
E
Buffer Memory, 259
BUS, 94 EMC, 439
Bus Trigger, 94, 254 Environment, 439
Equivalent key, 317
C Error Message, 468
EXT, 94
Cable Length, 132 External Trigger, 94, 254
Cable Length Correction, 212
Calibration
F
Recommended Period, 456
Capacitance, 199 Firmware Version, 159, 464
Characteristics Example, 217 Fixture, 194
Checking the Shipment, 23 Four Terminal Measurement Method, 207
Circuit Mode, 198 Four Terminal Pair, 203
Cleaning, 455 Front Panel, 39
Command Reference, 316 Fuse, 26
Comment, 93
Comment Line, 46
Comparator, 136

Index
G Manual Trigger, 94, 254

Measurement Example
General Specification, 434 Capacitor, 219
GPIB, 228, 229, 423 Inductor, 222
GPIB Address, 167, 230 Using DC Source, 224
Guard Plate, 210 Measurement Procedure, 194
Medium, 179
H Medium Mode, 179
Monitor Information, 159
Handler Interface, 158, 494 Multi Correction Mode, 131
I N
IEEE Command, 250 Nominal, 402
Impedance, 195 Nominal Value, 138
Inductance, 199 Notational Convention, 316
Infinity, 76
Initializing, 90
O
INT, 94
Internal Memory, 176 OPEN Correction, 118, 212
Internal Trigger, 94, 254 OPEN/SHORT Correction, 212
Interpolation Method, 118 OPEN/SHORT/LOAD Correction, 212
IP Address, 168 Operating Environments, 31
Items Packaged, 24 Option, 159, 319, 424
Option 001, 426
K Option 002, 44, 157, 486
Option 201, 43, 158, 424, 494
Key Lock, 452 Option 301, 43, 159, 424, 522
Option 710, 424
L Output Format, 261
LAN, 44, 168, 228, 231, 423 Overload, 76, 458, 520
LCD Display, 46
Limit Mode, 136 P
List of Default Values, 479 Page
List Sweep, 146 CATALOG, 178
Mode, 85, 147 CORRECTION, 115
Sweep Parameter, 148 LIMIT TABLE SETUP, 133
with two parameters, 355 LIST SWEEP SETUP, 146
Local Lockout, 252 MEAS SETUP, 91
Lp, 198 SELF TEST, 171
Ls, 198 SERVICE, 173
STSTEM CONFIG, 160
M SYSTEM INFO, 156
MAC Address, 159 Parallel Circuit Mode, 198
MAN, 94 Parameters, 317
Manual Change, 464 Parasitics Impedance, 216
Manual Printing History, 2 Parasitics Incident, 216

Index
Power Cable, 27 :BIAS:RANGe:AUTO, 323

Power Supply, 26 :BIAS:STATe, 324
Power Switch :BIAS:VOLTage[:LEVel], 324
Turning the Power ON and OFF, 34 :COMParator:ABIN, 325
Preset, 41 :COMParator:BEEPer, 325
Product Overview, 38 :COMParator:BIN:CLEar, 325
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt:CLEar, 326
R :COMParator:BIN:COUNt:DATA, 326
:COMParator:BIN:COUNt[:STATe], 326
Rear Panel, 43 :COMParator:MODE, 326
Recall, 176 :COMParator:SEQuence:BIN, 327
Auto Recall, 185 :COMParator:SLIMit, 328
Recommended Calibration Period, 456 :COMParator:SWAP, 328
Register Number, 180 :COMParator:TOLerance:BIN[1-9], 329
Regular Calibration, 456 :COMParator:TOLerance:NOMinal, 329
Remote Control System, 228 :COMParator[:STATe], 328
GPIB, 229 :CONTrol:CBIas:STATe, 329
LAN, 231 :CONTrol:HANDler:STATe, 330
Remote Mode, 252 :CONTrol:SCANner:STATe, 330
Replacement, 456 :CORRection:LENGth, 331
Requesting Repair, 456 :CORRection:LOAD:STATe, 331
Residual Impedance, 121 :CORRection:LOAD:TYPE, 331
Resolution :CORRection:METHod, 332
DC Bias, 69 :CORRection:OPEN:STATe, 333
Frequency, 64 :CORRection:OPEN[:EXECute], 333
Test Signal Level, 66 :CORRection:SHORt:STATe, 333
Rp, 198 :CORRection:SHORt[:EXECute], 333
Rs, 198 :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:FREQuency[:SEL
ected], 334
S :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:MULTiple:S
TANdard, 334
Safety, 439 :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:LOAD:MULTiple[:
Sample Program, 283 EXECute], 334
Save, 176 :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:OPEN:MULTiple[:
Measurement Result, 186 EXECute], 335
Screenshot, 191 :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:SHORt:MULTiple[
System Information, 174 :EXECute], 335
Save/Recall, 176 :CORRection:SPOT[1-201]:STATe, 335
Instrument Configuration State, 178 :CORRection:USE:DATA:SINGle, 337
Scanner Interface, 159, 522 :CORRection:USE:DATA[:MULTi], 336
SCPI Command, 250 :CORRection:USE[:CHANnel], 336
:ABORt, 321 :CURRent[:LEVel], 337
:AMPLitude:ALC, 321 :DISPlay:CCLear, 338
:APERture, 321 :DISPlay:ENABle, 338
:BIAS:CURRent[:LEVel], 322 :DISPlay:LINE, 338
:BIAS:POLarity:AUTO, 322 :DISPlay:PAGE, 339
:BIAS:POLarity:CURRent[:LEVel], 323 :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD:
:BIAS:POLarity:VOLTage[:LEVel], 323 DATA, 340

Index
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[1-2][:DATA]:FMSD[ :MMEMory:DELete[:REGister], 357

:STATe], 340 :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe[:REGister], 358
:FETCh:SMONitor:IAC, 341 :MMEMory:STORe:STATe[:REGister], 358
:FETCh:SMONitor:IDC, 341 :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:AUTO, 358
:FETCh:SMONitor:VAC, 341 :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation:LEVel:VALue, 359
:FETCh:SMONitor:VDC, 342 :OUTPut:DC:ISOLation[:STATe], 359
:FETCh[:IMPedance]:CORRected, 341 :OUTPut:HPOWer, 360
:FETCh[:IMPedance][:FORMatted], 341 :SOURce:DCSource:STATe, 360
:FORMat:ASCii:LONG, 342 :SOURce:DCSource:VOLTage[:LEVel], 360
:FORMat:BORDer, 342 :STATus:OPERation:CONDition, 361
:FORMat[:DATA], 343 :STATus:OPERation:ENABle, 361
:FORMat:EXPonent:DIGit, 345 :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt], 361
:FREQuency[:CW], 345 :SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe, 362
:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe:AUTO, 345 :SYSTem:BEEPer:TONE, 362
:FUNCtion:DCResistance:RANGe[:VALue], :SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate], 361
344 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRe
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:MODE, 344 ss, 363
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence:FILL, 345 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:ADDRes
:FUNCtion:DEV[1-2]:REFerence[:VALue], s, 363
345 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:AIP[:ST
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe:AUTO, 345 ATe], 363
:FUNCtion:IMPedance:RANGe[:VALue], 346 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONFig
:FUNCtion:IMPedance[:TYPE], 346 ure, 364
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IAC[:STATe], 347 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CONTro
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:IDC[:STATe], 348 l, 364
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VAC[:STATe], 348 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRe
:FUNCtion:SMONitor:VDC[:STATe], 349 nt:ADDRess, 364
:HCOPy:SDUMp:DATA, 349 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRe
:INITiate:CONTinuous, 350 nt:DGATeway, 365
:INITiate[:IMMediate], 350 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:CURRe
:LIST:BAND[1-201], 350 nt:SMASk, 365
:LIST:BIAS:CURRent, 351 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DGATe
:LIST:BIAS:VOLTage, 351 way, 365
:LIST:CLEar:ALL, 352 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:DHCP[:
:LIST:CURRent, 352 STATe], 365
:LIST:DCSource:VOLTage, 352 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:MAC,
:LIST:FREQuency, 353 366
:LIST:MODE, 353 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:PRESet,
:LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:CLEar, 354 366
:LIST:SEQuence:TSTamp:DATA, 354 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:RESTart
:LIST:STIMulus:DATA, 354 , 366
:LIST:STIMulus:MDATa, 355 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SMASk,
:LIST:STIMulus:TYPE, 355 366
:LIST:VOLTage, 356 :SYSTem:DATE, 367
:MEMory:CLEar, 356 :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT], 367
:MEMory:DIM, 357 :SYSTem:KLOCk, 368
:MEMory:FILL, 357 :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer[:NAME],
:MEMory:READ, 357 371

Index
:SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer:DEFault, Step Delay Time, 104

372 Step Mode, 85, 147
:SYSTem:PRESet, 368 Stray Admittance, 118
:SYSTem:RESTart, 368 Supplemental Information, 440
:SYSTem:TIME, 368 Swap Parameter, 134
:SYSTem:TZONe, 369 Sweep Mode, 85, 147
:TRIGger:DELay, 370 Syntax, 316
:TRIGger:SOURce, 370 System Date, 165
:TRIGger:TDEL, 371 System Information, 156
:TRIGger[:IMMediate], 370
:VOLTage[:LEVel], 371 T
*CLS, 318
*ESE, 318 Telnet, 237
*ESR?, 318 Test Fixture, 212, 488
*IDN?, 318 Test Lead, 132, 488
*LRN?, 319 Test Signal Level, 201
*OPC, 319 Tolerance Mode, 136
*OPC?, 319 Trigger, 94
*OPT?, 319 External, 44
*RST, 319 Trigger Delay Time, 102
*SRE, 320 Trigger Mode, 94
*STB?, 320 Trigger Source, 254
*TRG, 320 Trigger System, 253
*TST?, 320 Trouble Occurs, 458
*WAI, 320 Two Terminal Measurement Method, 207
Screenshot Typeface Conventions, 6
Save to controller, 349 Typical, 402
Save to USB memory, 191
Self Test, 171, 453 U
Sequential Mode, 85, 136, 147
Serial Number, 159, 464 USB, 228, 243, 423
Plate, 44, 464 USB Address, 159
Series Circuit Mode, 198 USB Memory, 176
Service Mode, 458 USB Port, 244
Service Request, 265 USB Remote Control System, 243
Shield, 211 Users Guide, 6
SHORT Correction, 121, 212
SICL-LAN, 232 V
Single Correction Mode, 131
Varactor Diode, 111
Skip Key, 50
Specification, 402
Bias Current Interface, 487 W
Handler Interface, 495 Warning Message, 476
Scanner Interface, 523 Warranty Period, 5
Specified Frequency Points, 115 Web Server, 240
SRQ, 265
Status Byte, 273
Status Register, 265

Index

This information is subject to change without notice.
© Keysight Technologies 2006 - 2019
Edition 16, October 2019
*E4980-90230*
E4980-90230
www.keysight.com

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter: User's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter: User's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter: User's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter

Printed in Malaysia U.S. Government Rights Safety Notices

1. Unpacking and Preparation

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 3

2. Interface Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

4. Configuring Measurement Conditions (Display and Function Related Settings)

4 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 5

Handler Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

7. Measurement Procedure and Examples

6 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

Selecting Circuit Mode of Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

8. Overview of Remote Control

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 7

System-wide states and transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

10. SCPI Command Reference

8 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 9

10 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 11

11. Specifications and Supplemental Information

12. Precautions for Use and Daily Checks

12 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

C.List of Default Values

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 13

List of LAN Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

D.Bias Current Interface

14 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

External Trigger Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

G.Functional Comparison between 4284A, 4279A and E4980A/AL

Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide 15

16 Keysight E4980A/AL User’s Guide

1 Unpacking and Preparation

Contents of this Chapter

- Checking the Shipment on page?

Checking the Shipment

If the packing box or shock-absorbing material has been damaged, leave

18 Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter

Table 1-1 Items Packaged with the E4980A/AL

Name Product/Part Qty

-Power Cable 1 8120-4753 1

-USB Cable 82357-61601 1

-Rack mount kit without handles (Option 1CM)2 5063-9241 1

Figure 1-1 E4980A/AL Accessories

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter 19

Preparations before Use

Verifying the Power Supply

Table 1-2 Power Supply Requirements

Voltage 90 to 132 Vac or 198 to 264 Vac1

Setting up the Fuse

Please use the following fuse type.

Figure 1-2 Fuse Holder and Power Cable Receptacle

20 Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter

Verifying and Connecting the Power Cable

Figure 1-3 shows the power cable options.

Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter 21

Figure 1-3 Power cable options

22 Keysight E4980A/AL Precision LCR Meter

How to Remove the Handle

㪈㪅㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪈㪌㪅㪛㪚㩷㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼㩷㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃㪈㪉㪅㪬㪥㪢㪥㪦㪮㪥㩷㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃

㪉㪅㪣㪚㪛㩷㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪋㪅㪤㪼㫅㫌㩷㪢㪼㫐㪈㪋㪅㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㪫㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫃

㪠㫅㫇㫌㫋㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㪤㪼㫊㫊㪸㪾㪼㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㩷㪘㫉㪼㪸